Home

User`s/Programmer`s Reference Volume 1, Core

1. NOTE Amplitude correction data is sorted in the table by frequency The sorting occurs immediately after you have entered the frequency value via the front panel E 9 E D S E Ei m Si ei E E D Ba 5 z e 44 Chapter2 Other Chapter 2 Front Panel Key Reference AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amplitude Allows you to enter the amplitude value for the current amplitude correction point After selecting a point the point number automatically increments and Frequency becomes active to allow entry of the frequency of the next point Press Bk Sp to correct errors Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Cable Edit Delete Point Allows you to delete the amplitude correction data for the currently selected point The prompt If you are sure press key again to delete will appear on the display Pressing Delete Point again will delete the point and adjust all of the point numbers as appropriate Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Cable Edit Delete Correction Allows you to clear all data from the selected amplitude correction set The prompt If you are sure press key again to delete will appear on the display Pressing Delete again will delete the correction set Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Cable Allows you to correct for gain or loss other than for antenna cable or user Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Correction On Off Tu
2. au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Avg Type Auto Man NOTE Front Panel Key Reference BW Avg number can be selected Increasing the average number will further smooth the trace The type of averaging used is selected by pressing BW Avg Avg Type The average is restarted when any of the following occurs anew average number is entered any measurement related parameter e g Center Frequency is changed Restart is pressed Single Sweep is pressed When in Single Sweep the specified number of averages is taken then the sweep stops When in continuous sweep the specified number of averages is taken then the averaging continues with each new sweep averaged in with a weight of 1 Average Number and the old average reduced by multiplying it by Average Number Ll s Average Number To turn off averaging press Average Off The number of sweeps can only be entered using the numeric keypad not the knob or step keys Key Access BW Avg Accesses the functions to automatically or manually choose from one of the following averaging scales Video or Power RMS If video averaging is selected the measurement results are the average of the signal level in the y axis scale If the power average RMS is selected all measured results are converted into power units before averaging and filtering operations and converted back to decibels for displaying The main point to
3. If Mode Preset is pressed the current mode settings are reset to the factory defaults Pressing Mode Preset does not change the mode e If Factory Preset is pressed a factory preset will be performed as described above Recalling any state including the user preset state will affect the conditions of more parameters than are affected by a factory preset For example external preamp gain and input impedance correction are not affected by a factory preset but may be affected by a user preset In the System menu if Power On is set to Preset and Preset Type is set to Factory turning on the analyzer performs a factory preset The last state of the analyzer before it was turned off is recalled if Power On is set to Last The user preset state is recalled if Power On is set to Preset and Preset Type is set to User Factory Preset Conditions Amplitude correction factors off Amplitude Ref Signal off Amplitude units 50 Q input dBm log 75 Q input dBmV log Annotation and graticule display on Attenuation 10 dB auto coupled Center frequency E4401B and E4411B E4402B and E4403B E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B 750 MHz 1 5 GHz 3 35 GHz 6 6 GHz 13 25 GHz CF step size 10 of span Coupled functions all set to AUTO Detector Peak auto coupled Display line level 25 dBm display off Frequency scale type Linear Frequency offset 0 Hz IF
4. Segments are demarcated by vertical lines The width of a given segment is determined by the ratio of the number of sweep in the segment to the number of sweep in the total trace For example if there are five segments with 101 sweep each 505 total each segment occupies 20 of trace If you increase the number of in one of the segments to 404 808 total that segment will occupy half of the trace the other four segments 12 596 each You can define up to 32 segments with a total maximum number of sweep equal to 8192 Frequency Scale Type Log is not available when Segmented On is selected Key Access Sweep Segmented Modify Accesses the segmented sweep editor described below Key Access Sweep Segmented 146 Chapter2 NOTE NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Sweep Segmented Sweep Editor When the editor is entered Sweep Segmented Modify Edit the segmented sweep mode is turned on and a dual display appears The upper window shows the trace displayed as described above The lower window shows the editor data in tabular form one segment per row with segment number and parameter values occupying the seven columns The paramenters that can be set are Center Freq Span Resolution BW e Video BW Sweep Time Zero Span only The trace is updated after each segment has a complete row of data entered Although thirty two segments are possible only 8 rows of data are shown in the table at a tim
5. This command queries the earliest entry to the error queue and then deletes that entry CLS clears the entire error queue Front Panel Access System Show Errors Locate SCPI Command Errors SYSTem ERRor VERBose OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem ERRor VERBose Chapter 5 365 Remote Command Reference SYSTem Subsystem Adds additional information to the error messages returned by the SYSTem ERRor command It indicates which SCPI command was executing when the error occurred and what about that command was unacceptable error number error message annotated SCPI command The maximum length of the annotated SCPI command is 80 characters If the error occurs in a SCPI command longer than 80 characters the lt Err gt sentinel is placed at the end of the annotated SCPI command Example First set SYST ERR VERBose ON If the command SENSe FREQuently CENTer 942 6MHz is sent then sending SYST ERR returns 113 Undefined header SENSe FREQuently Err CENTer 942 6MHz lt NL gt The lt Err gt shown after FREQuently shows you the spelling error The lt NL gt is the typical representation for the command terminator If the command SENSe FREQ CENTer 942 6Sec is sent then sending SYST ERR returns 131 Invalid suffix SENSe FREQuency CENTer 942 6Sec lt Err gt lt NL gt The lt Err gt shown after Sec shows you the invalid suffix Factory Preset and RST Not affected by RST Re
6. Front Panel Key Reference File If you wish to compare two saved traces place traces in view mode before saving them This prevents the trace from being rewritten based on a state change from subsequent loads Limits Displays all limits files you may wish to load to determine whether a trace has exceeded preset specifications LIM Limit sets can hold up to 200 points Limits can only be loaded individually Key Access File Load Type When loading Limits files be sure you have selected the appropriate X Axis Units frequency or time Display Limits X Axis Units If you are in time X Axis Units and you load frequency limits all current limit line data will be erased and the analyzer will switch to frequency units The reverse of the this situation also holds true Sort Destination Chapter 2 Corrections Displays all corrections files you may wish to load CBL ANT OTH AMP Corrections provide a way to adjust the trace display for preset gain factors such as for cable loss A correction set may hold up to 200 points Key Access File Load Type More Measurement Results Displays all previously saved measurement results files you may wish to load Measurement results files are saved in CSV format for importing into spreadsheets Key Access File Load Type More Accesses the Sort menu key Sort accesses a menu of keys that allow you to view your saved files according to a selected file att
7. Key Access File More Create Dir Formats a double density floppy disk to 1 44 MB format 720 kB disks are not supported Key Access File More Format Now Executes the format function After pressing Format Now the following message will appear on the display WARNING You are about to destroy ALL data on volume A Press Format Now again to proceed or any other key to abort During the formatting Formatting Disk will appear on the display Once formatted Volume A formatted will appear in the status line on the display m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Chapter 2 93 Front Panel Key Reference File NOTE When using a personal computer to manipulate Setup files filename set saved to a floppy ensure the similarly named files with extensions like s01 s02 etc are handled in a like manner For example if you rename of the set file you must rename all the sOx files as well These files are necessary to allow complete restoration of the originally saved Setup Key Access File More Format ai 9 E D E E E EI Pa Em x E D Ba A 5 e 94 Chapter2 Marker Count On Off NOTE Resolution Auto Man Front Panel Key Reference Freq Count Freq Count Activates the Marker Normal function if there are no markers and then turns the marker count function on Marker Count On turns on the marker counter If no marker is active before Mar
8. LSERNGetEC Fenteng As EE AE dE RES A Ed 329 SENSe POWer RPEIGAIN STAIe OFPIONION A AE shud ee Ed RR RE RR RE e 330 E RE EE KEE 330 SENSe T POWer REEMIXer RANGS UPPer anipl gt secs ss cce secte R9 e ew 330 GENSSUPOWeHIDRPEIMIXer RANG BI EE 330 GENSCEPONSSHRPEPADRISE SL IBI EE 330 SENSeE POWeeTRFELEPAD JIust 4u esce ace E eR doce eS qr e ebd ERR ERE RES e EE 330 SENSE Power EPIPE EPBRGE e Ae AE E Pes Ead eeh puedo puede E E ee 331 3EN5e SIDenary MODE ISUPpressllSEDEE iuiucebuwvekeec Rex EENS PE RW 332 SEM Se LS IDenb IR oci seRRREYEEEUCRRREXV REA NoT Ro ENA re nat etu dr RpEN RES ES 332 SENSe SIDentiy STAR OPPIONIOUHL NEE EA EE EELER 332 3SENSeESIDenpry SIAE EE 332 SENSe s WEep POINIS number of POMS e E eek pur eR Ret XOCRR SE e E EE dene 334 SENSES WES PONE acid corte Gosek hee che SSR ORA RR CR ACER E IRUR RP RR RO o 334 LSENSe ko WESD OEOMEDEGULINET ong ores NEIER ER Ee RO ELE CR p e P CR CER ORC 335 SENSe SWEep SEGMent DATA MERGe SS Top SG ban stung 336 SENSe SWEep SEGMent DATA ALL lt SSToplCSPan gt lt string gt 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee ee nnn 335 SENSe SWEep SEGMent DATA ALL SSToplCSPam eeeeeeeeeee ee nnn 335 SBN Se SW BepiS BloM amp ent DELEG Loses pbeyerkkses e 3 pb RA ERE ERpe4ria sexta buds 337 SENSe SWEep SEGMent DELete ROW intepet EELER NEEN EEN ENEE EE RR ehe 337 3ENSe SWEep SEGMent S TATe OFFIONIUIT EELER ERENNERT EE 337 3ENSeES WEN SE
9. Mkr CF Step Mkr Start Mkr Stop Mkr A gt Span NOTE Mkr Ref Lvl Front Panel Key Reference Marker Marker gt Accesses the following marker function menu keys Sets the center frequency of the analyzer to the marker frequency In Delta mode Mkr CF sets the center frequency to the marker delta value Mkr CF is not available in zero span When the frequency scale is in log mode the center frequency is not at the center of the display Key Access Marker Changes the center frequency step size to match the value of the active marker Press Frequency then CF Step Auto Man to view the step size If marker delta is active the step size will be set to the frequency difference between the markers This function can be used to step from one signal harmonic to another Mkr gt CF Step is not available in zero span Key Access Marker gt Changes the start frequency so that it is equal to the frequency of the active marker In Delta mode Mkr Start sets the start frequency to the marker delta value Mkr Start is not available in zero span Key Access Marker gt Changes the stop frequency so that it is equal to the frequency of the active marker In Delta mode Mkr Stop sets the stop frequency to the marker delta value Mkr Stop is not available in zero span Key Access Marker gt Sets the start and stop frequencies to the values of the delta markers The marker is then se
10. NOTE Remote Command Reference The first few pages of this chapter contain common commands specified in IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 486 1 1987 New York NY 1992 Following these commands the Agilent ESA spectrum analyzers SCPI commands are listed Chapter 3 Programming Fundamentals on page 175 and Chapter 4 Status Registers on page 193 supplement the information presented in this chapter Refer to Chapter 2 Front Panel Key Reference on page 37 in this guide for additional information about the operation of each analyzer function Use the analyzer HELP key to obtain similar information about analyzer key functions Refer to the Agilent 8590 ESA Spectrum Analyzers Programming Conversion Guide for specific backwards compatibility information between commands for HP Agilent 8590 Series spectrum analyzers and Agilent ESA spectrum analyzers If you are using an optional programming compatibility modes for example Option 266 you must refer to the manual that came with the option for command information 228 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference SCPI Sections and Subsections SCPI Sections and Subsections SCPI commands related to major functional areas such as calculate or are grouped into blocks or subsystems Some of these subsystems are further divided into subsections such as calculate marker or sense harmonics An in
11. o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection CALCulate MARKer Subsection Markers All Off on All Traces CALCulate MARKer AOFF Turns off all markers on all the traces Front Panel Access Marker Marker All Off Continuous Peaking Marker Function CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 CPEak STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 CPEak STATe Turns on or off continuous peaking It continuously puts the selected marker on the highest displayed signal peak Refer to Continuous Pk On Off on page 116 for more information This function is intended to maintain the marker on signals with a frequency that is changing and an amplitude that is not changing Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks This command may not be used to activate a given marker Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Continuous Pk On Off Frequency Counter Marker Resolution CALCulate MARKer FCOunt RESolution real CALCulate MARKer FCOunt RESolution Sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter Setting the resolution to AUTO will couple the marker counter resolution to the frequency span Factory Preset and RST 1 kHz Range 1 Hz to 100 kHz Default Unit Hz Front Panel 246 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Access Freq Count Resolution Auto Man Frequency Counter Marker Automatic Resolution CALCulate MARKer
12. ssseeeeee eee eee eee 249 CALOMatc MARKemI238M MODBSJ AAR dr d r Hie PREG EH RiP RR CER EERE RES de r 249 CALL ulate MARK er PSP Peek 9 erh EAEE DERE REOR DERE ERO ERROR crease a phe 251 CALCWae MAR Ker 1254S CT OPPROPNIDIE er GcbesbbePERIC CREE E EEE Rie re 233 CALC ubte Manne DRENKEN 254 SCALECulate e MAREer tT DISTRACSe UItedels suus iter he ob ROO SOOO YA v eR RR CR d eR 254 AALCulate MARKerm l2IH TRACCE AUTO OFPIONIL uec eR RR ERR oce RR ERR 254 CALC ulate MARK er PBH TRACH AUTO EE 254 CALC ulate MARK er PBT RACE oo iics ce bob ba d EReREERER EERE H EEHEREROREEOT ERE DERE ERR ES 254 CAT Culate MARRKer 1 2164 TRC Kimg STATe OFFIONION e EE he RR AER EEN AE 254 19 E a S e S E 5 E gt Q E un E S g E Q KE S z List of Commands CALCulate MARK er LBA TRCRAIngE STAIO errean cdase idee ced EE REENEN 254 CALCHI MARK er EEEX Spare ss co sac cabee arses ea deed ead ieee kevee dd en bhiveaeae ned ee 235 ALC ulate MAR Ker TIREX CEN Ter epaia eaa doe RA eR EELER EE EE EE EEN 255 CALCilate MARK a IBA i TN KEE 233 CALC wate MAR Ker BUX POSION INGE Loos caesa peer EK ENEE E pc a Rp ERR e 255 CALCulate MARKer U 2ISM X POSIGOD CEN ler c patatim i a uses per ho ex nho ase mh aS 256 CALCulate NMAREer 1 2134 X POSIton CENTet ERNEIEREN REESE E EAE 256 CALCulate MARKer 1 I21314 X POSition SPAN lt param gt eh 256 X ATLCulate MARKem1 253BH X POSION SPAN EE cesse sc
13. sszusaskserh kn RR RR C 378 TRigger SEQnence EX Temal L SLODBGT AER AE A eee Sdn ORR EEG RRRATERRA EAR NE 378 TEIGper S EOuence p RT Umi sss eek ebb ee SASS eee eR DECREASE OSREREREL SO SSAT SEDER SS 379 TRIGser SBEOuence OP PSer STATS OFFIONO ias cds REENEN RO RR Rue 380 TRIGSe SEOuence VOFF er S EAIRT cosa seh xaO steed ORA HU ROREM RC HR ease a 380 TE Hasen ee OFFS A qi b HRHDOYHERUUDE EqUO dc pO 3 8 ERROR EY eR COR p ge Re pac a CR 379 Titer SbEOuecBce RPBUuCSUPSBEOQUUIV EE 380 TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst FSELectivity STATe OFFIONION selle 380 TRIGger SBQuence RPBurscLB Vek ABSolute lt ampl gt As 4 NN SEET eek er x RR qe XR eres Roe 380 TRIGger SEQuence RPEBurscLEVeEABSolute i osecsserkk aere ERI RR X e ARCU OC XD Re YR 380 TRIGser SEQuence RFBurst LEVel RELa ve rel ampl gt Ae AE sesto Rr Ere E unicki 381 TEIGper S EOnence RPBursct LEVOERELGUe iios zer dE EE E EEN AAR 381 TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel TYPE ABSolutelRBLative leen ee 381 TRiggger SEQuence RPBursCcLEVeETYPBT 6 1005 60000 EE EE dE aaae RETE Rr ROEE dE TES OR 381 TEIG ser SEOnuence RE Ruse NPG ENEE ENEE QE EY e oC Reade ELE pn 382 TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst NPDiscrim STATe OFFIONIOIT lees I 382 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce IMMediatel VIDeolLINEIEXTernallIRFBurstITV 0 02022 382 TR IGser SE Ouence SOURCE oeuvre EC E Ee AE RR denne hore baud oka ds EE EEN 382 TRigger Se Quence VIDeo E Vel eamp
14. Bit Decimal Description Value 8 256 CALibration Summary This is the summary bit for the Questionable Calibration Status Register 9 512 INTegrity Sum This is the summary bit for the Questionable Integrity Status Register 10 1024 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 11 2048 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 12 4096 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 13 8192 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 14 16384 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 15 32768 Always Zero 0 Questionable Status Power Condition and Event Registers The Questionable Status Power Condition Register continuously monitors output power status of the analyzer Condition registers are read only To query the condition register send the command STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1 The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register The changes may be positive from 0 to 1 or negative from 1 to 0 Send the command STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansitio
15. Dir Select o o By Date By Name By Extension By Size Order Down ls E o Menu Maps File Menus 2 of 3 Type Corrections Measurement Results More 20f2 When Type Trace When Type Limits Destination Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 By Date By Name By Extension By Size Order Down c ro Destination Type Measurement Results More 20f2 sde nuaw a Grayed out if no directory selected b Continued on sheet 1 of 3 c Continued on sheet 3 of 3 d Only available when Type is set to Trace or Limits Chapter 6 399 Menu Maps File Menus 3 of 3 File Menus 3 of 3 Sheet 3 of 3 Ka e E ES e File Catalog Save Loadnt Delete Copy Rename More 10f2 Create Dir Format More 20f2 File Format Format Now D o Copy Copy Now Type Sort n Io zi o Dir Up a Dir Select Rename Rename Now Type Sort Dir Up Dir Select Create Dir Create Dir Now Name a Dir Up Dir Select Sort By Date By Name By Extension By Size Order Down E lo o o Aa By Date By Name By Extension By Size Order Down c O More 10f2 Type Type Trace More 1of2 Type Measurement Results More 20f2 Type Measurement Results More 20f2 To Alpha Editor 2 a Grayed out if no directory selected b See sheet 1 of 3 c Continued on sheet 2
16. SENSe SWEep TIME GATE TYPE Selects between edge and level mode for time gated spectrum analysis Level triggers the gate when the signal surpasses a specific level set to either low or high Edge triggers the gate when the edge of a signal is encountered set to either a negative going edge or a positive going edge Factory Preset and RST Edge Front Panel Access Sweep Gate Gate Control Edge Level 342 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference SOURce Subsystem SOURce Subsystem The SOURce subsystem controls the signal characteristics of the tracking generator Refer also to the OUTPut Subsystem on page 300 which contains a command that controls the tracking generator output Sets the Output Power Offset Correction SOURce CORRection OFFSet rel ampl gt SOURce CORRection OFFSet Specifies an offset for the displayed output power level An offset power level can be added to the displayed level to compensate for system losses for example cable loss or gains for example preamplifier gain This offset does not change the power out of the source it only changes the display so that it reads out the actual power delivered to the device under test Factory Preset and RST 0 dB Range 327 6 dB to 327 6 dB Default Unit Currently selected source power units Front Panel Access Source Amptd Offset Source Attenuation SOURCe POWer ATTenuation ampl SOURCe POWer ATTenuation Attenua
17. When the Average detector is selected and the amplitude scale is linear the fastest sweet time is 8 milliseconds With firmware A 08 00 and greater in zero span the auto manual function of this key is not applicable When Sweep Time Auto is selected in non zero span any changes to Sweep Time while in zero span will revert to the Auto value when you return to non zero span When Sweep Time Man is selected in non zero span any changes to Sweep Time while in zero span will be maintained when you return to non zero span The maximum sweep time is 4000 seconds for any set of conditions Refer to your instrument s appropriate Specifications Guide for more information about Sweep Time and its relation to other instrument settings Key Access Sweep 142 Chapter2 Sweep Single Cont Auto Swp Coupling SR SA Gate NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Sweep Switches the analyzer between the continuous sweep mode and the single sweep mode Pressing Sweep Single puts the analyzer in single sweep mode Press Single on the front panel to enable a sweep when in single sweep mode When Sweep Cont is selected one sweep follows another as soon as it is triggered Pressing Preset When Preset Type is set to Factory or turning the power on sets the sweep mode to continuous sweep Key Access Sweep Selects stimulus response SR or spectrum analyzer SA default auto coupled sweep times In stimulus response mode auto coupled sw
18. ei 3 D Ba 5 x E NOTE NOTE Front Panel Key Reference AMPLITUDE Y Scale frequencies less than the lowest frequency entered Similarly the amplitude correction for the highest frequency entered will be applied to all frequencies greater than the highest frequency entered For amplitude correction factors a maximum of two entries with the same frequency are valid Only the first and last points of a series with the same frequency values are used any middle points are ignored Amplitude correction data is sorted in the table by frequency The sorting occurs immediately after you have entered the frequency value via the front panel Cable 42 Delete Correction Amplitude Allows you to enter the amplitude value for the current amplitude correction point After selecting a point the point number automatically increments and Frequency becomes active to allow entry of the frequency of the next point Press Bk Sp to correct errors Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Antenna Edit Delete Point Allows you to delete the amplitude correction data for the currently selected point The prompt If you are sure press key again to delete will appear on the display Pressing Delete Point again will delete the point and adjust all of the point numbers as appropriate Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Antenna Edit Allows you to clear all data from the selected am
19. of interest are measured with the data presented in a single trace This improves measurement speed and provides more detail and resolution in those bands When segmented sweep is turned on or off all trace data including stored trace data 1s deleted This command applies to the following models having firmware revision A 05 00 or later E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B E4407B Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks Segmented sweep will be turned off if any of the following actions occur remotely or manually Factory Preset Full Span is activated Last Span is activated On entering a measurement MEASure subsystem commands While segmented sweep is on the following functions are unavailable Auto couple BW Avg RBW VBW Center Start Stop frequency CF Step and frequency Offset Span sweep time and points Front Panel Access Sweep Segmented ON OFF Set Frequency Domain Scale Type SENSe SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic SENSe SWEep SPACing Selects either linear or logarithmic for the frequency domain X axis scale The trace query of comma separated values maps frequency amplitude pairs for the mathematical interpolation of the log frequency axis The value of SENSe SWEep POINts is adjusted to reflect the acquisition of data for the given sweep span when log sweep spacing is enabled This command applies to the following models having firmware revision A 08 02 or later E4401B E4402B E4404
20. Key Access FREQUENCY Channel Sets the frequency at the right side of the graticule The left and right sides of the graticule correspond to the start and stop frequencies When these frequencies are activated their values are displayed below the graticule in place of center frequency and span Key Access FREQUENCY Channel Changes the step size for the center frequency function Once a step size has been selected and the center frequency function is activated the step keys change center frequency by the step size value The step size function is useful for finding harmonics and sidebands beyond the current frequency span of the analyzer When auto coupled the center frequency step size is set to one division 10 percent of the span Key Access FREQUENCY Channel 96 Chapter2 Freq Offset NOTE NOTE Signal Track On Off NOTE NOTE NOTE Front Panel Key Reference FREQUENCY Channel Allows you to input a frequency offset value that is added to the frequency readout of the marker to account for frequency conversions external to the analyzer Offset entries are added to all frequency readouts including marker start frequency and stop frequency Offsets may only be entered using the numeric keypad Offsets are not added to the span or frequency count readouts Entering an offset does not affect the trace display When a frequency offset is entered its value appears on the bottom of the disp
21. MMEM DATA C source txt 14abcd Delete a File MMEMory DELete file name Delete a file Example MMEM DEL C source txt Remarks If file name does not exist a File Name Error will occur Front Panel Access File Delete Load a Corrections Table from a File MMEMory LOAD CORRection ANTenna CABLe OTHer USER file name gt Loads the data in the file file name to the specified correction set Example MMEM LOAD CORR ANT A TEST5 CBL Front Panel Access File Load Type Corrections Load a Limit Line from Memory to the Instrument MMEMory LOAD LIMit LLINE1 LLINE2 lt file name gt 294 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference MMEMory Subsystem Loads a limit line from the specified file in mass storage to the instrument Loading a time limit line deletes any frequency limit lines Similarly loading a frequency limit line deletes any time limit lines Example MMEM LOAD LIM LLINE2 C mylimit lim Remarks There is no SCPI short form for parameters LLINE1 LLINE2 Front Panel Access File Load Type Limits Load an Instrument State from a File MMEMory LOAD STATe 1 lt file name gt The contents of the state file are loaded into the current instrument state Example MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C mystate sta Remarks You must be in Spectrum Analysis mode to use this command The RCL commands loads all of the mode states See also commands MMEMory LOAD STATe and MMEMory STORe STA
22. Order Down allows you to view files you may wish to copy in descending order for instance C B A Key Access File Copy Allows you to select the source and destination directories for Chapter2 Rename Dir Up Dir Select Front Panel Key Reference File your copy on one or more drives Key Access File Copy Allows you to move up one directory level If at the top level Dir Up moves to the drive level displaying the available disk drives Key Access File Copy Accesses the highlighted directory on your display Key Access File Copy Allows you to rename a file Key Access File Rename Now Type Chapter 2 Executes the rename function When the rename is complete the message XXXXXX file renamed to YYYYYY where XXXXXX and YYYYYY are the filenames will appear in the status line on your display Key Access File Rename Allows you to select the type of file you want to rename Key Access File Rename All Displays all files you may wish to rename Key Access File Rename Type Setup Displays all setup SET files you may wish to rename A Setup file is a complete state of instrument parameters including traces states limits and corrections Key Access File Rename Type State Displays all state STA files you may wish to rename Key Access File Rename Type Trace Displays all trace TRC and CSV files you may wish to rename Key Access File Rename Type Limits Dis
23. SEQuence EXTernal 1 SLOPe 378 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem This command activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start when the external voltage connected to GATE TRIG EXT TRIG IN on the rear panel passes through approximately 1 5 volts The external trigger signal must be a 0 V to 5 V TTL signal This function only controls the trigger polarity for positive or negative going signals Factory Preset and RST Positive Front Panel Access Trig External Pos Neg Trigger Offset TRIGger SEQuence OFFSet time TRIGger SEQuence OFFSet This command sets the trigger offset Factory Preset and RST 0 seconds Example TRIG SEQ OFFS 1 0s Range Hardware specific dependent upon the ADC being used current state and the number of sweep points Default Unit seconds Remarks Trigger offset refers to the specified time interval before or after the trigger event from which data is to be written to the trace and then displayed Ordinarily the trigger offset value is zero and trace data is displayed beginning at the trigger event A negative trigger offset value results in the display of trace data prior to the trigger event A positive trigger offset value results in an effective delay in the display of trace data after the trigger event The trigger offset value used when the feature is enable will depend on the following parameters Normal trigger of
24. Start Freq Stop Freq CF Step Auto Man Front Panel Key Reference FREQUENCY Channel FREQUENCY Channel Activates the center frequency function and accesses the menu of frequency functions The center frequency or start and stop frequency values appear below the graticule on the display Although the analyzer allows entry of frequencies greater than the specified frequency range using frequencies greater than the frequency range of the analyzer is not recommended When changing both the center frequency and the span change the frequency first since the span can be limited by the frequency value When operating in dc coupled mode take care to protect the input mixer by limiting the input level to 0 Vdc and 30 dBm Activates the center frequency function when Scale Type is set to Lin which allows you to set the horizontal center of the display to a specific frequency When Scale Type is set to Log Center Freq activates the center frequency function which allows you to move the average of the start and stop frequencies In this scale type the center frequency value will not necessarily represent the horizontal center of the display Key Access FREQUENCY Channel Sets the frequency at the left side of the graticule The left and right sides of the graticule correspond to the start and stop frequencies When these frequencies are activated their values are displayed below the graticule in place of center frequency and span
25. 103 Mixer Type Presel Unpre key 104 MODE front panel key 113 Mode Setup front panel key 113 modes external mixer LO harmonic on off 328 monitoring errors 235 monitoring status 235 N N db Points On Off 117 NdB bandwidth command 237 NdB command 237 NdBstate command 238 negative peak detection 316 negative transition register definition 195 Next Peak 116 Next Pk Left 115 Next Pk Right 115 Next Window 114 noise level 109 noise marker 248 None key 126 Norm Ref Lvl 135 165 Norm Ref Posn 135 166 Normal key 105 119 normal marker 105 249 Normalize 164 Normalize On Off 134 165 normalize on off 260 normalized referencel level position 274 o offsets trigger 379 380 OPC command description 197 operation complete command IEEE command 233 operation event query 349 Operations key 164 Optimize LO phase noise 53 option license key information 364 options query 233 367 options IEEE command 233 Orientation 127 Other key other amplitude corrections 45 output screen data 125 outputs configuration 361 on off IF sweep 368 sweep 368 tracking generator 300 video 368 overall status register system diagram 196 P PACE for serial bus receive 363 PACE for serial bus transmit 363 page orientation printing 282 Page Size 127 parameters in commands 180 pass fail limit line test 238 Pause 112 pause 112 peak next 116 Peak Excursn 117 Pea
26. 1100 1200 1600 2000 series printer Key Access Print Setup Define Custom Color Capable Yes No Allows you to define the color capability of your printer Key Access Print Setup Define Custom 126 Chapter2 Orientation Prints Page 12 Eject Page Page Size Color On Off Front Panel Key Reference Print Setup Allows you to select either Portrait or Landscape printing The Orientation key will not function with a PCL3 HP DeskJet printer Key Access Print Setup Selects the number of prints per page when orientation is set to Portrait In Landscape printing Prints Page is always set to 1 Key Access Print Setup Ejects your printed page Key Access Print Setup Allows you to select from the following page sizes Executive Letter Legal Ledger A4 and A3 Key Access Print Setup More Allows you to select between color or black and white printing This key will not function when pressed unless the connected printer supports color Key Access Print Setup More ki Ki ini Wi D Iz amp A e Ki Si c S bi Iz 6 bi Chapter 2 127 Front Panel Key Reference Restart Restart If no measurement is active and Sweep Single is selected a new sweep is initiated When in Average On mode BW Avg Average the averaging function is restarted the trace is reset and the average number is reset to zero If a one button measurement is selected it restarts a previously pause
27. 5 ge g z a E E 5 e E N E E E E KI S E 2 E E g S S E En S 2 Ba Programming Fundamentals Parameters in Commands Parameters in Commands There are four basic types of parameters boolean key words variables and arbitrary block program data Boolean The expression OFFIONIOI1 is a two state boolean type parameter The numeric value 0 is equivalent to OFF Any numeric value other than 0 is equivalent to ON The numeric values of 0 or 1 are commonly used in the command instead of OFF or ON and queries of the parameter always return a numeric value of 0 or 1 Key Word The parameter key words that are allowed for a particular command are defined in the command description and are separated with a vertical slash Units Numerical variables may include units The valid units for a command depends on the variable type being used See the following variable descriptions If no units are sent the indicated default units will be used Units can follow the numerical value with or without a space Variable A variable can be entered in exponential format as well as standard numeric format The appropriate variable range and its optional units are defined in the command description In addition to these values the following key words may also be used in commands where they are applicable MINimum sets the parameter to the smallest possible value MAXimum sets the parameter to
28. A in this bit position indicates that the analyzer has at least one reason to report a status change This bit is also called the master summary status bit MSS 7 128 Operation Status Summary Bit A in this bit position indicates that the operation status summary bit has been set The operation status event register can then be read to determine the specific event that caused this bit to be set To query the status byte register send the STB command The response will be the decimal sum of the bits that are set to 1 For example if bit number 7 and bit number 3 are set to 1 the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 128 plus 8 So the decimal value 136 is returned Service Request Enable Register In addition to the status byte register the status byte group also contains the service request enable register The status byte service request enable register lets you choose which bits in the Status Byte Register will trigger a service request Send the SRE number command where number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable plus the decimal value of bit 6 For example assume that you want to enable bit 7 so that whenever the operation status summary bit is set to 1 it will trigger a service request Send the SRE 192 128 64 command The SRE command returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits enabled previously with the SRE lt number gt command 202 Chapter 4 Status Registers
29. E D Ei Remote Command Reference SENSe SWEep Subsection History This command function changed with firmware revision A 08 00 With AUTO ON in zero span an error will be generated Front Panel Access Sweep Sweep Time Auto Man Sweep Time Mode SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO MODE SRESponse SANalyzer SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO MODE Specifies the type of automatic coupling for the fastest sweep time at the current settings Stimulus response Spectrum analyzer Factory Preset and RST SANalyzer Front Panel Access Sweep Sweep Coupling SR SA Time Gating Delay Option 1D6 Only SENSe SWEep TIME GATE DELay lt time gt SENSe SWEep TIME GATE DELay Sets the delay time from when the gate trigger occurs to when the gate opens This is for EDGE triggering only Factory Preset and RST lus Range 0 3 us to 429 seconds Default Unit seconds Front Panel Access Sweep Gate Setup Edge Setup Gate Delay Time Gate Length Option 1D6 Only SENSe SWEep TIME GATE LENGth lt time gt 340 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference SENSe SWEep Subsection SENSe SWEep TIME GATE LENGth Specifies the gate time length in seconds for EDGE triggering only Factory Preset and RST 1 ps Range 0 3 us to 429 seconds Default Unit seconds Front Panel Access Sweep Gate Setup Edge Setup Gate Length Time Gate Level Option 1D6 Only SENSe SWEep TIME GATE LEVel H
30. E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B E4407B with Options 1DR and 1D5 Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access BW Avg Resolution BW Auto Man Resolution Bandwidth Automatic SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO Couples the resolution bandwidth to the frequency span Factory Preset and RST On Example BWID AUTO On History This command function changed with firmware revision A 08 00 With AUTO ON in zero span an error will be generated Remarks Auto couple resolution bandwidth is not available in zero span Video Bandwidth SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo freq SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo 306 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference SENSe BANDwidth Subsection Specifies the video bandwidth Factory Preset and RST 3 MHz Range 1 Hz to 3 MHz This range is dependent upon the setting of SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution and installed options Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access BW Avg Video BW Auto Man Video Bandwidth Automatic SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access BW Avg Video BW Auto Man Video to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio lt number gt SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio Specifies the ratio of
31. E4407B and E4408B You must connect a cable from RF OUT 50 Q to INPUT 50 Q au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E 154 Chapter2 NOTE Remote Port Show System Freq Correct On Off Front Panel Key Reference System Local Key Access System Alignments Align Now FM Demod Initiates an alignment of the FM demodulation system only when Option BAA or Option 106 is installed Key Access System Alignments Align Now After a five minute warm up Align Now All with a cable connected from AMPTD REF OUT to INPUT 50 Q should be performed on Agilent E4402B E4403B E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B Refer to your analyzer s appropriate Specifications Guide for details on using Align Now when Auto Align is Off Controls use of some of the correction factors When On is underlined frequency correction factors are used When Off is underlined frequency correction factors are not used and Freq Corr Off appears on the display Turning the correction factors off degrades frequency accuracy Key Access System Alignments Frequency correction factors must be on for the analyzer to meet its specified performance Timebase Load Defaults Accesses the Fine and Coarse Timebase menu keys which allow control of the 10 MHz time base frequency This function is used to verify the settability of the 10 MHz reference and to adjust for changed operating conditions such as temperature Pressing
32. FUNCtion EMI VIEW POSitive EMI SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI VIEW Selects between positive peak detection and the EMI quasi peak average detection without changing the ranging which adjusts the reference level This allows you to use peak detection while maintaining the current EMI measurement settings view Factory Preset and RST Off Couplings Dependencies This function is not available unless you have selected SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI QPEak or AVERage Remarks This command is only available with Option AYQ installed History Added with firmware revision A 14 00 318 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference SENSe DETector Subsection Front Panel Access Det Demod EMI Detector Immediate Auto Range EMI Detector SENSe DETector RANGe IMMediate Re runs the amplitude ranging process This optimizes the available dynamic range for measurements using the EMI quasi peak and average detectors See also SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI Remarks This command is only available with Option AYQ installed History Added with firmware revision A 14 00 Auto Range EMI Detector SENSe DETector RANGe STATe OFF N O 1 SENSe DETector RANGe STATe Turns on off the amplitude ranging process This process optimizes the available dynamic range for measurements using the EMI quasi peak and average detectors and is usually done automatically each time one of these detector types is selected This turns o
33. G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Marker Function CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FUNCtion BPOWer NOISe OFF CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FUNCtion Selects the marker function for the specified marker To query the value returned by the function use CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 Y BPOWer is the power integrated within the bandwidth NOISe is a noise measurement OFF turns off all functions Remarks When a measurement under the front panel MEASURE key is started this command is turned off If this command is turned on when any of the MEASURE key measurements are in progress that measurement will be stopped Front Panel Access Marker Function Marker Peak Maximum Search CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum Performs a peak search based on the search mode settings of CALCulate MARKer PEAK SEARCh MODE See command CALCulate MARKer PEAK SEARch MODE Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Meas Tools Peak Search Marker Peak Maximum Left Search CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum LEFT Places the selected marker on the next highest signal peak to the left of the current marked peak Remarks The marker will be placed at the next highest peak that rises and falls by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold If no peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria a No Peak Found error 202 is given Front
34. History This command is available with firmware revision A 03 00 and later Remarks External mixing is not available when frequency scale type is Log SENSe SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Selecting the external input mixer activates all the keys in the Input Mixer menu and changes the RF attenuation annotation readout on the display to Ext Mix Front Panel Access Input Output or Input Input Mixer Int Ext Select Mixer Type INPut MIXer TYPE PRESelected UNPReselect INPut MIXer TYPE This command selects the type of mixer being used and is available only with Option AYZ External Mixing Refer also to commands in the SENSe MIXer subsection Factory Preset and RST UNPReselect History This command is available with firmware revision A 03 00 and later Remarks Setting mixer type to Presel activates a tuning signal that is routed to the PRESEL TUNE OUTPUT connector on the analyzer rear panel This signal drives the tune input of the HP Agilent 11974 Series Preselected Mixers at 1 5V GHz The sweep rate in this mode is limited to 40 MHz msec Preselected Mixer Type is not allowed when AUTO harmonic and Ext Mix Band K E W F D G Y or J is selected Front Panel Access Input Output or Input Input Mixer Mixer Config Mixer 288 Chapter 5 NOTE Remote Command Reference INPut Subsystem Type Presel Unpre Clear the Input Overload INPut PROTection CLEar Resets the ov
35. MIXer page 326 SENSe POWer page 329 SENSe SIDentify page 332 SENSe SWEep page 334 SOURce page 343 STATus page 349 STATus QUEStionable page 351 SYSTem page 361 TRACe page 371 TRIGger page 378 UNIT page 388 Chapter 5 NOTE Remote Command Reference IEEE Common Commands IEEE Common Commands These commands are specified in IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 466 1 1987 New York NY 1992 Calibration Query CAL Performs a full alignment and returns a number indicating the success of the alignment A zero is returned if the alignment is successful The SCPI equivalent for this command is the same as CALibrate ALL Before executing this command connect a cable between front panel connector AMPTD REF OUT and the INPUT connector for all Agilent ESA spectrum analyzers except Agilent models E4401B and E4411B If the cable is not connected CAL ALL will perform a subset of the RF alignment and a subsequent CAL RF will be required for the analyzer to meet its specified performance The query performs a full alignment and returns a number indicating the success of the alignment A zero is returned if the alignment is successful even if only a subset of the RF alignment is performed Front Panel S Access System Alignments Align All Now S o S S E E Clear Status z CLS 3 Clears the status byte It does this b
36. QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated ENABle lt integer gt STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register which also sets the Data Uncalibrated Summary bit bit 3 in the 356 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Integrity Register The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register NOTE The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the data is cleared Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event
37. The message Changing X axis units will delete all limits If you are sure press key again to change units will appear Press X Axis Units Freq Time again to purge both limit lines and switch between frequency and time Key Access Display Limits Chapter 2 75 m S 5 T az Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q E 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E D Ba 5 x e Limits Fixed Rel Delete All Limits Active Fctn Position Front Panel Key Reference Display Allows you to choose fixed or relative limit lines The fixed Fixed type uses the current limit line as a reference with fixed frequency and amplitude values The relative Rel setting causes the current limit line value to be relative to the displayed center frequency and reference level amplitude values When limit lines are specified with time rather than frequency the Rel setting only affects the amplitude values The current amplitude values will be relative to the displayed reference level amplitude but the time values will always start at the left edge of the graticule As an example assume you have a frequency limit line If the limit line is specified as fixed entering a limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz displays the limit line segment at 300 MHz If the same limit line table is specified as relative it is displayed relative to the analyzer center frequency and reference level If the center frequ
38. a enm PONIEDINIS os cence even he eens e EUREN URPESERETI REDE RS epe epe 367 SYS eaP REN EE 368 System FON TYFE PRESSULSGXT nor eb see o bg Et rei QURE REIR ial eee d ibq qe bqut 368 elo leu PON TYPE cCoseses dee be EROR orb PER Veil eei EHD Eee d qr QV E V E dc 368 dh din PEE EM EET 369 lsTenrPBESSUPBRSISIEHL parir trt EREHRERU E MESURER RERIE REY RESCREE SER RE EPENC RE DNE 361 IS YS Tene PRESA PERSIS o coss eLRRSGRURO ULP AR ERE Ra Ee RAE ERG e E SERO d d e PE ERE E RR QOH 369 SYSE PRESA TYPE PAC TOUS L6 sukoaickbpS Sur bdo E ER TK bRORKD P itk deis b rte h e adore binis 368 SYS Tem Eer TYPE PACTODSIUSERIMODS e dE sank d RER SR REES Se EE a 369 SC Polen PRESet USER SAVE cia cscs ewe e be CEC RR Goede RES E PEREGO DEERE REE E RR d ee BOS 370 raven E S Ale OFRONI seesuenqacknezpCRRRReCRYGGU RR UCRYG PCR ERG EEREN ERAO PENRE 370 Geh EE ER EE 370 SYS lem TIME hours gt emine gt KEE 370 So lem TIME reri rajeneki irta Ped eio wi deii edi dae d dera Eaa 370 CN EN e EE 370 ORACCCOPY lt source tracesedest Bea NEE er REGqU REPRE bee RR ES OREO HERR EEO RA EY PT RACER AC Hance nee Lo Sabe 28 once tha nek bes URW eee ey CIERRE ENDE CERE CERO CEPS SS 332 TRACe MATH ADD destination trace source tracel source I Ce zs ee 373 7 TRACSMATEUMEAN SACO Loue sack aer RS Fare AC Rb b abs RR OR RO E RO E RR e EOS 373 TRACE MATILFEA eorssacrtsueerEWUEPE CR URPESERETIUC RES CR ER Epp PEU Sd 373 ITRACE MATH PBARK SORT ANIPLit delPRBQUEOBCY gk
39. and peak threshold for search criteria Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Search Criteria Peak Search Type Max Value Excursion amp Threshold Define Peak Threshold CALCulate MARKer PEAK THReshold lt ampl gt CALCulate MARKer PEAK THReshold Specifies the minimum signal level for the analyzers internal peak identification routine to recognize a signal as a peak This applies to all traces and all windows See command CALCulate MARKer PEAK SEARch MODE z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t g D 7 Range Reference level to the bottom of the display Default Unit Amplitude units Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Search Criteria Peak Threshold Peak to Peak Delta Markers CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 PTPeak Positions delta markers on the highest and lowest points on the trace Chapter 5 251 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Pk Pk Search Set Center Frequency to the Marker Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET CENTer Sets the center frequency equal to the specified marker frequency which moves the marker to the center of the screen In delta marker mode the center frequency is set to the marker delta value This command is not available in zero span Front Panel Acc
40. diio RESO ph TU 286 SE 2a p x obo o EUH debeo be dee d poA Oa eso dor eub eb der bd aded 285 Ste RN E El EE 287 UNPIECCOLDPIBE Et reg dree ek eec Reo RR CIR PRIOR ROSE PAD o Rede RERO RR Ea 287 IAF PROTECO i cs cep ced REP DREEUE RUE RR qae ad px du ree queque 289 mos KR isi co deed E REP EUREN ATE aug Sq aque p dpb dk Vb Rcgi ed uan 290 INSTRU NSE Lect SINODE iur ER UR IER ERR BER pU SX B cid BR Rl IR bdo d Rip Ec el 290 ANS E erneut PEEL cee ee bbs et ee er eee ee FLETES QE Pip eed quies 290 INS Trument SELect SSA I GSM l CDMA l PNOISE l BLUETOOTH l EDGE l MAN l LINK CATV NFIG ii jg I TII 291 23 E a S e S E 5 E gt Q E un E S g E Q KE S z List of Commands UEP EE KEE 291 MMEM CA Tiloe l EEN 293 MMEMory COPY lt file wamelsshle REENEN teuer RI RE E RE EN Red lb dele de d EE ROAN 293 MMEMory DATA file name definite length block 294 INMENG ele ERENNERT CR oa E o p e qf 294 MINE Mot DELG DI DONO e e aee E E eR pee ix E e PRO E 294 MMEMory LOAD CORRection ANTennalCABLelOTHerlUSER file name 294 MMEMory LOAD LIMit LLINEIILLINE2 file name 294 MMEMory LOAD STATE Lille TAS Lasso EE duei RER Eh EE dE CR werd e gs 295 MMENor LOAD TRAC e Sle BANG iae tue RREXGORERXqR E TEER YRC ERE REESE ER EXC RR Echos 295 MMENIOLCG MDIBectory lt dit pat 4 22554420ic004 2b deo cde eee LAO RWS BOSSE PRES XE db ERR RR 296 DAMEN BDIESIOry du E dee CEPR
41. e oO Chapter 5 333 Remote Command Reference SENSe SWEep Subsection SENSe SWEep Subsection Sweep Points SENSe SWEep POINts number of points SENSe SWEep POINts This command sets the number of sweep points Factory Preset and RST 401 Example SWEep POIN 401 History This command is available only on analyzers with firmware revision A 04 00 and later Analyzers with firmware revisions prior to A 04 00 have the number of sweep points fixed at 401 Range 101 to 8192 2 to 8192 in zero span for analyzers with firmware revision A 05 00 and later Remarks The number of sweep points can be set only with Agilent ESA models E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B and E4407B Sweep points for ESA models E4403B E4408B and E4411B are fixed at 401 points The number of sweep points may be queried on all analyzers with firmware revision A 04 00 and later For analyzers with firmware revisions prior to A 08 00 any change to sweep points sets the following commands as shown CALCulate LLINel DISPlay to off and CALCulate LLINe2 DISPlay to off Whenever the number of sweep points change the following functions are affected au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei All trace data is erased e Any traces in view mode will go to blank mode Sweep time is re calculated Any limit lines that are on will be turned off For analyzers with firmware revisions prior to A 08
42. ge Iz a Si amp bi D e oO Chapter 5 377 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem TRIGger Subsystem The TRIGger subsystem is used to set the controls and parameters associated with triggering the data acquisitions Other trigger related commands are found in the INITiate and ABORt subsystems External Trigger Line and TV Trigger Delay Value TRIGger SEQuence DELay delay TRIGger SEQuence DELay This command sets the amount of trigger delay when using the rear panel external trigger input the front panel input with TV trigger or the line trigger Factory Preset and RST 1 us Range 0 3 us to 429 seconds Default Unit seconds External Trigger Line and TV Trigger Delay Enable TRIGger SEQuence DELay STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence DELay STATe This command allows you to turn on or off a delay during which the analyzer will wait to begin a sweep after receiving an external trigger signal a front panel TV trigger or a line trigger Factory Preset and RST Off Default Unit seconds Remarks Free run activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start as soon as possible after the last sweep This function is not available when Gate is on Front Panel Access Trig Trig Delay On Off External Trigger Slope TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal 1 SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger
43. output unless the signal strength exceeds the squelch threshold The squelch level does not affect the rear panel AUX VIDEO OUT signal Squelch level is indicated on screen by the numbers 0 to 100 with 0 being the minimum threshold all signals are passed and 100 being the maximum threshold no signals are passed The default squelch value is 0 Squelch is active only when FM demod is selected and it is only available when the Option AYQ hardware is used as the instrument s FM demod hardware Key Access Det Demod Demod Chapter2 Full Screen Display Line On Off Limits Front Panel Key Reference Display Display Accesses menu keys that allow you to control what is displayed on the analyzer including titles the display line graticule and annotation as well as the testing of trace data against user entered limits Allows the measurement window to expand horizontally over the entire instrument display Pressing a key that brings up a new menu will cancel the full screen function Key Access Display Activates an adjustable horizontal line that is used as a visual reference line The line which can be used for trace arithmetic has amplitude values that correspond to its vertical position when compared to the reference level The value of the display line appears in the active function block and on the left side of the display The display line can be adjusted using the step keys knob or numeric keypad Pressing any d
44. x E D Ba A 5 e 162 Chapter2 NOTE Trace 1 23 CAUTION Clear Write Max Hold NOTE NOTE Min Hold Front Panel Key Reference Trace View Trace View Accesses the trace keys that allow you to store and manipulate trace information Each trace is comprised of a series of data points in which amplitude information is stored The analyzer updates the information for any active trace with each sweep If you have selected Channel Power ACP Harmonic Distortion Burst Power Power Stat CCDF or Spectrum Emission Mask in the MEASURE menu refer to the one button measurement information in Volume 2 Selects the menu keys used for trace 1 trace 2 or trace 3 functions Press Trace 12 3 until the number of the desired trace is underlined Key Access Trace View When using normalization the mode of traces 2 and 3 should not be changed Erases any data previously stored in the selected trace and continuously displays any signals during the sweep of the analyzer This function is activated for trace 1 at power on and by pressing Preset Key Access Trace View Maintains the maximum level for each trace point of the selected trace 1 2 or 3 and updates each trace point if a new maximum level is detected in successive sweeps If the Det Demod Detector Auto is selected the detection type may change with trace mode See Figure 2 1 on page 55 for more detailed information Key Acces
45. 3 Q au 9 E D S E Ei m Si ei E E D Ba 5 z e Front Panel Key Reference Input Output 104 Mixer Type Presel Unpre Mixer Bias On Off external mixer is listed as 8 enter the harmonic number as 8 Key Access Input Output Input Mixer Mixer Config Allows you to select which type of mixer is in use Mixer Type Presel activates a tuning signal that is routed to the PRESEL TUNE OUTPUT connector on the rear panel of the analyzer This signal has a sensitivity of 1 5V GHz of the LO frequency and drives the tune input of the HP Agilent 11974 series of preselected mixers The sweep rate in Presel mode is limited to 40 MHz msec Key Access Input Output Input Mixer Mixer Config Mixer Bias On activates and allows adjustment of an internal bias source for use with external mixers The bias signal is present on the center conductor of the IF INPUT connector on the front panel The mixer bias will be Off if Harmonic Auto and Mixer Type Presel is selected Key Access Input Output Input Mixer Mixer Config Chapter2 Select Marker 1234 Normal Delta NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Marker Marker Accesses the marker control keys which select the type and number of markers and turns them on and off Markers are diamond shaped characters that identify points of traces Up to four pairs of markers may appear on the display simultaneously only one pair
46. 307 SENSe BANDwidthlBWIDth VIDeo AUTO usuueeeeeeeeeeee eee hh 307 SENSe BANDwidthIBWIDth VIDeo RATio lt number gt eren 307 SENSe BANDwidthIBWIDth VIDeo RATio AUTO OFFIONION 0 0 0 ee eee 307 SENSe BANDwidthIBWIDth VIDeo RATio AUTO s 0 eee eee 307 ESENSe EBANDsidtblBN IDih VIDeo RATO cersxserezetrb Ce REX bee CREE RE ENEE REES dws 307 SENSeEBANDsadtblB WIDE VIDEO 1213224 4 2931 E E k irane REE ODE Ra de OR ERE RECETTE wean 306 D SENSeJE BANDwidtblBWID8th RESolutiou Ireqo i uuuscke scere eet RR ER CRY YR PIE ee 306 SENSe BANDwidthIBWIDth RESolution AUTO OFFIONIOIL sese RRRRRR 306 SENSe BANDwidthIBWIDth RESolution AUTO 0 eee eee ee ee eee eens 306 SENSe BANDwywidthlBWIDth RESolution e REENERT bes RE NEE EE EE E 306 PSENSe CORRection SBEALEJDELSIG EE RA ERRARE LCRAIIEOATRER GEEGAYRRE AE 309 ESENSe ECORRecabonC SED ALEERSTAIS OFPIONIDIE e AER Ee E SEE HERR SR ERES 309 30 List of Commandes SENS CORRectionC SET ALLDSTATS T dE ENEE EE EE EE EE A ie 309 SENSe CORRection CSET 1 I21314 DATA lt freq gt lt rel_ampl gt lt freq gt lt rel_ampI gt 309 SENSe CORRection CSET 1 I21314 DATA MERGe lt freq gt lt rel_ampl gt lt freq gt lt rel_ampI gt 310 SENSe CORRBectaom C SET ZI DEATAO EE ice KEEN EE PRES EPR SES LOWER Eg eR e 309 CSENSE COR Rechon CSET EE cock cceeee each rat EY DX REGHERETESEPRPPUEESEG
47. 4 TRACe AUTO OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe AUTO Turns on or off the automatic marker to trace function Factory Preset and RST AUTO ON Front Panel Access Marker Marker Trace Auto 1 2 3 Continuous Signal Tracking Function CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRCKing STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRCKing STATe Turns on or off marker signal tracking It continuously puts the selected marker on the highest displayed signal peak and moves it to the center frequency This allows you to keep a signal that is drifting in frequency on the display Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks When a measurement under the front panel MEASURE key is started this command is turned off If this command is turned on when any of the MEASURE key measurements are in 254 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection progress that measurement will be stopped Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Channel Signal Track On Off Marker X Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X Position the designated marker on its assigned trace at the specified trace X value The value is in the X axis units which is often frequency or time If the marker is a delta marker this command sets the value of the delta marker The query returns the current X value of the designated marker Default Unit Matches the units of the trace on which the marker is positioned Front
48. 5 MHz Video Bandwidth 30 Hz to 3 MHz Number of Points 101 to 8192 2 to 8192 in zero span The total number of points for all segments is lt 8192 Default Unit Fundamental units without entering the actual units Delete All Segmented Sweep Data SENSe SWEep SEGMent DELete Deletes all segmented sweep data This command applies to the following models having firmware revision A 05 00 or later E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B E4407B Front Panel Access Sweep Segmented Modify Delete Delete Some Segmented Sweep Data SENSe SWEep SEGMent DELete ROW integer Deletes only the specified segmented sweep data row This command applies to the following models having firmware revision A 05 00 or later E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B E4407B Range to maximum number of segments Front Panel Access Sweep Segmented Modify Edit Delete Segment The front panel keys shown for this command deletes the active segment only The remote command deletes any specified segment Turn On Off Segmented Sweep SENSe SWEep SEGMent STATe OFF ON O 1 SENSe SWEep SEGMent STATe Turns on or off segmented sweep Segmented sweep is a mode where only bands Chapter 5 337 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE NOTE NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe SWEep Subsection
49. 525 line NTSC video standard we refer to TV lines as follows these are the Field Modes 168 Chapter2 Chapter 2 Front Panel Key Reference Trig Entire Frame lines 1 to 525 Field One lines 1 to 263 Field Two lines 1 to 262 note that this really refers to actual lines 264 to 525 For the 625 line PAL and SECAM video standards we refer to TV lines as follows Entire Frame lines 1 to 625 Field One lines 1 to 313 Field Two lines 314 to 625 As the Field is changed the appropriate value for Line is chosen to keep triggering on the same line as before or if this is not possible the corresponding line in the new Field For example suppose line 264 is selected while in the NTSC M standard and the Entire Frame mode This is the first line in Field Two If Field Two is then selected the Line number changes to Line 1 the same actual line in the TV signal If Field One is then selected the line number stays at 1 but now we are triggering in the first line in Field One The only exception to this is if we are on the last line of Field One and change to Field Two In this case we go to the last line in Field Two Key Access Trig More TV Trig Setup Entire Frame Causes the selected line number to be viewed as an offset into the entire frame starting with line 1 the first line in Field One Key Access Trig More TV Trig Setup Field Field One Causes the selected line number to be viewed as an offset into the
50. 9 Power On 7 STATus OPERation CALibrating Reserved Reserved STATus QUEStionable CALibration Reserved Reserved SWEeping TG Align Failure MEASuring RF Align Failure 5 ae 5 f IF Align Failure E sss E Waiting for TRIGger B E 5 S LO Align Failure Blo Waiting forARM clic SP ADC Align Failure lalol ak Reserved barare FM Demod Align Failure SISISIE S SIS S E Misc Sys Align Failure zs Paused CIS Unused HOG E Reserved EDO E Tracking Peak Needed SI a 8 n Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Align RF Skipped Align RF Now Needed Reserved Align Needed Always Zero 0 Service Request Enable Register SRE SRE Reserved Always Zero 0 OQ bk o Hz OO 00 Joo bk OH az 0O STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated STATus QUEStionable INTegrity Oversweep Meas Uncal Reserved Signal Ident On No Result Available Reserved Measurement Timeou Unused Data Uncalibrated Summary Unused c IF ADC Over Range c Unused ajas jE Over Range Bl als e Unused ij 9 Under Range ius Unused gale S Insufficient Data BR S Unused Ee Acquisition Failure E Gin Unused SES Memory Problem 1315 5 Unused sepu m Auto Trigger Timeout uu e Unused Trigger Problem Unused Invalid Data Unused Unidentified Error Unused Always Zero 0 Setting Limited Readjusted Always Zero 0 cl73a 196 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Regis
51. ALC ulate Datel STAT PC EK 260 20 List of Commandes E El a EE 260 XCATLabratons AU TO OPPIONEBNT 11 rag eueesdreeaa eesTD ese reesWreediecte3qERegireesdrked kde 262 CALITO MODE EE 261 CATibigtion AUTO MODE rt H one heer ha ea eGR eor Rr Bd ble dose EE ROWS 261 Lio UTE e ce pee ocak eee CERE sew ea tne Cae RPEPEPENENEPSQU PI Re pu eq eee wks 262 CALI RE EE 262 CALDRA gl i a obo dd beg ee eee ee ee ee re eee ree ere ee ee eee eee 262 EE A KEE 262 CALibration FREQuency REFerence COARse gettmgz NEEN esee e hr re E ERE 263 CALibratbon PREQuency REPerence C OAR887 icoressertueRRREGRREEURRRXERRRE eREBAY RE ER AOE ES 263 CALibration FREQuency REPerence FINE 8etlnpB s EE ELE ELE Y FER ERR A ER EE 263 CALibracon EREQueney BEberenos FINE iuadsa adeo eo e RERBA EP ERE EERE ERU Ke adis 263 CATLibration PREDuency BEPerenge ER eee etc A RH Re e RUE ERRAT YEAR RA ORE Ped 263 CALibration PREQuency 5 TATe OFFIONION E e mm x Rx RR ee 263 CLibrabon ERE Oneney o DATE Sis ace op he oe EX Ka ERE ER eR EOS S RE EIC CR te ea 263 Ge ARI CDM PIC mee 264 We E EE 264 CALibsaton SOU Ree STATS OPPIONNII a erede vere Yer RR ERR RR as cR RR EA et 264 CALDU SOUR E STA EE EE 264 CALDO 15 EE 265 CALDURI EEN 265 a Eee E S EE 261 SNE EH EI EE 261 GCOLDUPIe SLEINGNE EEN dE EE E EE EE qe 267 COUPE Ar Wee SRR re ded el ed bb d ine epic en ERE ed E eR EA d epp 267 DISPFlay APUNGCBOD POSIDoU BOT Tomlt DEN Te P iaa ibo y E b CORP O
52. Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections User Edit E 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E 48 Chapter2 NOTE NOTE NOTE Front Panel Key Reference AMPLITUDE Y Scale The amplitude correction entered for the lowest frequency will be applied to all frequencies less than the lowest frequency entered Similarly the amplitude correction for the highest frequency entered will be applied to all frequencies greater than the highest frequency entered For amplitude correction factors a maximum of two entries with the same frequency are valid Only the first and last points of a series with the same frequency values are used any middle points are ignored Amplitude correction data is sorted in the table by frequency The sorting occurs immediately after you have entered the frequency value via the front panel Amplitude Allows you to enter the amplitude value for the current amplitude correction point After selecting a point the point number automatically increments and Frequency becomes active to allow entry of the frequency of the next point Press Bk Sp to correct errors Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections User Edit m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Chapter 2 49 E 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E D Ba 5 x e Ext Amp Gain Max Mixer Lvl Front Panel Key Reference AMPLITUDE Y Sca
53. Arrow Kess iozesezxexcekrktrekier9 X ririri iL ERIE EITE 172 Yieuwing EE 173 Prog RT 174 Contents S o E 3 Programming Fundamentals Came Valid GODS i i eus docctir ee nra EE eke bib eege aede iori 177 Command EENHEETEN ESA 178 Special Characters in C GIAI idus sr Rep EEN dx Ed gaske dase ie dae 179 Paranieterg m Commands EE REPRE de A OR d r Erg Seed de dera 180 Improving Measurement Speed 2 3 AE EEN EE RR RRBRR CERE AE ESE E 183 Zone o the thapldy RER eos cha die geck dieta aie dabei Da p det dep 183 Disable auto S eee tite trr TESEU EAE cau ates eG eee eich egenae eee EE E 183 Lise a xed CON CBOEO ee Aer E oy ke Ror reb b pui b qr cbe ee 183 Disable the UR Video Sweep output Porte e 66s ySecr ae dees Gaesnd AE EE er Ae En 184 Select phase notse peroarmabee occas ver ewe wae REANO bee geg ere 184 Use binary data format instead of ASCI i ciecos esce meer e eee Goede e RR eee RS ed 184 Minimize the number of GPIB transactions EE wer Rh RR RAE EERIRRUE RE REERC 184 Avoid aimecessary use ol RT asa tebe Fe P eb P Idee ERE Ib dH edis bg req 185 Minimize DUT nstr mment setup changes erresire sotke ger Rides PY EELER E A 185 Using an Option Mode Minimize the number of GPIB transactions 185 Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line NEE EEN EE EST er e EE EIN e Rev 186 SCPI Termination and Separator SYBIAE uosezeadesuerekaedeskacedqudsedxdre ewer eeN 186 O
54. Calibration Event register which also sets the Calibration Summary bit bit 8 in the Questionable Register The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Calibration Event Query z S et Q E E 5 Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 7 STATus QUEStionable CALibration EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Event register The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the data is cleared Chapter 5 351 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Calibration Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable CALibration NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable CALibration NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event register when that bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 0 Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questiona
55. Detector Sets the auto range dwell time for the EMI Detectors The amplitude ranging process optimizes the available dynamic range for the measurement The dwell time is the time spent auto ranging You may need to set this value if you have a signal with a very low PRF 5Hz Dwell time must be gt 1 PRF Key Access Det Demod EMI Detector Accesses the menu keys to select AM demodulation FM demodulation or demodulation Off It also accesses the Demod View On Off Speaker On Off and Demod Time menu keys described below Key Access Det Demod Chapter 2 m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q 67 Front Panel Key Reference Det Demod NOTE The FM menu key only appears when the optional PM demodulation hardware is installed options 106 AYQ or BAA If you have multiple FM demodulation hardware options the hardware that will be used is automatically selected in order of priority with firmware revision A 14 00 or later 1 Option 106 Bluetooth 2 Option AYQ Quasi peak detection and FM demodulation 3 Option BAA FM Demodulation NOTE Segmented sweep is not available with the demodulation functions in this section Off Turns demodulation off Key Access Det Demod Demod AM Activating AM demodulation turns off FM demodulation if it is on For non zero spans a 10 kHz resolution bandwidth is used during demodulation regardless of the screen annotation When the
56. EE EE EAD TERRE 238 EE E e EE 239 17 E a e S Q S E 5 E 5 a an un E S g E Q KE S z List of Commands CALCulate LLINGtMODe FIXCUIRELGUNG oo cuvocsdes ic eR EREFERG PERO TERREdrradiesesidassd ka 239 4 ALCulaelLLINSGMODST ii udeerbe amp es d r edu qe uer bb ger ee EXpequ redde Ted rp EA 239 VALCulateLLINe CONTIoEDOMam PREOuetcyl TIME nceoseerepee RR Reo REESE AE Ei 240 CALCulate LLING CON Tro DOMain TIME 5 i000 eec be eeu x RR RR EE ees 241 CALC ulate LLING CIN DabDONMUalH sese node eeee eee XR PEOR EQUO RapE RE SE Rag EKES gb eb 240 CALCulate LLINe 1 I2 AMPL itude INTerpolate TYPE LOGarithmiclLINear 00 0202 ee 239 ACALCulsteLLINS TIBAMPLEitude lN Terpolates TYPE EE es RR EO ROR eRe CH e ERR 239 CALCulate LLINe 1 I22 CONTrol INTerpolate I TYPE LOGarithmic 241 CALCulate LLINe 1 I22 CONTrol INTerpolate TYPE LOGarithmiclLINear 00 0 2 eee eee 241 ALC wate LLibe 12 CON Trol INTerpolate TYPE Lu ccc tiene REENERT REENEN RE EE RR Ee 241 CALCulate LLINe 1 I2 DATA lt x axis gt lt ampl gt lt connected gt lt x axis gt lt ampl gt lt connected gt 241 CALCulate LLINe 1 I2 DATA MERGe lt x axis gt lt ampl gt lt connected gt lt x axis gt lt ampl gt lt connected gt 243 WALCO LLIN IZDATA oi cid occ EE 241 ALC ae LENS UDELL r cpcca cheer sence eueRe sake Sear Race ER ee EE RA Red 243 CALCulate LEINSITIESDISPIay OPPIONIDIT
57. ENABle num Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition and Event Enable Registers K e ES E 2 Si ys CH K Lg wn The Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition Register continuously monitors the calibration status of the analyzer Condition registers are read only To query the condition register send the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated CONDition The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1 The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register The changes may be positive from 0 to 1 or negative from 1 to 0 Send the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated NTRansition numo negative transition or STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated PTRansition num positive transition where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Event Register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters Event registers are destructive read only Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register To query the event register send the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated EVENt See Questionable Status Event Enable Register on page 212 for an explanation of how to set the summary bit using
58. Frequency key 48 amplitude correction point for other than antenna or cable 46 antenna amplitude corrections 41 cable amplitude correction point 43 frequency offset 97 frequency span changing to full span 136 front panel key Meas Setup 111 MODE 113 Mode Setup 113 Restart 128 front panel keys MEASURE 111 Full Screen 71 Full Span 136 Function 107 115 G gain setting quasi peak 329 Gate Delay 144 Gate Length 144 gate trigger delay trigger to open 340 edge level 342 length EDGE triggering 340 level 330 level level triggering 341 on off 342 polarity EDGE triggering 341 preset EDGE triggering 341 GPIB address 361 command statements 188 Index 417 Index instrument types 188 overview 188 graticule display 271 Graticule On Off 78 H handshake RS 232 bus 190 hardcopy output 281 hardware configuration query 363 hardware configuration display 363 Harmonic Auto Man key 103 Help key 99 highest peak finding next 116 host identification query 366 I identification of host 366 identification query 232 IEEE commands ESR 232 IDN 232 SAV 234 common commands 231 IEEE common commands 186 IF Gain 51 IF Gain Auto Fixed key 51 IF sweep output on off 368 image file type 296 Image Shift key 103 Image Suppress key 103 impedance mismatch correction 312 initiate measurement 235 input attenuation 329 configuration 361 coupling comma
59. K E W F D G Y and J are not available if Mixer Type is set to Presel Front Panel Access Input Output or Input Input Mixer Ext Mix Band External Mixer Bias Adjust SENSe MIXer BIAS lt numeric gt SENSe MIXer BIAS This command allows the adjustment of an internal bias source for use with external mixers This command is available only with Option AYZ External Mixing Factory Preset and RST 0 Range 10 mA to 10 mA Default Unit mA Remarks The bias signal is present on the center conductor of the IF INPUT connector on the front panel See related command SENSe MIXer BIAS STATe OFF ON 0 1 Mixer Bias will be set to Off when transitioning from manual harmonic mode to auto harmonic mode Front Panel Access Input Output or Input Input Mixer Mixer Config Mixer Bias On Off 326 Chapter 5 NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe MIXer Subsection Set External Mixer Bias On Off SENSe MIXer BIAS STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe MIXer BIAS STATe This command activates an internal bias source for use with external mixers This command is available only with Option AYZ External Mixing Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks The bias signal is present on the center conductor of the IF Input connector on the front panel See related command SENSe MIXer BIAS numeric Mixer Bias will be set to Off when transitioning from manual harmonic mode to auto harmonic mode Front P
60. Load Defaults or cycling power resets the time base to its original value Key Access System Alignments Loads the default values for the alignment system turns on the frequency corrections and resets the time base to the factory values Align Now All will automatically execute three times after pressing Load Defaults Key Access System Alignments With Option A4H GPIB and Parallel only Allows the GPIB address to be entered The default address is 18 With Option 1AX RS 232 and Parallel only Allows the baud rate to be set The available baud rate values are as follows 110 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 The default baud rate is 9600 Key Access System Displays the number and description of the options installed in your analyzer It also displays the instrument model number product number serial number Chapter 2 155 m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be 5 be bi au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Show Hdwr Color Palette Front Panel Key Reference System Local firmware revision number Host ID for licensing bootrom revision and amount of RAM and ROM Key Access System More Prev Page Next Page Allows you to access the previous page of show system It is grayed out if you are on the first page or only one page exists Key Access System More Show System Allows you to access the next
61. POWer NTRansition integer 2 0 0 eee ee eee eee rere 359 SLATE UBSioaable CNN Ranson eronder ttg i kurai dese SCR cae bee deena NERE 359 STATus QUEStionable PO Wer PI Ransition lt mteger gt EELER es kee bene ERE E RRREAX FERRI ERR 359 STATus QUEStionable POWer PIRansition EEN EEN EEN REESEN EELER RS EET 359 26 List of Commandes STA MS QUESfionable e A Ad KEE 359 SIATus QUEStonable PIRansition Ett ENEE EE EELER EELER EE RE RRR OS 360 STAIus OUEStonable PTRansiti l e EAR ENEE LE EELER EEN AEN RO E E dre d 360 STATS QUEStonableE A AT KEE 353 SYS lem COMMunicate GPIB 1 SEBLF ADDRess integer ick cece Rr nh Rm 361 iS Yo leu COMMiumeate GPIB I SELFEADDROSS x gcse s sek oe X tr Siemon ena eh ee Ee Lae p RR neg 361 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 CONTrol DTR OFFIONIIBFull 0 0 eee ee eee 361 SYS Tem COM Muncate S BRiall EICONTIGEDTR uss ET RE suck erka XU RE dune eeees beers 361 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 CONTrol RTS OFFIONIIBFull 0 0 0 0 00 eee 362 SYS lem COMMunicate SBRial t CONTIOURIS AA Eh E RESRRRAZWRERERESUCRESeHR EE Y AS 362 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 TRANsmit PACE XONINONE 363 SYSTem COMMmwnicate SERial T TRANsmit tPACB EN NEE EIERE 00440 NEE NEE EE EE RR 363 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 RECeive BAUD baud rate 0 0 0 ccc cee eee 362 SY STen COMMundcate SBRIial T RECerive BAUD 056 2055 EELER ENER SIE E NEE NEE XS e 362 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 RECe
62. Panel Access Marker Span Markers Center Frequency X Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X CENTer lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X CENTer Position the center frequency of the designated span type marker pair at the specified trace X value The value is in the X axis units which is often frequency or time Use CALCulate MARKer MODE SPAN to select span markers The query returns the current X value center frequency of the designated markers Range Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are positioned Si ge S et oO a S S 5 ge Iz a Si g bi Ki e oO Front Panel Access Marker lt active marker gt Span Pair Marker X Position CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition lt integer gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition Position the designated marker on its assigned trace at the specified X position The query returns the current X position for the designated marker Range Refer to the SENSe SWEep POINts command Chapter 5 255 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Front Panel Access Marker Span Markers Center Frequency X Position CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition CENTer lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition CENTer Position the center frequency of the designated span type marker pair at the specified trace X position Use CALCulate MARK
63. Power Measurements NdBpoints CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth NDB rel ampl CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth NDB Selects the power level below the peak of the signal at which the signal bandwidth will be measured by the markers CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth STATe must be ON To query the result of NdBpoints use the command CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth RESult Factory Preset and RST 3 dB Range 80 dB to 1 dB Default Unit dB Remarks Refer to CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth STATe for an explanation of this marker function Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search N dB Points Si ge S et oO a S S 5 ge Iz a Si g bi D e oO NdBresults CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth RESult Returns the measured bandwidth at the power level defined by CALCulate BWIDth NDB 100 is returned if CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth STATe is off or when a result is not available Refer to CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth STATe for an explanation of this marker function Range Real value less than the current frequency span Default Unit Hz Remarks When segmented sweep is on a result will not be available when the NDB marker crosses a segment boundary Chapter 5 237 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference CALCulate Subsystem Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search N dB Points NdBstate CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth STATe O
64. Power Mode 288 REN LERERER GR HERARG GE EPA PERRA CIE BRE EE 345 Set the Source Sweep Power Renee iue oo qoo delta Habs Re dE ea Hebe bee SS 345 Set the Output Power at the Start or the SWEEP rvosesxpaecrkRiewRrewe Fu Re aes 346 Set the Output Power to Step Automatically 1422icesssno vr ER RE E ERRETH REOS E Rb erki 346 5er the Output Power Siep SIEG Lauer dee vicem uuu teer AEN beu vd wire ddr dro 346 Set the Source Sweep Power Rule ciiscas space EROR E ER RO US RE RARE RR RR bee prm 347 Output Power TRACKING s 4 E Eh EE EE Cer Cor RODA CREER S EORR RC HC TR Rete 347 Output Power Tracking Peak srepeirrociotecki std ERG bESUERCEPSRER hide ceeka rete 347 WATS SUNSTEIN EE 349 E C om gon TEE 349 Operation EMA uiuos Eos EE DEP POKER RAT Re ipo p breeders 349 Operation Eveni QUI io uees vues dep ere quede qub Veo S wedddque qd dq 349 Operation Negative Lratsiflolh usas uauoo s bud EIERE RR b ice ACER RACER 350 Operation EE 350 Presset the Status De esos to irene Onr IEI RES RE RM RE RNC EE 350 STATus OUEStGonable Subsectio ENEE dut RR E Ue A EELER AR E ERA 251 Questionable Calibration Condition 422 pex rx p Re ep Ra OR EE HERO RP HR RE 351 Questionable Calibration Eeer 351 13 Ka E S KI E o EN EI E E Contents 14 Questionable Calibration Event Query iiis dre RR RADI cR R3 Gk RR REY WR GERE ROS 351 Questionable Calibration Negative Transition 24s rcs ED EES POP SE tii ENK Questionable Calibration Positi
65. QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition NEEN EL nce RR ERROR Race y PX XP ERAT RERO 354 STATus QUEStonable FREQuency PI Ransition ACHEN se RR E ERR RE ERE E ER I 2325 SLATS QuESHOnable FREQuency TP TRABSIUON EIER EE e AE RR ee eyes ee ee eee YS ERE 323 STATus QUESmonable BREQuencyE EVENIT 001 xe Ree Rem RR RR RR E 354 5 EATus QUEBomable IN Tent CONDON orere irqbrRueqpUEI ARDOR RUOEFEqUEEE A C RF uk pERu pu aad 353 STA Tus QUES onable IN TeentyiBNABIS euilepelo usos eee cbe e EE eG BEE kee GR ae 355 SEATus OLUE Stob e ENADBIET i52 4b ERE ER EE ERE V HER idee eh TR QR ee 3235 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity NTRansition integer eeseeeeeeeeee tro auss 356 STATus OUESfionable IN Tegnty NU RAMON be Sher de E AE Ee Ser Are e e 356 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity PTRansition integer rrur rr rrer r rrr 356 STATus QUES onable INTeenty PITRansition ee aes ka deo Se AER EE EIERE d AER d 356 STATICOUESuomabls INTesntv BVBNt iius sedes RI RR RR Ide y NEE DOSE KON eR e Rs 355 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition inf gere A EIER esee ken Race ERROR e wor RS ER qs 358 aTATuSOUESDondble NTRSHSIBON cuousqucerpiuREPRDCREFPYUOAGGUDCRK OGRA RN RR CREW E RE DEOR ENDEROR US ee 358 SIAIWSOUESDGBIBIE PONVePCONEBBO Ld iE RE doi RRdebe es CESARE RR RN EFE ERGO RUE 358 GTATusQUESBonsblePOWer BNABI amp emie s cs RES CREOTCHPR PRECOR P Y Ped d e ds 358 STATus QUESUuOtable POWer BNABle w 1 522222 02 9e uU EE dE EEN VERE RE ERES ARES 358 STATus QUEStionable
66. Ready and Clear to Send modem lines to be sure they are active 3 Send information to the interface and thence to the peripheral 4 After data transfer is complete clear Data Terminal Ready and Request to Send signals For ENTER operations 1 Set Data Terminal Ready line to active state Leave Request to Send inactive 2 Check Data Set Ready and Data Carrier Detect modem lines to be sure they are active 3 Input information from the interface as it is received from the peripheral 4 After the input operation is complete clear the Data Terminal Ready signal Data Transfer Errors The serial interface can generate several types of errors when certain conditions are encountered while receiving data from the peripheral device Errors can be generated by any of the following conditions e Parity error The parity bit on an incoming character does not match the parity expected by the receiver This condition is most commonly caused by line noise Framing error Start and stop bits do not match the timing expectations of the receiver This can occur when line noise causes the receiver to miss the start bit or obscures the stop bits e Overrun error Incoming data buffer overrun caused a loss of one or more data characters This is usually caused when data is received by the interface but no ENTER statement has been activated to input the information Break received A BREAK was sent to the interface by the peripheral devic
67. Reference System Local Diagnostics Accesses the Front Panel Test menu key Key Access System More Front Panel Test Allows you to verify the functionality of each front panel key except Preset The number next to each key name increments once each time the key is pressed Rotating the knobs causes the number of pulses to be counted Press ESC to exit Key Access System More Diagnostics Restore Sys Defaults Resets the persistent state variables to their defaults These are values such as the GPIB address that are unaffected by a power cycle or a preset when Preset Type is set to Factory Key Access System More m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be e 5 be bi Chapter 2 157 E 9 E D Pa E Ei m Si ei E D Ba 5 x e Table 2 3 Licensing Front Panel Key Reference System Local System Default Settings Feature Default Setting Color Printing On Custom Printer Color Capability No Custom Printer Language PCL3 Date Format MDY Display Viewing Angle 4 External Amplifier Gain 0 dBm GPIB Address 18 Input Impedance 50 Ohm Instrument Color Palette Default palette Manual Tracking Adjustment 2048 Page Size Letter Power On Last Preset Preset Preset Factory User Mode Print Format Print screen mode Print Orientation Portrait Printer Selection Auto Prints Page 1 RS 232 Baud Rate 96
68. S TATe Power level sensitive devices connected to the tracking generator output may be accidentally damaged This is because the actual source amplitude will be greater than the amplitude indicated on the analyzer when the power sweep function is being used The source amplitude value is used as the starting amplitude for a power sweep The ending amplitude for a power sweep is higher then the source amplitude value and it may actually be set to values beyond specified output levels Therefore exercise caution when connecting a power level sensitive device to the tracking generator output 344 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference SOURce Subsystem Factory Preset and RST 10 dBm Range ESA E4401B E4411B with option 1DN 50 Ohm Tracking Generator 70 dBm to 3 dBm ESA E4401B E4411B with Option 1DQ 75 Ohm Tracking Generator 27 25 dBmV to 45 75 dBmV ESA E4402B E4403B 66 dBm to 3 dBm ESA E4404B 66 dBm to 3 dBm ESA E4405B 66 dBm to 3 dBm ESA E4407B E4408B 66 dBm to 3 dBm Default Unit dBm Front Panel Access Source Amplitude On Off Sets the Source Output Power Mode SOURce POWer MODE FIXed SWEep SOURce POWer MODE Sets the source output to be at a single amplitude fixed or to sweep through a range of power levels Factory Preset and RST Fixed Front Panel Access Source Power Sweep On Off z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 7 oO Set the
69. STAR 2 3GHz RANG require a colon to separate them POW ATT 40dB FREQ STAR 2 3GHz FREQ STAR is in the SENSE subsystem not the TRIGGER subsystem POW ATT FREQ STAR POW ATT FREQ STAR POWand FREQ are within the same SENSE subsystem but they are two separate commands so they should be separated with POW ATT 5dB FREQ STAR 10MHz a semicolon not a colon POW ATT 5dB FREQ STAR 10MHz Attenuation cannot be a negative value Chapter 3 187 EZ ki E E v 2 E E on E E E ki E on Ki ka Ba Programming Fundamentals Overview of GPIB Option A4H Overview of GPIB Option A4H GPIB Instrument Nomenclature An instrument that is part of a GPIB network is categorized as a listener talker or controller depending on its current function in the network Listener A listener is a device capable of receiving data or commands from other instruments Any number of instruments in the GPIB network can be listeners simultaneously Talker A talker is a device capable of transmitting data or commands to other instruments To avoid confusion an GPIB system allows only one device at a time to be an active talker Controller A controller is an instrument typically a computer capable of managing the various GPIB activities Only one device at a time can be an active controller GPIB Command Statements Command statements form the nucleus of G
70. SYSTem DATE year month day Factory Preset and RST The factory default is MDY This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access System Time Date Date Format MDY DMY Date and Time Display DISPlay ANNotation CLOCk STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay ANNotation CLOCk STATe Turns on and off the display of the date and time on the spectrum analyzer screen Factory Preset and RST The factory default is On This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access System Time Date Time Date On Off Display Annotation Title Data DISPlay ANNotation TITLe DATA lt string gt DISPlay ANNotation TITLe DATA Enters the text that will be displayed in the user title area of the display Front Panel Access Display Title Display Title Change Title Display Title Clear Title Turn the Entire Display On Off DISPlay ENABle OFF ON 0 1 Turns the display on or off Having the display turned off may increase repetitive measurement rate The following key presses will turn display enable back on 1 If in local press any key 2 If in remote press the local system key 270 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference DISPlay Subsystem 3 If in local lockout no key the computer must either cancel local lockout or re enable the display Fact
71. Scale More Apply Corrections Yes No Pressing Apply Corrections Yes turns on the amplitude correction factors Corrections will only be applied to the sets of correction factors whose correction state is set to On To turn a set of correction factors on use the Correction On Off key in the Antenna Cable Other or User menus When Apply Corrections Yes is selected an A will appear on the screen annotation whether or not a correction set has been turned on using the Correction On key in the Antenna Cable Other or User menus Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Antenna Accesses the Antenna menu of keys which allow you to correct for antenna loss but may be used for any kind of correction Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Correction On Off Turns the amplitude correction function on or off for the selected set The corrections state must be set to On for the correction to be applied Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More 40 Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference AMPLITUDE Y Scale Corrections Antenna NOTE Antenna Cable and Other correction factors are generally entered as positive values This indicates a loss in the external device User correction factors are typically entered as negative values which indicate a gain in the external device Edit NOTE The amplitude correction entered for the lowest frequency will be applied to all Chapter 2 Accesses menu keys that al
72. Sense Detector Function Sample INITiate CONTinuous OFF ON 0 1 Chapter 3 The sample commands below are identical e INIT CONT ON e init continuous 1 177 E E E E KI S E 2 E E g S S E En S 2 Ba NOTE Programming Fundamentals Command Notation Syntax Command Notation Syntax A typical command is made up of key words set off by colons The key words are followed by parameters that can be followed by optional units Example TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel 2 5V The instrument does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters In the documentation upper case letters indicate the short form of the key word The upper and lower case letters together indicate the long form of the key word Either form may be used in the command Example Trig Seq Vid Lev 2 5Visthe same as trigger sequence video level 2 5V The command TRIGG Sequence Video Level 2 5V is not valid because TRIGG is neither the long nor the short form of the command 178 Chapter3 Programming Fundamentals Special Characters in Commands Special Characters in Commands Special Meaning Example Character A vertical stroke between Command parameters indicates SENSe DETector FUNCtion alternative choices The effect NEGative POSitive SAMPle of the command is different The choices are neg pos and samp depending on which parameter i SENSe DETector FUNCtio
73. Subsystem Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access System Alignments Freq Correct On Off Align the RF Circuitry CALibration RF CALibration RF Performs an alignment of the RF assembly The query performs the alignment and returns a zero if the alignment is successful Before executing this command connect a cable between front panel connector AMPTD REF OUT and the INPUT connector for all Agilent ESA spectrum analyzers except Agilent models E4401B and E4411B If the cable is not connected the alignment will fail Front Panel Access System Alignments Align Now RF Select the Source State for Calibration CALibration SOURce STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALibration SOURce STATe Controls the state of the 50 MHz alignment signal The alignment signal is internally switched to the INPUT for Agilent models E4401B and E4411B For all other models connect a cable between front panel connector AMPTD REF OUT and the INPUT connector before performing a calibration Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access For Agilent ESA models E4401B and E4411B Input Output or Input Amptd Ref f 50 MHz On Off For all other Agilent ESA models Input Output or Input Amptd Ref Out f 50 MHz On Off 264 Chapter 5 NOTE Remote Command Reference CALibration Subsystem Calibrate the Tracking Generator CALibration TG CALibration TG Performs an alignment of the tracking generator assembly The quer
74. TRACE1 TRACE3 is equivalent to trace 2 trace 1 trace 3 Mean Trace Data TRACe MATH MEAN trace Returns the mean of the amplitudes of the trace amplitude elements in measurement units Traces are TRACEI11213 Query the Signal Peaks TRACe MATH PEAK DATA Outputs the signal peaks by frequency or by amplitude This command uses only tracel data The data is returned as alternating amplitude frequency pairs The sort mode is determined by the command TRACe MATH PEAK SORT The commands CALCulate MARKer PEAK EXCursion and CALCulate MARKer PEAK THReshold are used to determine what is a signal peak To get the number of signals found meeting the specified limits use the query TRACe MATH PEAK POINts Query Number of Peaks Found TRACe MATH PEAK POINt S Outputs the number of signal peaks identified The amplitude of the peaks can then Chapter 5 373 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 07 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference TRACe Subsystem be queried with TRACe MATH PEAK DATA This command uses only tracel data Peak Sorting TRACe MATH PEAK SORT AMPLitude FREQuency TRACe MATH PEAK SORT Determines if the signals in the TRACe MATH PEAK DATA query are sorted by frequency or amplitude Amplitude sorts the identified peaks by descending amplitude Frequency sorts the iden
75. Threshold Peak Search Type Peak Readout gt Display Line lt Display Line Pk Srch Type Max Value Excursion amp Threshold pl777b Chapter 6 Menu Maps Preset Menu Preset Menu User Preset Mode Preset Factory Preset Save User Preset a Appears only when Preset is set to User in the System Power On Preset Preset Type menu Otherwise Preset performs a Factory Preset pI768b sde nuaw Chapter 6 407 Menu Maps Print Setup Menu Print Setup Menu Print Setup Print Setup Print Setup Page Size BENE Printer Type Color b Ww Orientation Portrait Ja Ledger Prints Page NENNEN More More 10f2 2of7 Orientation Define Custom Printer Type Language Portrait PCL3 PCL5S feed a Available only with PCLS printers b Grayed out unless Custom is selected in the Printer Type menu c Available only with color printers pl792a Ka Ki E E E EI 408 Chapter 6 Menu Maps Source Menu Source Menu Normalize Amplitude Store Ref On Off 1 gt 3 Power Sweep Normalize On Off On Off Attenuation ia DA Norm Ref Posn Ref Trace Amptd Offset View Blank Tracking Peak Man Track Adj a Source menu available only with Option 1DN or Option 1DQ installed b Agilent E4402B E4403B E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B only An active function which allows data entry pl779b sde nuaw Chapter 6 409 Menu Maps SPAN X Scale Menu SPAN X Scale Men
76. URS Bed rege BEE EE E 296 MMEMory SCReen BACKground NORMallREVerse slsseeseeeeeee e 296 MMEMory SCReen BACKground NORMallREVerse 00 cette eens 297 MME Norm SC een E E EE 297 MMEMory SCReen POR Mat BIEMAplMETallle ge gee eee RO ach EE REN EE EE Age 296 MMEMory STORe CORRection ANTennalCABLelOTHerlUSER file name 297 MMEMory STORe LIMit LLINEIILLINE2 file name 207 NIMBNlory S TORG RESuIS Hle MAMES re obs cab dee ah kG eed Seed de RA shone ee A E e 298 MMEM STORe SCReen lt file nat P E bee eGhd rhea eee Ree EE AE 298 MIMEMOoryS TORe Ss IA KC T ene Habeo 6 oss ohare ASE DERE OEE eeoREA MENS REN Koen RRO Y Rd 298 MMEMory S TORE TRACES labels ine HAMES oe icc ecko cee bee Rane Sore cR CHRRNE NEESER EERE ERO EN 299 SOLDTPRI STARS OFPIONIOL oss 3540064608400 9 544 ERE RARE RP Ho Rea Roe ROR Rc e Roe SR Res 300 o S NN EENHEETEN 300 IBULRGCCORKSCUOI OBESSE EE 343 SOUREL E ics sub pb XR OC P Voce b b b repe ebd dep ER dde be eqs 343 SOURCE FOVET AT Temahan eunple ic cou pein Hee esa ed oad eS IGS queer 343 SOURce PO Wer Al Tentation AUTO OFFIONION space eee e ee vee RR bee eS EEN EEN eb OES 344 ISOURGEPOWer ATTenuston AU TOT his cacie ede teed Rh E EE 344 SOURCE POW TATIGAN sa ane oe cheer SAEs Ro RE P RR ra HAERES RG eX a RR Yqe PR RE RGNG ERR 343 SOURCE FOWE MODE PICU WES jcc qure dme pb rte REA E ERE EE TE RP Up ERR bed ard bad 345 24 List of Commandes ET TEE 345 SOUBCGSPOWeOC SPAN exl qiio cou ouvesem
77. Unit Hz Remarks Video is adjusted using this command but must also be selected using the command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce VIDeo When not in FM Demod the Video Trigger level is adjusted queried using the command TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel lt amp1 gt Trigger Delay is not available in Video trigger mode so turning Video on turns off Trigger Delay but preserves the value of Trigger Delay z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 07 Chapter 5 387 Remote Command Reference UNIT Subsystem UNIT Subsystem Select Power Units of Measure UNIT POWer DBM DBMV DBUV DBUA V W A UNIT POWer Specifies amplitude units for the input output and display Factory Preset and RST dBm in log amplitude scale volts in linear amplitude scale History Ampere and decibel microampere units are available only with instruments having firmware revision A 06 00 and later Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units dBm AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units dBmV AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units dBuV AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units Volts AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units Watts AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units Amps AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units dBuA 2 9 E D E E E EI ki Q 2 E EI 388 Chapter 5 Menu Maps This chapter provides a visual representation of the front panel keys and their associated menu
78. Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions NOTE You must always add 64 the numeric value of RQS bit 6 to your numeric sum when you enable any bits for a service request The service request enable register contains the following bits Figure 4 5 Service Request Enable Register un e EI E w x oO ge CH 2 oO n 7 SRE num SRE cb912a NOTE The service request enable register presets to zeros 0 Standard Event Status Register The standard event status register is used to determine the specific event that sets bit 5 in the status byte register The standard event status register does not have negative and positive transition registers nor a condition register Use the IEEE common commands at the beginning of Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference in this guide to access the register To query the standard event status register send the ESR command The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1 For example if bit number 7 and bit number 3 are set to 1 the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 128 plus 8 So the decimal value 136 is returned See Setting and Querying the Status Register on page 200 in this chapter for more information Chapter 4 203 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Figure 4 6 Standard Event Status Register Diagram Operation Complete Request Bus Cont
79. accurate amplitude measurement of non noise like signals In sample mode the instantaneous signal value at the present display point is placed in memory When Sample detection is selected Samp appears in the upper left corner of the display Key Access Det Demod Detector Auto Man Negative peak detection functions the same as peak detection but selects the minimum video signal value This detection should not be used to make the most accurate amplitude measurements of signals When Negative Peak is selected NPk appears in the upper left corner of the screen Key Access Det Demod Detector Auto Man Selects and configures the specified type of EMI detection Selecting either quasi peak or EMI average runs an amplitude ranging process that affects the reference level and attenuation settings This optimizes the available dynamic range for the measurement It also gives you access to the View and QP Avg Gain functions Key Access Det Demod The EMI Detector menu key only appears when the Option AYQ is installed Quasi Peak EMI Average Off 66 The quasi peak EMI detector weights the peak detected amplitude using specific charge discharge and meter time constants The effect of this detector depends on the characteristics and repetition rate of the input signal When the quasi peak detector is selected the analyzer is forced to linear amplitude display using sample detection Key Access Det Demod EMI Detector The E
80. allow you view the files you wish to delete according to a selected file attribute The selections include By Date By Name By Extension By Size and Order Up Down Order Up allows you to view files you may wish to delete in ascending order for instance A B C Order Down allows you to view files you may wish to delete in descending order for instance C B A Key Access File Delete Allows you to move up one directory level If at the top level Dir Up moves to the drive level displaying the available disk drives Key Access File Delete Accesses the highlighted directory on your display If is highlighted this key acts in the same manner as Dir Up Key Access File Delete Allows you to copy files from one directory to another or to one or more mass storage devices Key Access File Copy Now Type Chapter 2 Executes the copy function If the copy is successful the message xxxxx file copied where xxxxx is the filename will appear on the display Key Access File Copy Allows you to select the type of file you want to copy Key Access File Copy All Displays all files you may wish to copy Key Access File Copy Type S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q 89 E 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E D Ba 5 x e Front Panel Key Reference File Setup Displays all setup SET files you may wish to copy A Setup f
81. an existing point After selecting a point Frequency or Time becomes active Key Access Display Limits Limit 1 or Limit 2 Edit Frequency The key label is Time if X Axis Units Time has been selected Allows you to enter the frequency value for a limit point After entering a value the limit table is sorted to place the frequency or time in the correct order For a new point Amplitude defaults to 0 dBm and Connected to Previous Pt defaults to Yes Amplitude then becomes active Key Access Display Limits Limit 1 or Limit 2 Edit Amplitude Allows you to enter the amplitude value for the current limit point After entering a value Connected to Previous Pt becomes active If a Tab key is pressed without entering a value the current Amplitude and Connected to Previous Pt values of the point are selected If Tab f is pressed the point number automatically increments to allow entry of the amplitude of the next point or if a new point to allow Frequency to be entered for the new point Key Access Display Limits Limit 1 or Limit 2 Edit 73 m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e D Si c g E 3 Q au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Front Panel Key Reference Display 74 Delete Limit Freq Interp Log Lin Connected to Previous Pt Yes No Allows you to determine whether the current point will be connected to the previous point No limit testing is
82. analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 8 256 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 9 512 Demodulation A in this bit position indicates an invalid span during FM Demodulation and Listen measurements 10 1024 Unused This bit is always set to 0 11 2048 Unused This bit is always set to 0 12 4096 Unused This bit is always set to 0 13 8192 Unused This bit is always set to 0 14 16384 Unused This bit is always set to 0 15 32768 Always Zero 0 This bit is always set to 0 216 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Questionable Status Frequency Condition and Event Enable Registers The Questionable Status Frequency condition register continuously monitors output frequency status of the analyzer Condition registers are read only To query the condition register send the command STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1 The negative and positive transition filters specify which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register The changes may be positive from 0 to 1 or negative from 1 to 0 Send the command STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition num negative transition or STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition num positive transi
83. associated with a number parameter A percent parameter is a rational number between 0 and 100 with no units A relative power parameter is a positive rational number followed by optional units The default units are dB Acceptable units are dB only lt string gt A string parameter includes a series of alpha numeric characters lt time gt A time parameter is a rational number followed by optional units The default units are seconds Acceptable units include S MS US Block Program Data Definite length arbitrary block response data is defined in section 8 7 9 2 of IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 486 1 1987 New York NY 1992 definite length block Allows data to be transmitted over the system Chapter 3 interface as a series of 8 bit data bytes This element is particularly useful for sending large quantities of data 8 bit extended ASCII codes or other data that are not able to be directly displayed A definite length block of data starts with an ASCII header that begins with and indicates how many additional data points are following in the block For example if the header is 512320 then interpret the header as follows 181 o E ke bei E E E 5 ke m E 5 a 5 E 5 e GC 2 E E E E KI S E 2 E E g S S E En S 2 Ba Programming Fundamentals Parameters in Commands 18
84. auto coupled Sweep 401 Threshold level 90 dBm display off Title cleared Trace 1 clear write Trace 2 blank at bottom of display Trace 3 blank at bottom of display Trigger free run Trig Delay Off 1 usec Trig Offset Off 0 sec VBW RBW ratio 1 000 X auto coupled Video averaging off Video bandwidth 3 MHz auto coupled 1 E4401B E4402B without Option UKB E4403B and E4411B have fixed AC coupling E4407B without Option UKB and E4408B have fixed DC coupling Chapter 2 123 m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q E 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E D Ba 5 x e User Preset Mode Preset Factory Preset Save User Preset Front Panel Key Reference Preset This key is only available when the Preset Type key is set to User Press System Power On Preset Preset Type User User Preset loads the analyzer configuration that existed when Save User Preset was pressed If Save User Preset has never been pressed the factory preset state is loaded If the user preset state has been saved but the load fails for any reason the error message Unable to load user state is displayed in the status line and the state is reset to whatever it was before the Preset key was pressed This can sometimes happen if firmware has been upgraded or applications have been un installed after the user preset state was saved Save User Pr
85. automatically selected The selection order is to look for the lowest numbered trace in the following order of trace modes clear write max hold min hold view mode If there are no traces in any of these modes it selects trace 1 Key Access Marker More Accesses the following menu keys that allow you to change the active marker readout Key Access Marker More Frequency Sets the marker to Frequency The default selection in non zero spans displays the absolute frequency of a normal marker or the frequency of the delta marker relative to the reference marker Key Access Marker More Readout Period Sets the marker readout to Period Displays the reciprocal of the above frequency Key Access Marker More Readout Time Sets the marker readout to Time The default selection in zero span displays the time interval between a normal marker and the start of the sweep or the time of the delta marker relative to the reference marker Key Access Marker More Readout Inverse Time Sets the marker readout to Inverse Time Displays the reciprocal of the above time interval Key Access Marker More Readout Accesses the following marker function menu keys listed below Key Access Marker More Band Power Indicates the power over that part of the trace between the reference and active markers If only one marker is present when you press Band Power a second marker is placed at the same location as the first marker To reposit
86. divisions as log or linear units Factory Preset and RST Front Panel Access Chapter 5 Logarithmic AMPLITUDE Y Scale Scale Type Log Lin z S et Q E E 5 Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 07 277 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE NOTE Remote Command Reference FORMat Subsystem FORMat Subsystem The FORMat subsystem sets a data format for transferring numeric and array information TRACe DATA and TRACe DATA are affected by POR Mat subsystem commands Byte Order FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped FORMat BORDer This command selects the binary data byte order for data transfer It controls whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped mode This command affects only the byte order for setting and querying trace data for the TRACe DATA and query TRACe DATA commands Normal mode is when the byte sequence begins with the most significant byte MSB first and ends with the least significant byte LSB last in the sequence 1121314 Swapped mode is when the byte sequence begins with the LSB first and ends with the MSB last in the sequence 4131211 Factory Preset and RST Normal Numeric Data format FORMat TRACe DATA ASCii INTeger 32 REAL 32 REAL 64 UINTeger 16 FORMat TRACe DATA This command changes the format of the trace data input and output It affects only the data fo
87. ee EELER ner S3 pb Rp 244 SOALC plate LEINSLTIEEDISPIBVT cuui cea dain E ese Pede deb PCR RR ER eee RR ber Re i ke qu RR 244 HALO ulate LE Ne FAE ig odo deh poe Rob etae pha ete IB PE dd PER ba d Ee ME dp dup qai 244 C AT CulatecLLENSTTIEESM AR Om rel amplins geekucekexuxertqp E ke y RR e ERG wane 244 CALCulste LLINe E IE NESBUmS TATe OFFRONO eh de KEEN ERRASSE RR DE ER EE E 244 CALCU LLIN Z MARGIN STAI iiocasuesuasu ee EEN EA 244 CALCH LLIN IIZ MARGIN EE SE EE EA EE A EA 244 LAL CMa LLUN TISTA OPPIONIBIL gr ER PORA des tudes oud ee EE EE db Rae REE 245 CALC alate EINSITWESDATIST gh EE EE de EE de HE Pur d r eed POR Edere GR e ERR gr 245 CALC ulate LLIN ESTY PEUPPeHLEORNGE vba cRpRECRERYG CE RECOEPASUPRQGCRIqG EC Rea EUR SEY 245 E dE NW Ir AN NIIS RE ES EE 245 CAN Baa MABKOISWVOEE cba e bg eb I ob qeeboq ub pp qe eb p e Epp eq e dd eq c tbe eqs 246 LCAL ulte MARK FC Dunt Resolutio reale yeh ER eS HEREO Y eb ibd price ddp 246 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt RESolution AUTO OPRIONIOIT RR 247 CALCUulate NAR Ker PCOuntRESolutiom AUTO 5 casco EE E RR REEREGREEAS LEE REESE ROSE AED 247 X ALCuUlatc MARKerFCOuntRESOl UOHT Ehe EELER PERRA CAPERE Ea 246 CALCE MARK MODE SPAN aui tshsa kr TEC REA ERR ERR Kb REEERE REET bebe d pln 258 18 List of Commandes CALM ulate MAR Ker PEAK AANER AE Ee ENEE dE EE 251 CALCulate MARKer PEAK EXCursion lt rel_ampl gt 0 0 0 cece cece een eee nes 250 CALC ute MARESEPEANDNSGCUUBIORT u
88. envelope signal The value can be set to an absolute level with the units displayed in the current y axis units This command is available only when Option B7E RF Communications Hardware is installed Factory Preset and RST 0 dBm 380 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem Range 100 dBm to 100 dBm Default Unit dBm History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access Trig More 1 of 2 RF Burst Setup RF Burst Relative Mode Setting TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel RELative rel ampl gt TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel RELative Set the trigger level when using the RF burst wideband trigger The value is relative to the peak of the burst RF burst is also known as RF envelope This command is available only when Option B7E RF Communications Hardware is installed Factory Preset and RST 6 dB Range 45 dB to 0 dB Default Unit dB TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel TYPE ABSolute RELative History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel F Access Trig More 1 of 2 RF Burst Setup o S S z 2 RF Burst Mode Setting gt F E S oO TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel TYPE Select the trigger level of the RF burst envelope signal The level can be set to either a level relative to the peak of the burst RELative mode or to an absolute level ABSolute mode This command is available only when Option B7E RF Communications Hardware i
89. executed If you are using the SCPI status registers and the analyzer mode is changed the status bits should be read and any errors resolved prior to switching modes Error conditions that exist prior to switching modes cannot be detected using the condition registers after the mode change This is true unless they recur after the mode change although transitions of these conditions can be detected using the event registers Changing modes resets all SCPI status registers and mask registers to their power on defaults Hence any event or condition register masks must be re established after a mode change Also note that the power up status bit is set by any mode change since that is the default state after power up z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 07 SA Spectrum Analysis GSM CDMA cdmaOne PNOISE phase noise EDGE NFIGURE noise figure BLUETOOTH CATV Cable TV MAN Modulation Analysis LINK 89600 VSA Link Software Chapter 5 291 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D e NOTE Remote Command Reference INSTrument Subsystem If you are using the status bits and the analyzer mode is changed the status bits should be read and any errors resolved prior to switching modes Error conditions that exist prior to switching modes cannot be detected using the condition registers after the mode change This is true unless they recur after the mode
90. file see Save on page 130 or as part of the power on preset function see Power On Preset on page 152 NOTE When loading a state type file segmented sweep will not turn on if any of the parameters in the file contain optional instrument settings not currently loaded on the analyzer or frequency settings outside the current range of the analyzer Edit Accesses the segmented sweep editor where a maximum of thirty two segments can be defined by the segment number and the six parameters described below Use the data control keys described in the Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzer Getting Started Guide to enter the setting as each parameter is highlighted Refer to the Editor section above for more information Key Access Sweep Segmented Modify Segment Allows you to select a previously defined segment or the next segment for modification Use the numeric keypad to select a specific segment or press the Tab keys to access adjacent segments Key Access Sweep Segmented Modify Edit Center Freq Allows you to specify the center frequency for a particular segment using the data control keys For more information on this function refer to Center Freq on page 96 Key Access Sweep Segmented Modify Edit Span Allows you to select a frequency range symmetrically about the center frequency for the current segment using the data control keys NOTE The order of the segments may change when you enter center frequency
91. file name must have a file extension of csv or trc The file extension determines whether just the trace data is stored or the trace is stored with its state The csv extension uses the CSV comma separated values format for the trace data in frequency amplitude pairs The trc extension is for files that include both trace and state data The trc file data is only readable by the analyzer Example MMEM STOR TRAC TRACE3 C mytrace trc Range Trace labels are TRACEIITRACE2ITRACE3IALL Remarks This command will fail if the lt file name already exists Front Panel Access File Save Type Trace z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 07 Chapter 5 299 2 9 E D E E E EI ki Q 2 E EI Remote Command Reference OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut Subsystem The OUTPut subsystem controls the characteristics of the tracking generator output port Refer to the SOURce Subsystem on page 343 which also contains commands that control the characteristics of the tracking generator Turn Output On Off OUTPut STATe OFF ON 0 1 OUTPut STATe Controls the tracking generator output Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Source Amplitude On Off 300 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference SENSe Subsystem SENSe Subsystem Sets the instrument state parameters so that you can measure the input signal SENSe subsystem commands used fo
92. frequencies To avoid possible irregularities signal distortion at the ends of the trace use small values for the smooth parameter Refer to Figure 5 2 for a discussion of this end point smoothing phenomena With 31 smoothing points and a 401 point trace point 16 will be the first point to have full 31 bucket smoothing Likewise point 385 will be the last point with full 31 bucket smoothing Under the conditions stated points 2 through 15 will be smoothed as follows Point 2 is derived from averaging buckets 1 through 3 Point 3 is derived from averaging buckets 1 through 5 Point 4 is derived from averaging buckets 1 through 7 and so forth until point 16 is reached The quantity of buckets used for the smoothing running average increases at the rate of 2 buckets per point from point 1 to point smoothing number 2 1 at which time the full number of smoothing points is utilized The same characteristic occurs at the completion of the trace beginning at point 386 when the number of averaging buckets begins to decrease until point 401 is reached z S Lo Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 By replacing the value of each point in a trace with the average of the values of a number of points centered about that point any rapid variations in noise or signals are smoothed into more gradual variations It thereby performs a function similar to reducing the video bandwidth without the corresponding change
93. level Dir Up moves to the drive level displaying the available disk drives Key Access File Save Accesses the highlighted directory on your display Key Access File Save Accesses menu keys that allow you to load analyzer setups states traces limits and corrections into the analyzer from a floppy A drive or internal flash C drive Key Access File Load Now Type 86 Executes the load function When the load is complete the message XXXXXX file loaded where XXXXXX is the filename will appear in the status line on your display Key Access File Load Allows you to select the type of file you want to load Setup Displays all setup files you may wish to load SET Setup files include a complete set of instrument parameters including traces states limits and corrections Loading a setup restores the analyzer as closely as possible to all previous instrument settings at the time of the save Key Access File Load Type State Displays all state files you may wish to load STA Loading a state restores most settings to the previously saved values Key Access File Load Type Trace Displays all trace files TRC you may wish to load Traces can be loaded individually or as a group When a trace is loaded the state that existed when that trace was saved is loaded along with the trace Also the loaded trace is placed in view mode Key Access File Load Type Chapter2 NOTE NOTE
94. maximize the amplitude at the active marker frequency This command has no effect if it is activated in non preselected bands This command is usable from 3 GHz to the maximum frequency of the analyzer This command is available only on Agilent ESA models E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B This command has no effect with markers set to less than 3 GHz Remarks A peak search will be done if no marker is on Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Presel Center Chapter 5 331 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 07 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference SENSe SIDentify Subsection SENSe SIDentify Subsection Set Mixer Signal Identification Mode SENSe SIDentify MODE ISUPpress ISHift SENSe SIDentify MODE This command lets you choose one of two types of signal identification methods when viewing multiple responses from non preselected external mixers This command is available only with Option AYZ External Mixing Refer to INPut MIXer TYPE to select the type of mixer being used Factory Preset and RST ISUPpress History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Front Panel Access Input Output or Input Input Mixer Signal ID Mode Image Suppress Input Output or Input Input Mixer Signal ID Mode Image Shift Set Mixer Signal Identification State SENSe SIDentify STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SIDentif
95. of 3 ve 400 Chapter 6 Menu Maps Freq Count Marker Menu Freq Count Marker Menu Freq Count Marker Count On of Resolution Auto Man An active function which allows data entry a Not available when Frequency Scale Type Log is selected mi P sde Dua Chapter 6 401 Menu Maps FREQUENCY Channel Menu FREQUENCY Channel Menu FREQUENCY Channel Freq Channel Center Freq Start Freq Stop Freq CF Step Auto Man Freq Offset Signal Track On ot Scale Type p Log Lin a Not available when FREQUENCY Scale Type Log is selected b Agilent ESA E Series only E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B and E4407B pI763b An active function which allows data entry Ka Ki E E E EI 402 Chapter 6 Menu Maps Input Output Menu Input Output Menu Input Mixer Ext Mix Band Ext Mix Band Input Z Corr Input Mixer g 18 26 5 GHz le 75 110 GHz c 500 75 Q Int Ext K W Coupling a 26 5 40 GHz 90 140 GHz c Amptd Ref Out ignal Ident e 33 50 GHz 110 170 GHz c On Off On Off Q D 40 60 GH 140 220 GHz 50 75 GHz 170 260 GHz c V Y 60 90 GHz 220 325 GHz E J Mixer Config More 1 of 3 Mixer Config Signal ID Mode Harmonic Auto Man Mixer Type f Presel Unpre Image Shift Mixer Bias c On off Image Supress a Agilent E4402B or E4407B with Option UKB E4404B and E4405B only b Key label is Amptd Ref for E4401B and E4411B c Grayed out if Mixer Type is Pres
96. of 3 2 of 3 3 of 3 a The Alpha Editor 1 menu is used to configure system options and licensing b The Alpha Editor 2 menu is used to name files c The Alpha Editor 3 menu is used to change titles on the display sde nuaw Chapter 6 391 Ka e E E EI Menu Maps AMPLITUDE Y Scale Menu AMPLITUDE Y Scale Menu AMPLITUDE Amplitude Ref Level Presel Center Presel Adjust More 10f3 Amplitude Y Axis Units Y Axis Units Ref Lvl Offst Ext Amp Gain Max Mixer Lvl a Agilent E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B only b ESA E Series only E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B and E4407B c Grayed out in FM Demod Demod View On d Not available in External Mixing Mode Option AYZ e Available only with Option 1DR Narrow Resolution Bandwidth and firmware revision gt A 06 00 f Grayed out when Demod View is accessed through Option 106 Bluetooth FM Demodulation An active function which allows data entry 392 pl749b Chapter 6 Menu Maps Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Menu Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Menu Corrections Appl Corrections Yes No Antenna Off Cable Off Other Off User Off More 1of2 Corrections Freq Interp Log Lin Delete All Corrections More 2 of 2 An active function which allows data entry Antenna Correction Off o 5 Cable Correction o EI IS Other Correction o 5 E o 2 o o g 3 o o amp IS s Del
97. of true input signals Multiple and image responses maybe generated when using unpreselected external mixers Key Access Input Output Input Mixer NOTE Segmented sweep is not available when Signal Ident On is selected NOTE If the input signal is too broad band or unstable for the identification process to properly identify it turn off the signal identification and look for two similar responses separated by approximately 642 8 MHz twice the 321 4 MHz first IF If a mixer mode for example 8 is active the right member of the response pair is the correct response if a mixer mode is active the left member of the response pair is the correct response The amplitude accuracy of the analyzer is degraded when signal identification is active and the message Signal Ident On Amptd Uncal will appear on the display E 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E E D Ba 5 z e 102 Chapter2 Signal ID Mode Mixer Config Chapter 2 Front Panel Key Reference Input Output Allows you to select either of the following types of signal identification methods Key Access Input Output Input Mixer Image Suppress Image Shift Selects a signal identification mode that attempts to suppress all but valid responses by mathematically removing all image and multiple responses of signals present at the mixer input The analyzer internally acquires the data in a two sweep sequence operates on the acquired
98. or span because the sequence is based upon increasing start frequency Refer to the Displaying the Trace section above for clarification Zero span is available for any or all segments It must be set by pressing Span 0 Hz For more information on this function refer to Zero Span on page 136 Key Access Sweep Segmented Modify Edit Res BW Allows you to select the resolution bandwidth to a value between 1 kHz and 5 MHz for the current segment using the data control keys S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Chapter 2 149 Front Panel Key Reference Sweep For more information on this function refer to BW Avg on page 60 Key Access Sweep Segmented Modify Edit Video BW Allows you to set the video bandwidth for the current segment to a value between 30 Hz and 3 MHz For more information refer to Video BW Auto Man on page 60 Key Access Sweep Segmented Modify Edit Points Allows you to set the number of points for the current segment The minimum number of points in a zero span segment is 2 ina non zero span segment 101 The maximum number of points in the total sweep is 8192 If you exceed the number of points available in one segment the message Too much data total sweep points limited will be displayed in the status line yellow on color displays Key Access Sweep Segmented Modify Edit Sweep Time Allows you to set the sweep time for the curren
99. p deg 240 Control Limit Line Frequency IpterpolaHm 5 cscs care sade cutex eter eeeun yu prp 241 penses Limit Line Values sao aiios bor ien hemos dee ob RR Rb Rd RR KR P Rd SERRE a 241 Merge Additional Values into the Existing Limit Le 243 Delete Ewin foa CIC cT 243 Display the Liini Line EE 244 Testthe Data Against the Limit Line iuo ok pr dabus tunil irut ra x dac bred d 244 Be the NEED IB Code ici che ene ie bao eO abb edteeiese dida dida i 244 Display the Limit Magi pegi epo Eger e p C EO Ded eg UC RR p aj p db Ke ope 244 Control Limit Lime Desrinb AE EE EE VERE IEEE SEE 245 Select te Type of Lusit LiNE Ee RE dd RE dE SE SE 245 CALCU MARK er SUDC HOD 2a bre xe ENS bod Re E RE Ra I ERR NP REN CR EAED whee ewes 246 Markers All Off ou SCH Tratos asse RR ER erbe RR RR UERE E RESR RE Re PE ddl 246 Continuous Peaking Marker FuncHoBl e ken ERENNERT A EE RARE ER EA 246 Frequency Counter Marker Result iae EE ERES EE P PEE URS E E PE EO I RE PIS 246 Frequency Counter Marker Automatic Resolution EE EE EEN n 247 Frequency Counter Market EELER pP Pe AE EA 247 Frequency Counter Marker Query Ah pre Rue XA OR Se PEOR Coi i E de 247 Marker EHOOEODC uou d 4 by GSR Ee bs ATI I RR ER RR od pape d cd 248 Marker Peak Maximum Search AER EE 6400 SEENEN EE ROSE RR ERR 248 Marker Peak Maximum Lett Search icc c405 chica ec aueg eden kedeege des ne te dec debaewe 248 Marker Next Peak Maximum SEa urnen Eet Se 249 Marker Peak Maximum Right Search A EELER EELER RR RAP
100. performed between disconnected points Pressing this key when the Connected field is selected toggles the Connected value of the current point and increments the Point number to allow entry or editing of the Frequency of the next point If a Tab key is pressed without entering a value the current Connected value of the point is selected If Tab f is pressed the Point number automatically increments to allow entry of the Connected value of the next point or if a new point to allow Frequency to be entered for the new point Key Access Display Limits Limit 1 or Limit 2 Edit Delete Point Allows you to delete the current point in the limit line You will be prompted with the message If you are sure press key again to delete Pressing Delete Point again will delete the point Key Access Display Limits Limit 1 or Limit 2 Edit Allows you to delete the current limit set You will be prompted with the message If you are sure press key again to delete Pressing Delete again will delete the limit set Key Access Display Limits Limit 1 or Limit 2 Allows you to determine how limit trace values are computed between points in a limit table The available interpolation modes are linear and logarithmic If the linear mode is used for both frequency and amplitude a straight line is used when interpolating between points in a limit table If frequency interpolation is logarithmic frequency values between limit points are co
101. persistent state values to their factory defaults The term persistent means that the command retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Examples of persistent functions are GPIB address power on type and preset type Front Panel Access System Restore Sys Defaults Preset Type SYSTem PRESet TYPE FACTory USER MODE z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 Selects the preset state to be either factory defined or user defined preset conditions Factory Preset and RST The factory default is MODE This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle History Changed with firmware revision A 08 00 Previous firmware revisions had default type FACTory Remarks SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE defines the user preset Front Panel Access System Power On Preset Preset Type Chapter 5 369 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference SYSTem Subsystem Save User Preset SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE Saves the current instrument conditions as the user preset condition Front Panel Access System Power On Preset Save Type Preset Speaker Control SYSTem SPEaker STATe OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem SPEaker STATe Turns the internal speaker on or off Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Det Demod Demod Speaker On Off Set Ti
102. qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers If this product is not used as specified the protection provided by the equipment could be impaired This product must be used in a normal condition in which all means for protection are intact only Always use the three prong AC power cord supplied with this product Failure to ensure adequate grounding may cause product damage Where to Find the Latest Information Documentation is updated periodically For the latest information about Agilent Technologies ESA Spectrum Analyzers including firmware upgrades and application information please visit the following Internet URL http www agilent com find esa Microsoft is a U S registered trademark of Microsoft Corp Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used under license If the ESA Spectrum Analyzer experiences a rapid power down power up sequence the analyzer may not have fully powered down If this occurs Agilent recommends that you power down the analyzer using the front panel power switch for approximately 10 seconds then turn the power back on This will allow the hardware to turn on in the correct state Contents 5 z oO e S le S 5 Kg oO 5 ET wn 1 Using This Document Wiat e Thus EEN 36 2 Front Panel Key Reference ANPLITUDE EEN 38 EE 32 Bk on d Dae EE 59 BUE omoia e sneer ene Ep pU qb Qt qupd dob Y die dobles ju dap Y EO hb CR ett 60 D
103. rear panel ports are controlled by instrument processing If these ports are not used in a particular application SYSTem PORTs IFVSweep ENABle OFF can be used to disable the ports and conserve instrument resources Select phase noise performance SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis can be used to optimize either phase noise performance or tuning speed In some settings optimizing for tuning speed reduces sweep time and the re tune time between sweeps In other settings only the re tune time is improved Use binary data format instead of ASCII The ASCII data format is the instrument default since it is easier for people to understand and is required by SCPI for RST However data input output is faster using the binary formats FORMat DATA REAL 64 selects the 64 bit binary data format for all your numerical data queries You may need to swap the byte order if you are using a PC rather than UNIX NORMal1 is the default byte order Use FORMat BORDer SWAP to change the byte order so that the least significant byte is sent first When using the binary format data is sent in a block of bytes with an ASCII header A data query would return the block of data in the following format DNNN lt nnn binary data bytes To parse the data e Read two characters D where D tells you how many N characters follow the D character Read D characters the resulting integer specifies the number of data bytes sent Read the bytes into a
104. screen Disable auto alignment CALibration AUTO OFF disables the automatic alignment process of the instrument Automatic alignment processing occurs at the end of each sweep In a stable operating environment automatic alignment consumes very little instrument resources However in a high throughput application any demand upon instrument resources affects measurement update rate When auto alignment is off the Align Now All function should be performed periodically Refer to the appropriate Specifications and Characteristics chapter in the Agilent Technologies ESA Spectrum Analyzers Specifications Guide E Series or Agilent Technologies ESA Spectrum Analyzers Specifications Guide L Series for more information on how often to perform Align Now All when the auto alignment is off Use a fixed IF Gain range In applications where narrow resolution bandwidths 1 kHz are required and a high dynamic range is not required DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe LOG RANGe AUTO OFF disables auto ranging and results in increased measurement update rate Chapter 3 183 a vd EI ke o E B 5 ge g z a E E 5 e E N 4 ki E E v Ss E E On E E E ki E on Ki ka Ba Programming Fundamentals Improving Measurement Speed Disable the IF Video Sweep output ports If the analyzer has Options A4J IF Video and Sweep Ports or AYX Fast Time Domain Sweeps various output signals with
105. sets and queries the bits in the enable register part of the standard event status register ESR event status register queries and clears the standard event status register OPC operation complete sets bit 0 in the standard event status register when all operations are complete SRE SRE service request enable sets and queries the value of the service request enable register STB status byte queries the value of the status byte register without erasing its contents Complete command descriptions are given in Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference under the subsection entitled IEEE Common Commands on page 231 Chapter 4 197 Ka z D E Ki On E EI Ka E 2 Ki S Ke Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions NOTE If you are using the status bits and the analyzer mode is changed the status bits should be read and any error conditions resolved prior to switching modes Error conditions that exist prior to switching modes cannot be detected using the condition registers after the mode change This is true unless they recur after the mode change although transitions of these conditions can be detected using the event registers Changing modes resets all SCPI status registers and mask registers to their power on defaults Hence any event or condition register masks must be re established after a mode change Also note that the power up status bit i
106. sweep to start if the detected RF envelope voltage rises to a level set by the video trigger level When Video is pressed a line appears on the display The analyzer triggers when the input signal exceeds the trigger level at the left edge of the display You can change the trigger level using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad Key Access Trig This function is not available when the Resolution Bandwidth is less than 1 kHz If a Resolution Bandwidth less than 1 KHz is selected while in Video Trigger mode the Trigger mode changes to Free Run Activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to be synchronized with the next cycle of the line voltage Key Access Trig Line trigger is not available when operating from a dc power source Activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start when the external voltage connected to GATE TRIG EXT TRIG IN on the rear panel passes through approximately 1 5 volts The external trigger signal must be a 0 V to 5 V TTL signal This function also controls the trigger polarity for positive or negative going signals Key Access Trig Option B7B TV Trigger and Picture on Screen only Activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to be synchronized with the next occurrence of the synchronizing pulse of a selected TV line Line number range is dependent on the settings of the Standard and Field menus within the TV Trig Setup menu When the line numbe
107. the condition registers after the mode change This is true unless they recur after the mode change although transitions of these conditions can be detected using the event registers Changing modes resets all SCPI status registers and mask registers to their power on defaults Therefore any event or condition register masks must be re established after a mode change Also note that the power up status bit is set by any mode change since that is the default state after power up 1 SA 3 GSM 4 CDMA cdmaOne 14 PNOISE phase noise 252 EDGE 219 NFIGURE noise figure 228 BLUETOOTH 227 CATV Cable TV 229 MAN Modulation Analysis 231 LINK 89600 VSA Link Software 290 Chapter5 NOTE Remote Command Reference INSTrument Subsystem Example INST NSEL 4 Factory Preset Persistent state with factory default of Range to x where x depends upon which applications are installed Front Panel Access MODE Select Application INSTrument SELect SA GSM CDMA PNOISE BLUETOOTH EDGE MAN LINK CATV NFIGURE INSTrument SELect Select the measurement mode The actual available choices depend upon which modes measurement applications are installed in the instrument A list of the valid choices is returned with the INST CAT query Once an instrument mode is selected only the commands that are valid for that mode can be
108. the event enable register In this case use the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated ENABle lt num gt Chapter 4 223 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions STATus QUEStionable INTegrity Register Figure 4 15 Questionable Status Integrity Register Diagram Reserved No Result Available Measurement Timeout Data Uncalibrated Summary IF ADC Over Range Over Range Under Range Insufficient Data Acquisition Failure Memory Problem Auto Trigger Timeout Trigger Problem Invalid Data Unidentified Error Setting Limited Readjusted Always Zero 0 2 D KI E Ki Sp KI Ei K E 2 E S o SEI QUEStionable Condti n Register 15 14 13 12 1 0987 65432 10 Status QUEStionable Y v v V titii tii INTegrity Positive 15 14 13 12 131109 870654 32 1 O Ti Fil SuusQUESumabe y Y Y Y Y X Y YY 3 V Y Y V3 Negavi 15 14 13 122 420109 876 5432 1 0 Ti Fil lieu B ae INTegrit Event Register 15 14 13 12 1110987654321 01 12 11 109876543210 Status QUEStionable CALibration Event Enable Register To Status Questionable Register Bit 9 ol719a Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Integrity Condition Register are given in the following table 224 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description Value 0 1 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer
109. the largest possible value UP increments the parameter DOWN decrements the parameter Include the key word MINimum or MAXimum after the question mark in a query in order to return the numeric value of the key word Example query SENSE FREQuency CENTer MAXimum Variable Parameters ampl rel ampl The lt ampl gt amplitude parameter and the rel ampl relative amplitude parameter consist of a rational number followed by optional units Acceptable units for ampl include V mV LV dBm dBmV dBuV Watts W rel ampl units are given in 180 Chapter3 angle file name freq integer number percent rel power Programming Fundamentals Parameters in Commands dB An angle parameter is a rational number followed by optional units The default units are degrees Acceptable units include DEG RAD A file name parameter is the name of your file including the full path The back slash that follows the drive colon CH usually used in computer paths is not used in the SCPI command string A frequency parameter is a positive rational number followed by optional units The default unit is Hz Acceptable units include Hz kHz MHz GHz There are no units associated with an integer parameter A number parameter is a member of the set of positive or negative intrigers and including zero Fractional numbers are included in the number parameter There are no units
110. the time or frequency interval represented by a particular measurement point The method is determined by selection of either Video or RMS Noise Marker see Marker Noise Averages signal amplitudes across measurement points to reduce variations for noisy signals VBW filtering Filtering the video is a form of averaging the video signal When trace average is on BW Avg Average On the Average Type is shown on the left side of the display When Avg Type Auto is selected the analyzer chooses the type of averaging to be used as shown in Figure 2 2 When one of the average types is selected manually the analyzer uses that type without regard to the other analyzer settings and sets Avg Type to Man S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Chapter 2 57 Front Panel Key Reference Auto Couple Figure 2 2 Auto Rules for Average Type Is Y Axis Scale Hz Demod View Yes Type Video No Is Detector Average Yes Type Power No Type Video cl79a Key Access Auto Couple Video Avg Video averaging averages the data as appropriate for the y axis scale When Avg Type Video Avg is selected VAvg appears on the left side of the analyzer display if Average is On Key Access Auto Couple Avg Type Pwr Avg Power averaging is performed by converting the trace data from logarithmic to linear power units and then averaging the power trace data When Avg Type Pwr Avg is selected P
111. vet e EE Rr RR REA S RA RUP ed esr dd Rd ee SE 264 Select the Source State for CalibralioB 666 soe ck erbe RRRPRRGG RRGCDERE A REOR IPRC RE 264 Calibrate the Tracking Generator Lus ded ied dnce died dei deb oppi cid P ebd ppt 265 CONF SUBEVSLOIB 4 eres do EIEEE EErEE DC EpPEG EN CRPRIC EO EEEO RI ATIE ers qd 266 Configure the Basic Spectrum Analyzer Stale 278 SE BEER ERE SURE Pb erii 266 EEN E EE EE 267 COUP ihe Punchon t Other Sets AER E Arte AE SR EUR GIRO Repos 267 DISPIay SOBSVMENL oo 525454 eed hea eR Sri e Se RR OR RR EE 269 Active Punchon Posli oc biet dek PE EE eels cubed dese see REC RE REO REPE Ee AE 269 Display Viewing EE 269 Date and Time Diplas Format oscersacpwedeREREPCREERESVERGDUDCREG CE CREDERE Aqu 269 Dateand Tune KEE 270 Display Annotabon Dile Dal ii ceue eese RR CERES eR Re kr rede OS 270 Turi the Entre Display CHUTE green 270 Turm the Full Sereen Display ODIT deeg Eege Briet 8 Sasuke edu Reb Pob DER 24l KEE 271 Trace E E e 271 Trace X Axis Scale OIGE 624 hi cre peer EE kide Cr E Sdt dd kre SE iie 271 Display e is 9 5 518 KSEE keR Xe VERE EROR GA aR PERSE LORRY CERE 212 Contents S o E Display Line OVO EE ATA IF Gami Auto Rererence Level Auto Kasgtng EE AA LEER ERR 273 Normalized Relerence Level ia aaog quueputurp 22009 CKEAHDCERO ERR ECKE ARE eS 273 Normalized Reference Level Eet De dote EE EE ORA eR Re OPER 274 Trage Y Axus Amplinide Scalig aeg ueber Red ERRORI HR Arr d Rd 274 Trage Y ns Prequ
112. with CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE DELTa This command is not available if the delta marker is off or in zero span Front Panel Access Marker gt Mkr CF Step Peak Search or Search Meas Tools Mkr CF Set Stop Frequency to the Marker Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET STOP Sets the stop frequency to the value of the active marker frequency In delta marker mode the stop frequency is set to the marker delta value This command is not available in zero span Front Panel Access Marker gt Mkr Stop Marker On Off CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe OFF ON 0 1 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 07 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe Turns the selected marker on or off Front Panel Access Marker Off Marker Table On Off CALCulate MARKer TABLe STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer TABLe STATe Chapter 5 253 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Turns the marker table on or off Front Panel Access Marker Marker Table On Off Marker to Trace CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe lt integer gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe Assigns the specified marker to the designated trace 1 2 or 3 Factory Preset and RST 1 Range 1 to3 Front Panel Access Marker Marker Trace Auto 1 2 3 Marker to Trace Auto CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3
113. xiop ces andes dab vbi enr eR Pico REESE CI dedi es 250 CALCulate MARKer PEAK SEARch MODE PARameterIMAXimum 251 CALC ulate MARKer PEAK THResh ld eampls sisesexaeesexsuneR EERE SERERE ERES GEAR RR ER 251 CALC ulate MARK PEAK LHBesholl uci serch e EC EE E bd Eid FREE 251 CALCulsteMARRer TABLES TATE OFRMONIOU 62 545 es Goberdd cero eehGudehe CCP Eq CE educa dias 254 CALC ulate MAR Ker TABLES DAMS Lii seeded ueber ke d be oe eee EERE HES e a PR ES 433 CALCE MARKE II er EE X Vena V epis epa exiens Ep nS ERI DERE Sd 247 CALCulate MARKer 1 2134 CPEak STATe OFFIONIOM EE EE RR RR RR 246 CAI Culate NMABKeim 1 2IH ICPEak S TAIG T AN sanas doses tene E DE RR CORRI CORRER EE Ee 246 CALCulateAM ARKenTIPISMEPCOUIE EE 247 CAT Culate MARKer 1 253H PCOunt 5 TAIe OPFIONIOM EE Re Remy 247 CALCulate MABReATILISEEECOuBI STATE ee Rae ERES ER EE RER E de EX UR REX de RE SS 247 CALCulate MARKer 1 21314 FUNCtion BPOWerlNOISelOFF 0 0 00 eee rateta 248 CALC Wate E E BE E EE 248 ICALCulate MARKer 1 213 MLA Xamutu i 42a bed eR RE e OEREY ERR CORRER E CERE RE E E RR 248 C ALCulate MAREKemtUI2IE NMLA XmamLBET uuo EEN dE EE E SE EAE cr 248 CALCulate MARKern t 2IENLA XimuneNBXT dee ge EE EA e E EN a eke 249 SE leste MAREemT1I I253 NIA Aur RIGH uua Ra deor ee GR Rab o E bd RE ree Ser d 249 CALCU MAR Ker U2 MINIMUM inae a eS EES Rhee RSE REE OHA xke deed De REESE HE 249 CALCulate MARKer 1 2134 MODE POSitionIDELTaIBANDISPAN
114. 0 TUCO PUL 2 ale d debi Eeer e 300 SENSE SUDEYS Loa gd dE EE EE REESE QUO RUE POR C HER EO RHEE RE ORES 301 Auito tanpe Dwell Bue sucesos er RES CHER REPRE RP da rb RR e gir e pd de 301 SENSE AVERAGE SUDSECHON uus basis xen tevuer hee Ex ee EN ree docu Ke eA RE 302 Clear the EE E 302 Del tne veras COUNT AER rege EE Sees Ed AE pubes Eeer 302 Tura Aeree CIV oos pESQUERRU TERRE ERR REOS RESET AE e 302 Dir upon Ae OMNO oua sooo pct eee Chet d ba qos bane ge Rape 303 Type ot Averaging for Measurements 5 305 6c uer ete RR ARR ORE RACER ESO RE 304 CSENSE BANDwidth SUDSECHOD inia rb Robo Rob CRAS EE RO S E Sb AE 306 Resolution Bandwidth 13422435 e d aci ce b Ce Ree o Vobis d eee b dic opcion 306 Resolinen Band width HEEM era ok RR TREE SEARS EK AR CX E RO e RE E 306 Videp Band widi EE 306 Video Bandwidth Ee 307 Video EE ig WEE 307 Video to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio Mode Select 307 CSENSE CORRechGn SUubSecti li er bb ger EE E eh Ee Ee EREN 309 Delete All tte ide de bs E Ge do ESR RAH eo diei p deg 309 Perera Amplitude E GDODDOL sinc opo RERERUERPSURRENCOIRRSPRRRGOEERSerFEEEDEERqURAS 309 bet Amplitude Correction Dali i5res cbe EE E der iiki 309 Merge Additional Values into the Existing Amplitude Correction Data 310 Delete Amplitude COEN EE 31 Set Amplitude Correction Frequency Interpolation 552 5 nce o RR RR EE RR 311 Person Amplitude Cometh ENEE EE EELER rr Estre ae PEERS ERE 311 Input Impedance DOWecOo equ eod ea eed Fete qiebed i
115. 00 Front Panel Access Sweep Points 334 Chapter 5 NOTE NOTE NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe SWEep Subsection Query Number of Segments SENSe SWEep SEGMent COUNt Returns the number of segments that have been defined in the segmented sweep data This command applies to the following models having firmware revision A 05 00 or later E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B E4407B Factory Preset and RST 0 Range 0 to 32 Set All Segment Data SENSe SWEep SEGMent DATA ALL lt SSTop CSPan gt lt string gt SENSe SWEep SEGMent DATA ALL lt SSTop CSPan gt Specify parameters for all segments of a segmented sweep The data is entered as comma separated ASCII values in sequential order of segments desired Segments will be sorted in order of increasing start frequency If multiple segments have the same start frequency they will appear in order of increasing stop frequency It is possible to define segments that overlap For SSTop the data order used for each segment is start frequency stop frequency resolution bandwidth video bandwidth number of points and sweep time For CSPan the data order used for each segment is center frequency span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth number of points and sweep time This command applies to the following models having firmware revision A 05 00 or later E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B or E4407B Command SENSe SWEep SEGMe
116. 00 RS 232 DTR Control On hardware pacing RS 232 Receive Pacing RS 232 RTS Control None data pacing IBFULL hardware pacing RS 232 Transmit Pacing None data pacing Speaker Volume 0 Time Date Display On Verbose SCPI Off 1 This value may be 75 ohms depending upon the analyzer hardware configuration Accesses the security system to enable licensing for individual options For information on how to use this system see the installation information for individual options in the measurement personalities user s guides 158 Chapter 2 NOTE NOTE Front Panel Key Reference System Local Not all options can be enabled using this system and there is no way to turn off an option through this system Once an option has been licensed for a given analyzer it cannot be transferred to a different analyzer Key Access System More More Option Accesses the Alpha Editor allowing you to enter a three character option number To terminate the entry press Enter or Return An external keyboard may also be used for this entry The option number will appear on the second line of the Option key Key Access System More Licensing License Key Accesses the Alpha Editor allowing you to enter the license key number To terminate the entry press Enter or Return An external keyboard may also be used for this entry The license key number will appear on the second line of the License K
117. 1 m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be 5 be bi au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E CAUTION NOTE Amplitude On Off CAUTION Front Panel Key Reference Source Source Accesses the tracking generator key functions Options DN or 1DQ only Without Option 1DN or 1DQ pressing Source will cause the error message Option not installed to appear on the analyzer display If Auto Align is on the 3 GHz tracking generator will be momentarily retuned to approximately 1 557 GHz between most sweeps Some devices under test for example amplifiers with AGC may be susceptible to damage due to this momentary retuning To avoid this momentary retuning turn the auto align off by pressing System Alignments Auto Align Off Refer to the Specifications Guide for your instrument to learn more information about using the analyzer with Auto Align set to off The output frequency of the 3 GHz tracking generator may not exactly match the input frequency of the spectrum analyzer This is probably not a problem when using wide resolution bandwidths However narrowing the RBW may cause a drop in the displayed signal amplitude as the frequency offset puts the signal out of the center of the RBW filter For narrower RBWs you may need to do a tracking peak to adjust the tracking generator frequency See the Tracking Peak and Man Tracking Adjust Activates On or deactivat
118. 1 For example if bit number 9 and bit number 3 are set to 1 the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 512 plus 8 So the decimal value 520 1s returned The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register The changes may be positive from 0 to 1 or negative from 1 to 0 Send the command STATus QUEStionable NTRansition num negative transition or STATus QUEStionable PTRansition num positive transition where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The Questionable Status event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters Event registers are destructive read only Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register To query the event register send the command STATus QUEStionable EVENt K e ES E 2 Si ys CH K Lg wn Chapter 4 209 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Figure 4 9 Status Questionable Register Diagram Reserved Reserved Reserved POWer Summary Reserved FREQuency Summary CALibration Summary INTregrity Sum Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Always Zero 0 Nn E KI E Ki Sp KI Ei K E 2 E S o QUEStionable Status Condition Register 15 14 13 12 11 10 765 QUEStionable Status EE P
119. 1 2 6e eter EE E RENEE PP EIQUE EQ KNEE CERE QA E RR Hodes ke 278 FORNU TRAS e PAD tases ten seks quic LOOP REO eher debeas eec deba ei dads deed iden 278 FORMat TRACe DATA JASCiilINTeger 32 REAL 321 REAL GOMUIN Tecer IO Lies ouais o E LESE IQE EE EE EE AE 278 SEHR A AE A E E E degen d E beeen EE ERN V Gai ema duh 281 IHICOPVCODEVice TYPE AUTOICUSTIONINONE 4 ccc 6005 deer EELER EE RR RE ER SCR HER EEA 281 COPE Vice PEST Los cue cy Erger vr EERE ERr ERU RE CREEESRRSGREPP da Ge SEE RE gers 281 COP RIMAGE OLa p sSTATs OFPENIDI EE 281 HOOP MACS COLON STARI EE 281 SCHEER eg IMMediate i5 voe Coe ee Ede bcd ea br eb reb e eR dci 282 HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscapelPORTratt A suck e eh RR RR HR ERR RR 282 EELER Serres RREFIERPTRERU ARES RERUE MERI AER ewe Hoe SOTERA 282 IHCOPSVPAGESPERINIS SIMOPeloR ues setzllz edERlr ERR LIE EL eS SR Y PRdORFR Red XAR T REGE EEG 282 EAR 282 HCOPy PAGE SIZE AIBIASIAAILETTerlLEGallEXECutivelLEDGer EE EN e Rh RE REIR 283 HCOPV PAGE SIZE dief ebe eer Ree gek RO d kie Rete oie ob RR Eq RH BUR e CRURA RU cR 283 Ee uu dub Y 98 3c Re CR on EE CUORE RC CER ER CR CREDE 282 INITide Suguer OPEPIONION eier ERR Een IR ERR Ke CR oie eR bcd UR IEEE ERR P oR RS 284 UNCTIO HEART DRM Ldbg dt qui ou eddie bor o One qe Boh ob Pp p dl eR qaos dq ec dp d har up 284 TNT PAUSE 12 osa ee x eR oer e aes redd dq exper TE rd edo ede bed edd dd 285 UNEDate RES Ditt z iae ERE ioe shined de abe eed ped eee adips do e eA Vedi ER Re ee 286
120. 101 Amptd Step Auto Man 133 annotation display 271 Annotation On Off 78 Antenna Correction On Off key 40 antenna amplitude corrections Edit key 41 antenna corrections point Amplitude key 42 applications currently available 290 selecting 113 applications selecting 113 290 291 arrow keys 172 ASCII data format 278 assemblies aligning all 261 attenuation input resetting protection 289 setting 329 tracking generator 343 tracking generator auto on off 344 Attenuation Auto Man 133 Attenuation Auto Man key 38 attenuator tracking generator 133 Auto Align 153 Auto Couple 52 Auto Couple menu map 394 Auto key 126 auto range the EMI detector 319 auto ranging dwell time 301 autoranging function control of 51 Average On Off 61 Average Type Auto Man 57 62 Averaging power averaging RMS 57 62 RMS 57 62 video averaging 57 62 averaging number of averages 302 on off automatic 303 averaging 302 restart 302 smoothing trace data 374 type setting 304 B background alignment 262 backspace key 59 band markers 249 set start frequency 256 set stop frequency 257 start frequency 258 stop frequency 258 Band Pair Start Stop 106 Band Power 107 bandpower marker 248 bandwidth measurement command 238 measurement command NdB results 237 NdB points 237 resolution BW couple to video BW 307 setting 306 resolution BW automatic on off 306 video BW auto on off 307 ratio to resol
121. 2 The first digit in the header 5 represents how many additional digits bytes there are in the header The numbers 12320 indicates 12 thousand 3 hundred 20 data bytes follow the header To determine how may points in the block divide 12320 by your selected data format bytes point Divide by 8 for real 64 or 4 for real 32 In this example there are 1540 points in the block if your selected data format is real 64 Chapter3 NOTE Programming Fundamentals Improving Measurement Speed Improving Measurement Speed There are a number of things you can do in your programs to make them run faster Turn off the display updates on page 183 Use binary data format instead of ASCII on page 184 Minimize the number of GPIB transactions on page 184 Avoid unnecessary use of RST on page 185 Minimize DUT instrument setup changes on page 185 There are additional things you can do to run faster if you are using a measurement personality option i e instrument Modes other than the standard Spectrum Analysis Mode The following applies only to a specific option mode Using an Option Mode Minimize the number of GPIB transactions on page 185 Turn off the display updates DISPlay ENABle OFF turns off the display Updating the display slows down the measurement For remote testing since the computer is processing the data rather than a person there is no need to display the data on the analyzer
122. 2 3 4 X POSition STOP lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STOP Position the right most marker the stop frequency of the designated band type marker pair at the specified trace X position Use CALCulate MARKer MODE BAND to select band markers The query returns the current X position stop frequency of the designated marker Range Refer to the SENSe SWEep POINts command Front Panel Access Marker active marker gt Delta Marker X Axis Readout CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X READout FREQuency TIME ITIMe PERiod CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X READout Selects the units for the x axis readout of the marker Available units are Frequency Time Inverse of time Period z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 07 Factory Preset and RST Frequency Front Panel Access Marker Readout Frequency Marker Readout Time Marker Readout Inverse Time Marker Readout Period Chapter 5 257 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Span Markers Span X Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X SPAN lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X SPAN Change the frequency span of the designated span type marker pair to position the markers at the desired trace X values The value is in the X axis units which is usually frequency or time Use CALCulate MARKer MODE SPAN to selec
123. 355 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the data is cleared Questionable Integrity Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable INTegrity NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register when that bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 0 Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity PTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable INTegrity PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register when that bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable STATus
124. 4 sweep segments 422 deleting all data 337 deleting some data 337 merging data 336 on off 337 parameters 335 query 335 sweep time 142 auto on off 339 stimulus response spectrum analyzer 340 time 339 Sweep Time Auto Man 142 switch trace 1 and 2 164 Swp Coupling SR SA 143 Sync Pos Neg key 170 sync pulse TV 385 synchronization 233 235 syntax of programming commands 178 system configuration commands 361 display 365 hardware query 363 instrument query 364 options query 367 System key 151 System menu map 412 T tab keys 162 talker GPIB 188 terminations in commands 186 test limits maximum 245 pass fail 238 Test On Off 71 test IEEE command 235 throughput improving 183 time display format 269 display on off 270 setting 370 since power on milliseconds 368 since power on seconds 367 Time Marker Readout menu 107 Time Date 153 Time Date On Off 153 Timebase 155 timebase adjust Fine Coarse 155 timebase verification 155 timing control 233 235 Title 76 77 title display 270 trace adding magnitudes 373 averaging type 304 averaging on off 303 blank 377 clear write 163 commands 371 copying 371 data normalize 260 display 271 exchange data 372 format 278 max hold 377 mean of amplitudes 373 min hold 377 mode 377 smoothing number of points 376 smoothing select 374 storing 299 subtraction 376 subtraction of display line 376 transfer
125. 55 load limits 86 load setup files 86 load states 86 load traces 86 log scale 38 Amplitude Y Scale 39 logarithmic scaling 277 LRN IEEE command 232 M Man Track Adj 135 manual using 36 Margin On Off 72 Marker 105 marker selection 105 106 trace selection 107 Marker gt menu map 405 Marker All Off 109 marker control keys 105 marker counter 95 resolution 95 Marker Counter On Off 95 Marker delta to span 110 Marker menu map 404 Marker Noise 109 marker noise 109 Marker Noise On Off 109 marker readout 107 Marker Table On Off 109 marker to center frequency 110 115 Marker to center frequency step 110 marker to reference level 110 115 Marker to start 110 Marker to stop 110 Marker Trace Auto A B C 107 marker tracking 97 markers all off 246 bandpower noise off 248 band type set start frequency 256 set stop frequency 257 start frequency 258 stop frequency 258 center frequency 252 commands 246 continuous peaking on off 246 delta 251 frequency span 252 start 252 step size 253 stop 253 frequency counter automatic resolution on off 247 on off 247 query 247 resolution 246 marker table on off 253 NdB bandwidth command 237 on off 253 peak search define 251 left 248 minimum 249 Index Index next 249 perform 248 right 249 peak definition of 250 peak threshold 251 peak to peak 251 reference level 252 span pair 255 256 span type s
126. 58 GHz ESA E4402B E4403B 80 MHz to 3 10 GHz ESA E4404B 80 MHz to 6 78 GHz ESA E4405B 80 MHz to 13 3 GHz ESA E4407B E4408B 80 MHz to 27 0 GHz Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Channel Center Freq z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 07 Center Frequency Step Size Automatic SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO Specifies whether the step size is set automatically based on the span Factory Preset and RST On 1 10 Hz minimum in log sweep mode Chapter 5 321 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference SENSe FREQuency Subsection Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Channel CF Step Auto Man Center Frequency Step Size SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP INCRement lt freq gt SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP INCRement Specifies the center frequency step size Factory Preset and RST Span 10 Range Maximum negative frequency to the maximum positive frequency listed below ESA E4401 B E4411B 1 58 to 1 58 GHz ESA E4402B E4403B 3 10 to 3 10 GHz ESA E4404B 6 78 to 6 78 GHz ESA E4405B 13 3 to 13 3 GHz ESA E4407B E4408B 27 0 to 27 0 GHz Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Channel CF Step Man Frequency Span SENSe FREQuency SPAN lt freq gt SENSe FREQuency SPAN Set the frequency span Se
127. 7 6 dB The maximum limits are determined by the setting of the first of these two parameters within the boundaries of their individual limits when initially set For example if the reference level is first set to 20 dBm then the reference level offset can be set to values of 307 6 dB to 327 6 dB In the case of a 327 6 dB reference level offset the resultant reference level value changes to 307 6 dBm The reference level value range can be initially set to values from 149 9 to 55 dBm au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D e 276 Chapter 5 Front Panel Access Remote Command Reference DISPlay Subsystem Setting the reference level offset value first yields the following If the reference level offset is first set to 30 dB then the reference level can be set to values of 327 6 to 25 dBm The reference level is clamped at 25 dBm because its positive value of 55 dBm is reached at 25 dBm with an offset of 30 dB Its own positive amplitude limit applies If the reference level offset is first set to 30 dB then the reference level can be set to values of 327 6 to 85 dBm Again the positive amplitude limit of reference level alone is factored in to the resultant combined limit Amplitude Y Scale Ref Level Offst Vertical Axis Scaling DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe SPACing LINear LOGarithmic DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe SPACing Specifies the vertical graticule
128. Avg appears on the left side of the analyzer display if Average is On Key Access Auto Couple Avg Type au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E 58 Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference Bk Sp Backspace Bk Sp Backspace The backspace key is located on the front panel and is used to change or correct an active function entry or a text entry before you save to a file m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be 5 be bi Chapter 2 59 au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Res BW Auto Man NOTE Video BW Auto Man Front Panel Key Reference BW Avg BW Avg Activates the resolution bandwidth function and accesses the menu keys that control the bandwidth functions and averaging Changes the 3 dB resolution bandwidth on the analyzer from 1 kHz to 5 MHz ina 1 3 10 sequence using the knob or step keys If an unavailable bandwidth is entered using the numeric keypad the closest available bandwidth in the 1 3 10 sequence is used For ESA E Series analyses Option 1DR provides additional 300 Hz 200 Hz 100 Hz 30 Hz and 10 Hz bandwidths For firmware revision A 08 00 and later the bandwidth range is from 1 Hz to 5 MHz if you have both Options 1D5 and 1DR For ESA L Series analyses Option 1DR provides additional 300 Hz 200 Hz and 100 Hz bandwidths As the resolution bandwidth is decreased the sweep time is modified to maintain amplitud
129. B E4405B E4407B 338 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference SENSe SWEep Subsection Factory Preset and RST Linear Remarks Refer to the User s Guide for detailed information on the interactions of this command with other functions History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Scale Type Sweep Time SENSe SWEep TIME time SENSe SWEep TIME Specifies the time in which the instrument sweeps the display Factory Preset and RST ESA E4401B E4411 B 4 ms ESA E4402B E4403B 5 ms ESA E4404B 16 75 ms ESA E4405B 33 ms ESA E4407B E4408B 265 ms Range The range depends upon the installed options number of sweep points and firmware revision of your instrument See Sweep Time Range in the Specifications Guide for details Default Unit seconds Remarks A span value of 0 Hz causes the analyzer to enter zero span mode In zero span the X axis represents time rather than frequency In this mode the sweep time may be set to faster values when Options AYX or B7D are installed Front Panel Access Sweep Sweep Time Auto Man Automatic Sweep Time SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO Automatically selects the fastest sweep time for the current settings Factory Preset and RST On Chapter 5 339 Si ge S et oO a S S 5 ge Iz a Si g bi Ki e oO au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2
130. CC PR GREECE 269 Slay Te E EE 269 IDISPlay ANGLE legale 4 cs etes reed Rr aac Fede R rer ac HER PR ER oer e Med I Rd p ab es 269 dE e S cake tee ddewkdeae tere RP ERR IREQUERRE RESI KM ANE R PER REOS REPETI ES 269 DISPlay ANNotation CLOCk DATE FORMat MDYIDMY 0 0 c ec III 269 KK AN Notation LOCEDATE FORMAI cick tedexeobaseniecnddacsecdesaddataedvendaawees 269 21 E a e S Q S E 5 E 5 a an un E S g E Q KE S z List of Commands DISPlay ANNotation CLOCK STATe OFFIONIOIL 2 0 oe ee hn 270 DISPRyiANNowiomCLOCK STATE o vcs ceeds dread ue EPA PIE hed MANS oe RO ddan eRe Y Qd 270 KE E RER EE 270 KK ANNOtaton ITTLeSD KEE 270 OS lac ENA Ble l TUN EE 270 IDISPIaV MEN ENKER LEE 271 DISP MENIS TATE usebqioisichg adeb vod deb qub bor qvo debe oret qaia ebd db qa debe qu 271 DISPlay WINDow ANNotation ALL OPPIONMMON ii cass 6 cer eR Re SIN ENEE EIN EE eee 271 DISP WINDOW ANNo Pion ALLI ioa esee RERG UR Gees SE Se RRE ade deer EE Y 271 DISPlay WINDow TRACe GRATicule GRID STATe OFFIONIOIT lesse 2 DISPlay WINDow TRACe GRATicule GRID STATe lseleeeeeeeeeeeee eh 271 DISPlay WINDowrIRACE XESCALepOPFESet ee dE EE e eb RP REEL HERE VS 271 DISPlay WINDow TRACE E EK RT EE See DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe app A EIER IER RR RE Rx Ge Ree Roe d 212 DBSPlay WINDeaw TRACe Y DLINe STATe OFFIONIOIL REENEN 212 IDESPIA WINDow TRACE ViDLINGS s cei ker Edo
131. DI RES CR ES 311 SENSe CORRection CSET 1 I21314 X SPACing LINearlLOGarithmic 0 0 0 2 e eee eee eee 311 GENSe E CORRectom CSET LIRIAS TATe DEPFIONIOIT ehre MER dE HERE pr R bi ias 311 3ENSSCORRectom SEI SIAR ios 35 sur RR RR TR RE SEET A 311 SENSe CORRection IMPedance INPut MAGNitude number 312 SENSe CORRection IMPedance INPut MA GNi1tude 7 EENS hr Rn 312 SENSeECORRection OPPSed MAGNItde EE EE HR ET GR RE kde DG G eX Pond A pA AN ded 312 SENSeE CORRection OFFSet MAGN tude AEN EELER e RR tept kauneke RU EE ERE RS 312 SENSE DEMaOd AMIEM RE EE EORR ERE ER RR CERE Ree R ER E qno Se ERR ER e 3213 SENSCEDENMOGODEMIGVIADOf EQ ain ceca REX Bw ee a ER dE CORRER Eo 313 GENSeT DEM NM DRVIalDi T i uacua eder REELLE EELER ORE HORE EX b pep ua 313 lok NEIE EE 314 SEN WEI EE S uui deo di e bd deed Ed e Va Rib qp qe esae d ba di rinse d qq 314 SENSe DEM0d STATS OPBHOBNIO ut Regie IR PG Ge RE ER at A SOR OP RAD nd 314 3ENSELDENIIGU EE 314 SENS DEMod TIME Ule iu cc5 ocr AE EA EE RENE REEL AE 315 GENSeEDBEMOSTIMBT 22i rzeegutien repe Rx EE ENEE EE E A ERE 315 SENSe DEMod VIEW STATS OEBIONIDT ENEE EE 0038S TERREA RE PESE EE ES RE eh 315 SENSe DEMod VIEW SS TNXIE T Liegen EE OR RERO ESO PRISER Edere X uade e RUP RR eo 315 SCRE PEM ge EE terea d Pm ET El EE EELER 373 SENSe DE iecton AUTO OPEIONIOLL iiit dep oer Pew CREE EAE EE EAA FERRE E Ad P E Reb 316 GENSebDETestor AUTO AE REEL E
132. Deletes the selected limit line Chapter 5 243 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference CALCulate LLINe Subsection Display the Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DISPlay OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DISPlay Controls the display of the current limit line Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Display Limits Limit 1 2 Limit On Off Test the Data Against the Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 2 FAIL Queries the status of the limit line testing Returns a 0 if the data passes and returns a 1 if there is a failure This query value is valid only if margin or limit test is On Use the command CALCulate LLINe 1 2 STATe OFF ON 0 1to activate limit line testing Set the Margin Size CALCulate LLINe 1 2 MARGin rel ampl CALCulate LLINe 1 2 MARGin Allows you to define the amount of measurement margin that is added to the designated limit line Factory Preset and RST not affected Default Units dB Remarks The margin must be negative for upper limit lines and positive for lower limits Front Panel Access Display Limits Limit 112 Margin On Off Display the Limit Margin CALCulate LLINe 1 2 MARGin STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 MARGin STATe Allows you to display a measurement margin that is added to the designated limit line to do secondary testing of the data 244 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference CALCulat
133. E EE REENEN 316 SENSe E DETector K ANGe IMMledi te i442 ae sx rk doce ERES HER E CR EE CA d bus 319 SENS DETecto RANGE STATS OPPINIOU uiis eek ur RR S RR RE bee REOR ERG Ea Ce e Eh 319 SENSe DE lector RANGES TAIE cs c cccoee teed e unre EAr cee eee hea ERRE ERE E bE Wes Eene ss 319 REN Se DE Techie RENE 319 SENSe DETector FUNCtion NEGativelPOSitiveISAMPlelAVERagelIRMS 0 0 00 e ee ee eee 316 31 E a S e S E 5 E gt Q E un E S g E Q KE S z List of Commands SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI QPEakIAVERagelOFF 0 cee eee een ee 317 SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI VIEW POSitivelEMI seseeeeeee III 318 SENSeE DETectort EUNOC ton EME VIEW iiciaaseszosthsu ERR EREREEEREREETRRERSE FEE RI RE ERES 318 SENSSEDETISctor FUNCHonl EMEN uar RR RRRG HERTES GR EEEn Ed UR EHO RAD RE HOR 317 SENSSEDEIector FUNCH a secet op RE RR REDERE ERARE EREE REE RE E RERE pq pets 316 SENSCEPREDUerncoC PN ier EE 321 LESENSeEPREQuencysC EN fer UPIDOWN EE 421 SENSe FREQuency CENTeCSTEPAUTO OPPIONIOID 1 cece hoes ee dE REIR E ERES 321 SENSeE FREQu ncY CENT STERAUTO EN e EEN RENE RERO RE a 321 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP INCRement reg 322 SENSeEFREQUuencs CENTer S TEPEINCRement LiscoessaccAR RR RR e ERE XY EE RR EIER 322 ESENSeEPERBQuencysC BEN Ter uk eme kb RE ERR RAE RE ERR PI Kee KR S va qute eR dr Rd ERREEN 321 SENSE FREM we y
134. ECCE RR ER RUE RR Eie RR RH CR dee BCR 212 DislIaycwINDOS TR ACO OE DLEINSI hid r quide e qe e Qd eb USE PU dee QE d bebe p Ee Pb edu ps 272 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe NRLevel rel amptz 0 2 0 eee eee ee eee eee 213 I DISPlay WINDoGWw TRACe Y C SCALSENRLGVel T rz uaerkisekbk ta ure EX de Eee eee REY RES 273 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe NRPosition integer isisricrreisisiidrre iritis eee 274 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe NRPosition NEIER ERENNERT EELER TRE IS 274 DISPlay WINDow TRACe YESCALeEPDIVision rel amples e e secos orto Re RR RR em mes 274 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALeJ PDIVision FREQuency 0 0c II 274 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision FREQuency 02s eee eee eee ete n 274 DISPlay WINDOW TRACES SCALE RA KE EE 274 DISPlayc WINDow TRACE SC Lekt Vel sampl gt 5 02 covets EIERE EE URES RE 275 DISPlay WINDow TRACe YESCALe RLEVel OFFSet rel ampl i c06ccccovseod ecce ero ek y 276 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet 0 0 0 ce cee eee eee eens 276 I DISBlay WINDS TRACE Y SCALS RUB Vel y isses crane hehe SASTRY RRESE READE CORE RRL ROSES RES 275 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe SPACing LINearlLOGarithmic 0 0 00 00000005 217 DESPlayc WINDow TRAC Y ESLCALeESPACIDET eis edet ek RS Eh ISP RR PER canes REOS aston Rd 277 22 List of Commandes FORMatCBORDer NORMalISWAPped ERER eee oO EE EEN EEN A EIER CIERRE SERRE NEE A 278 FORMo BORD
135. EE EE ENEE TEE EE A 343 SE crono Sveeg ized disk wp LES ied ideo STEEP EI EE tobbd edis Qs ad en perdre 231 190 rc 231 i EE 234 doni rm 231 e Le pii prot ee ee ee ee be x bita ne d iP E I pb a EE I EE ER qd pP al ESR abo d d eee Pee te Eeer ehre is 232 PDN serpari re ee ee ee EE 232 ERN Loses ier e eR HR NERO S POLI EDU REN oed EE 232 TUO eege ER eel Maske Pease EE EE EREMO Epod eb equi 233 5 Dn T 233 ECT Sees ee eiie TEE d Rp PI ORI PR be pns ddp ies quei d e ep rade 233 uoc e H ROES 234 u cj ee er ee ee ee ee ee 234 EUIS neces P SRUE MEM ERES UE SRS ET SSRI Seder eque E RW Enea A eee eke sete ee ce ee eee ee 234 PT SPOON Pr rrr 234 ORE ote ee dh qao ee eeh he E ere v d due d ee ere let 235 uj eU 235 e RE 239 pili ir P n esr EM 235 MUS KEE 235 TAE ON EE EE E e pA bid a led AS ee ake ele as Ani dai aed Bs am dee ad ocd ET 235 PBR T Rm 236 X ALUUlSIEBWIDINIBANDWIIIEINDB rel amps pxn beber ider CRY RES erue m RR CRY 237 CALEB WIDIBIBANDNWIGUUNDB i ua doce doo debes CORRER Oe Ux PY ER REN OP E RE 237 CAT CnlapeHEVELDRRIB S ND Wie PSU 4d FECERIS HERE ERE EP E CRESCE R GEH RP CCP ES 237 CAT CnDlateHEVOLDRERIB A NDS E EE EE 237 CALCulate BWIDthIBANDwidth STATe OFFIONION 2 RII 238 SALUlate BWIDIhIBANDVidth S TATe 7 dE RE ER dE REEL EELER EE ie ee ER 238 SCALA Osten LIM FAIL EE EE E or GAY AE E
136. ENSe DEMod VIEW STATe OFF ON O 1 SENSe DEMod VIEW STATe This command is only available if FM demodulation is selected It causes the demodulated signal to be displayed with the y axis scale in units of KHz Use DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision FREQuency to set scale div If FM Demod is on then several functions are not available These include Log Lin display is always in linear Y Axis Units Marker Search functions Normalize Display Line Peak Excursion and Peak Threshold These functions are not affected when AM demodulation is selected Factory Preset z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 and RST Off Remarks This command is not available when Demod is set to Off History Added with firmware revision A 14 00 Front Panel Access Det Demod Demod FM Demod View Chapter 5 315 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference SENSe DETector Subsection SENSe DETector Subsection Automatic Detection Type Selected SENSe DETector AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe DETector AUTO Switches automatically to the optimum detection type for typical measurements using the current instrument settings The detector type is average if any of these are on Noise marker Band power markers e Trace averaging when the Average Type is Power RMS The detector type is sample if any of the following conditions are tr
137. EREERE Libration Negative 15 14 13 12111098765 43 2 1 Ti Fil QUEStionable Status EEEEEZZIZIZZZIZI CALib Event Hocicter 15 14 18 12 1110987654321 0 14 13 12 311009 87 65 4 3 2 1 CALibration Status BEER 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Enable Register To Questionable Status Register Bit 8 cl78a 218 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Calibration Condition Register are given in the following table Bit Decimal Description Value 0 0 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 1 2 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 2 4 TG Align Failure A in this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the tracking generator TG RH 3 8 RF Align Failure A in this bit position indicates that a E failure has occurred while trying to align the RF section zi oO ge 4 16 IF Align Failure A lin this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the IF section d 5 32 LO Align Failure A in this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the local oscillator LO 6 64 ADC Align Failure A in this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the a
138. EUERNE DEB us credence edd EE dee Fe deb p R debit debant dobpaas deban koe d ieb piis dol 335 Merge Data With Segmented Sweep Data NEEN RENERT EE EE E EYE koctas 336 Delete All Segmestod Sweep Data 2iiocckasc Ee oie ki E RE REU RE donde EES 337 Delete Some Segmented Sweep Dala d eet eer eher RO SOR Sek REES EE 337 Turs Om Semented SWEEP EELER STEE EE EN Ae 337 bet Prequency Doman Scale Type 1224 boe EE eR TERI VE VER HIRED ERR 338 BWP DIS pepini Eg EY 43 PT CX ROC e PARE deae eel e pb cb dequo ae do 339 Automate Sweep KEE 339 weep In Mode ege ek I CR tin ee ee hs Ee E 340 Time Gating Delay Option IDO OMY ENEE AR E karen ber EA rRERICREA WERE STE 340 Time Gate Length Ophion IDE ONIYI ere er QUERER RE PS 340 Turne Gate Level Option T6 Only oo sin cocker che e RRERIRRESCERMERCREE GA EKR UEEA 341 Time Gate Polarity Opnon IDG Onbrk An eg bilo VELA FERE ER EH ERE deo b deis 341 Preset Time Gate Option ID6 Only s iii ce sese eek cent ye RR CR ROC S ROPA RR 341 Control Time Gate Option 1D6 Only iis deste ereecbrRedpbneeerkREpSeke Rabe d ini 342 Tune Gate Trigger Type Option IDG Only de ewcekkeeeh eee RR ERR 342 SOLDBOS SUES eer cece eC De prRIERUER SUC RANCHESIURE HP PERS I ERE R 343 Sets the Output Post Offset CoYFEGEPOD EE 343 DOUICe ANEM 2 orbebescieteosc eseei OE CERO o ORERE RE RE RS EpEN RS ACRES 343 EE occ chucks See Wee Ree ede Reba eRe 344 Seis the Output POWBE Luise e ur bee eRe beg die PELE Oe PUES RP RECS 344 Sets the Source Output
139. FCOunt RESolution AUTO OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt RESolution AUTO Sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter so it is automatically coupled to the frequency span generating the fastest accurate count Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access Freq Count Resolution Auto Man Frequency Counter Marker CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FCOunt STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FCOunt STATe Turns on or off the marker frequency counter To query the frequency counter use CALCulate MARKer 1 FCOunt X If the specified marker number is not the active marker it becomes the active marker If the specified marker number is not on it is turned on and becomes the active marker Once the marker count is on it is on for any active marker not just for the one used in the command A 1 is returned only if marker count is on and the selected number is the active marker Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks If a frequency count x value is generated when the frequency count state 1s off then 9e15 is returned Front Panel Access Freq Count Marker Count On Off Frequency Counter Marker Query CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FCOunt X Queries the marker frequency counter Remarks If a frequency count x value is generated when the frequency count state 1s off then 9e15 is returned Chapter 5 247 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D oO au 9 E D
140. FF ON 0 1 CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth STATe Controls the bandwidth measurement function The function measures the bandwidth at the number of dB down specified in CALCulate BWIDth NDB of the maximum signal on the display Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks When this command is turned on the bandwidth measurement function N dB Points is associated with the active marker If no marker is active at the time this command is turned on marker 1 becomes the active marker and a peak search is performed No restrictions exist for moving the bandwidth measurement function markers to any other signal on the display However when this function is turned on all other concurrent marker functions are suspended Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search N dB Points On Off Test Current Trace Data Against all Limit Lines CALCulate CLIMits FAIL Queries the status of the limit line testing Returns a 0 if the trace data passes when compared with all the current limit lines Returns a 1 if the trace data fails any limit line test 238 Chapter5 NOTE NOTE Remote Command Reference CALCulate LLINe Subsection CALCulate LLINe Subsection Limit lines can be defined for your measurement You can then have the instrument compare the data to your defined limits and indicate a pass fail condition Refer also to MMEMory and TRACe subsystems for more trace and limit line commands Delete All Limit Lines i
141. GHz tracking generator Front Panel Access Source Man Track Adj Output Power Tracking Peak SOURCe POWer TRCKing PEAK Automatically adjusts the tracking of the source output with the spectrum analyzer Chapter 5 347 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 07 Remote Command Reference SOURce Subsystem sweep so that the power is maximized for the present resolution bandwidth Remarks This command is not applicable for the 1 5 GHz tracking generator Front Panel Access Source Tracking Peak 2 9 E D E E E EI ki E Q 2 E EI 348 Chapter 5 NOTE NOTE NOTE Remote Command Reference STATus Subsystem STATus Subsystem The STATus subsystem controls the SCPI defined status reporting structures Operation Condition Query STATus OPERation CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Status Operation Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Operation Enable STATus OPERation ENABle lt integer gt STATus OPERation ENABle This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition Register will set bits in the Operation Event register which also sets the Operation Status Summary bit bit 7 in the Status Byte Register The variable lt integer gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want
142. GMem KC Lue uade Rex dk eR Ie dbR Reb Seek RR ARRIERE RE Reed ipei 337 SENSe SWEep SPACing Liest OGarithnie iocos NEEN NEEN EEN REN SEENEN E iets inesi ote SENS Ss Weep shat ing LINGHILOM EE 288 SENSe SWEep SPACine LINeaiLOU ambi issus eaae ax EUR Whew RHA ER OE Ru eed See 338 SEN SS ESAVEEDISPACINE welche reek se Cee EE Wha Er 338 Sr NSe bo E EE 339 SENSe S WEBep LIME AUTO OFFIONIDI iis ccdch vets eves kd ee RR S RERO PE RACER oe E e air 330 SENSe S WEep TIME AUTO MODE SRESponselSANalyzer lessen 340 3ENSe S ebe TIME AUTOIMODE EELER E EEN RE Ee ERY REESE RR SS 340 ESENS E ONES TIME AU T oed dch dario pi ep dU E bb E bae or ebrei d aE e eb ques 339 33 E a S e S E 5 E gt Q E un E S g E Q KE S z List of Commands ESENSeESWEep LHME GATE DELay SOMES EEN EE EE AER ORR REE dos 340 SENS SWEep TIME GATE DELAY dE deena give bb AE EE Ed ORR rd e duda 340 ESENSeE SWBep TIMBIGATE LBNCOR Ie Ae esed RR RR CRI ICA UR EE eR Ree 340 PSENSe SWEep TIME GATE LENGI 64 0005 26549 co RR E hs IER OR d EE SR es 341 E SEN58 SW Bep TINIE GATE LE Vel HIGHILOW EIERE GOD RR CRM RE ENEE E d 341 ESENSel SWEA LHMEECGATEILEVST EE 341 ESENSe SWEepzTIME GATE POLanty NEGativelPOSIIVE ae EIERE eS LE RE RS RITE 341 SENSe SW Rep TIME GATE POLANY 4 sueta dues e RR EORR GERA RR VA RR E d po 341 ESENSe SW Rep TIME GATE PRES ER duret geck SEES PERSE DESERET Ree Do eRe es 341 ESE
143. Gain Auto Chapter 2 121 m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q au 9 E D Pa E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Front Panel Key Reference Preset Factory Preset Conditions Continued Input Coupling E4402B amp E4407B with Option UKB E4404B and E4405B AC Int Preamp off Limit line testing off Log scale Amplitude 10 dB division Marker count off Marker counter resolution auto coupled Markers off Max Mixer level 10 dBm Measure Meas Off Radio Std None Reference level 0 dBm in power on units Reference level offset 0 dB Reference level position top 10th graticule Resolution bandwidth 3 MHz auto coupled Span E4401B and E4411B 1 5 GHz E4402B and E4403B 3 0 GHz E4404B 6 7 GHz E4405B 13 2 GHz E4407B and E4408B 26 5 GHz Speaker Off SRQ mask 40 Start Frequency 0 Hz Stop Frequency E4401B and E4411B 1 5 GHz E4402B and E4403B 3 0 GHz E4404B 6 7 GHz E4405B 13 2 GHz E4407B and E4408B 26 5 GHz State Registers unaffected 122 Chapter 2 Front Panel Key Reference Preset Table 2 2 Factory Preset Conditions Continued Segmented Sweep off Sweep Points continuous Sweep Time E4401B and E4411B E4402B and E4403B E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B 4 ms auto coupled 5 ms auto coupled 16 75 ms auto coupled 33 ms auto coupled 265 ms
144. HU 231 irc Pra T PT 231 standart Event opta BNE iode nba e RO Ca raa Fre rii EE 231 Standard Event Status Register QUEE iocoreospprRemOREPIEERPQGUERDE RR EE ES ECES ET ks 232 oae I EE E E A E a T E T E 232 Instrument State QDEEV ER RER ATE Ee ADERARE EE A 232 Operor COMPE Ee EE e AAA 233 Overy Instrument OPONE 3 2 de uec REDE X OPER RH RE UR RR SCR ORDA EEO SD 233 LEE 233 o P mmm 234 DATO I dex EE EEN om eq L E Eds pdt E eee br wg al pde 234 Service Beguest Enable sioiiss epe EPI ROLE RELEASE REA OILS CHEESE ERE dE RO 235 Read Status BVIE QUEIY EE vert ver Geta queda pee dei e ved A 233 iis EE 235 NE IS II T IP 235 WOOL AUS po onc CaaS a HS EE Ree eee REO REDI RO RE sade whee neds MES 235 AUTORE OUPS EM 4 be tei qb br eee be eq edes idee q etae deba qo deb d edd ies 236 Lin e 236 CALS ate SUBS VSI o2 EE EE EE IRE EX PLC CER RE 227 E eed eeh e 3 res queso eie eee a e duce e M Rae diese a ipd p Pa 237 MORS EE 237 ee 238 Test Current Trace Data Against all Limit Lines ee sse RR RR ro 238 CALCUlate LLINS SUDSeCEO cud be ox poe heen ba EUR EA 239 Delete All Limit Lines in Memoty ed EE ce RR ee RT RERO p REO eR 239 Control Limit Line Amplitude Interpolation 0 0 0 cece eee 239 Contents S o E Set Fined OF Relative Limit Lanse gis oboe shoes EE E E ET A Se 239 Set Limit Lise X axis DS hardpan EE ER RUE ERR be ERA ep RV A RU UE qu
145. IGH LOW SENSe SWEep TIME GATE LEVel1 Selects the level of the gate signal this command is for LEVel triggering only Factory Preset and RST High Front Panel Access Sweep Gate Setup Level Setup Time Gate Polarity Option 1D6 Only SENSe SWEep TIME GATE POLarity NEGative POSitive SENSe SWEep TIME GATE POLarity Selects the polarity of the gate signal this command is for EDGE triggering only Factory Preset and RST Positive Front Panel Access Sweep Gate Edge Gate Slope Pos Neg Preset Time Gate Option 1D6 Only SENSe SWEep TIME GATE PRESet Presets the time gated spectrum analysis capability Remarks This command resets gate parameters to default values Gate trigger type edge Chapter 5 341 Si ge S et oO a S S E E Ki a Si g bi 2 Iz e oO au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe SWEep Subsection Gate polarity positive Gate delay 1 us Gate length 1 us Gate level high Control Time Gate Option 1D6 Only SENSe SWEep TIME GATE STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SWEep TIME GATE STATe Turns time gating on or off Time gate cannot be turned on if external trigger delay is on Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Sweep Gate Gate On Off Time Gate Trigger Type Option 1D6 Only SENSe SWEep TIME GATE TYPE LEVel EDGE
146. MI average detector averages the peak detected amplitude When EMI average detection is selected the analyzer is forced to linear amplitude display using sample detection Key Access Det Demod EMI Detector Turning EMI detectors off restores the amplitude reference level and scale type logarithmic or linear that was used prior to the selection of either the quasi peak or average detector It also turns off any special ranging and grays out the View and QP Avg Gain keys Key Access Det Demod EMI Detector Chapter2 Demod View QP Avg Gain Range Dwell Front Panel Key Reference Det Demod Selects between peak detection and quasi peak EMI average detection without changing the ranging which adjusts the reference level This allows you to use peak detection while maintaining the current EMI measurement view settings This function is not available unless you have selected either Quasi Peak or EMI Average When Pk is selected the peak detector is used and the quasi peak and EMI average detectors are bypassed When QP Avg is selected the quasi peak or EMI average detector is used and the analyzer is forced to linear amplitude detection mode using sample detection Key Access Det Demod EMI Detector Turns on or off the linear x10 gain stage in the quasi peak and average detector signal path This stage may be enabled disabled whenever the quasi peak or EMI average detector is first selected Key Access Det Demod EMI
147. MPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Correction On Off Amplitude Allows you to enter the amplitude value for the current amplitude correction point After selecting a point the point number automatically increments and Frequency becomes active to allow entry of the frequency of the next point Press Bk Sp to correct errors Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Other Edit Delete Point Allows you to delete the amplitude correction data for the currently selected point The prompt If you are sure press key again to delete will appear on the display Pressing Delete Point again will delete the point and adjust all of the point numbers as appropriate Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Other Edit Allows you to clear all data from the selected amplitude correction set The prompt If you are sure press key again to delete will appear on the display Pressing Delete again will delete the correction set Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Other Turns the amplitude correction function on or off for the selected set The corrections state must be set to On for the correction to be S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q 47 Front Panel Key Reference AMPLITUDE Y Scale applied Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections User NOTE Antenna Cable and Other correction factors are generally entered as positive values This indi
148. NCtion EMI Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks This command is only available with Option AYQ installed Front Panel Access Det Demod EMI Detector Input Attenuation SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation rel ampl gt SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation Set the input attenuator This value is set at its auto value if input attenuation is set to auto Factory Preset and RST 10 dB Range ESA E4401 B E4411B 0 to 60 dB ESA E4402B E4403B E4404B E4405B 0 to 75 dB ESA E4407B E4408B 0 to 65 dB Default Unit dB Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Attenuation Auto Man Input Port Attenuator Auto SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation AUTO Select the input port attenuator range to be set either automatically or manually Chapter 5 329 Si ge S et oO a S S 5 ge Iz a Si amp bi D e oO au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference SENSe POWer Subsection On Input attenuation is automatically set as determined by the Reference Level Setting Off Input attenuation is manually set Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Attenuation Input Port Power Gain SENSe POWer RF GAIN STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe PONer RF GAIN STATe Turns the internal preamp on or off Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks This command is onl
149. NEIERENS AER EE RR RR 378 External Ingser Line and TV Trigger Delay Enable usb bd E CREE HORE nre 378 Exierual TOESer SOP os owes e qe ye ep resp Ss EESUCER HURTS E 378 TERRE OSE onse eth Ee doce E EEE R EER id da Pd E Rab RE PIE E Ia 379 T bser OLISe EE 380 RP Durst Prequedcy ZEHREN Ee Rod S CEU RR CR E Qo eR Up ERAS 380 RF Burst Absolute Mode Serbie Ae R ier geet Erde ee dree dE EE 380 RP Burst Relative Mode Setting ictus bx exchESAT RESURRESIRENGaRRESerkxsSPERq REA 381 EP Burst Mole elige bre ebe cc eh A EE E e 381 RF Burst Narrow Pulse DISCPIBAQOLU 4155 aere Rr Ru eR VOR RR RR RR e 382 Teger EE 382 15 2 E KI E E o KE EI S E Contents set IV Field Mode RE EE PRATER Y PREPARAR YER TIRE 383 Set TV Line Number for Synchronization iius EE ES Giada hese EE pipe vp bp 384 oet Analyzer tor TY Picture MODITOUIBE ERENNERT REES EE E ex 384 set the Video Waveform Sync Pulse Direction 28 Ae tpe hr S ERR RE Rd bg Re he 385 aeleoct TV Signal Pall 8 E y eere pue b exui d e aper See REDE dd 385 Select TV SIDE EE 385 Video Trigger Level Amplitude 2 kee BE r here Rx RORIS E RR d det RR CR Sie 386 Video Tusser Level Prequency CoesckeberkRRReRQ 9A RERTEOREderRxR E Reqerkedckieqqe 387 IR WE EE 388 select Power Units of ViGisWiGs o csccer s rra EE QS E EEN ES E 388 6 Menu Maps What You Will Pind in Tras CRAaptet ue 390 fpr AMO MONG dice ordei apicem pied eb aide ibt qiie bid p quida ped dated denpqicipe
150. NSe S WERep TIME GATE TYPE LEVelBDGE cc cccxcdacneucee trekt TCE eee RREXGREERIEA RES 342 SENS SWEep TIME GATE TYPE oi isis he eel Ro REE GSREE SERRA SHEASR HES a EO RRER ERO ERE 342 PSENSelS ep IME GATE STATe SCHEIER dE ER e 342 ESENSeE SWESpETIME GATB ESTAITS uere rh UR Ce EE REESEN 342 SENSeESWESEDIIMET 1i siasssiena uk kitt rR ERROR ROO ER E DER e ERR Re REO RR EUER Vae ed 339 34 1 Using This Document 35 C g 5 ge 5 Si E 6 E S c 5 Las Using This Document What is in This Book What is in This Book There are many terms used throughout this book for example active function block that are explained in detail in the Getting Started guide It is recommended that you review the Getting Started guide first NOTE The front and rear panel features along with the numeric keypad and alpha numeric softkey fundamentals are described in your Getting Started guide Book Organization Front Panel Key Reference provides information about the front panel and lower level key functions of your analyzer This information is organized alphabetically by the front panel key name Volume 2 includes the front panel key reference information for all the functions associated with the one button measurements available when you press the front panel MEASURE key It also describes all the setup keys associated with each measurement Programming Fundamentals provides information on SCPI C
151. Negative 15 14 13 12 131 109 87 65 4 3 2 1 O Transition Filter E Y V V Y 3 3 3 33 33333 Quency Event Register LIII ee L KK ZE ee ee H questionablestatus 11 1 ven Enable Register 15 1413 12 111098765 4 To Questionable Status Register Bit 5 cb910a Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Frequency Condition Register are given in the following table Chapter 4 215 Ka Di D E Ki On E EI Ka E 2 Ki S Ke Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description Value 0 0 Source Synth Unlocked A 1 in this bit position indicates that the synthesizer in the source tracking generator is unlocked 1 2 Freq Ref Unlocked A in this bit position indicates that the analyzer frequency reference is unlocked 2 4 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 3 8 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 4 16 Synth Unlocked A lin this bit position indicates that the analyzer synthesizer is unlocked 5 32 Invalid Span or BW A in this bit position indicates an invalid span or bandwidth during frequency count 6 64 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 7 128 Reserved This bit is not used by the
152. Negative Peak not Average then average type is Video Average See Figure 5 1 which shows these auto rules for average type in flowchart format Auto Rules for Average Type Auto Rules for Average Type Is Y Axis Scale Hz Demod View Yes Type 7 Video z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 07 Is Detector Average Yes Type Power No Type Video cl79a Chapter 5 303 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe AVERage Subsection Factory Preset and RST On History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access BW Avg Avg Type Auto Man Type of Averaging for Measurements SENSe AVERage TYPE VIDeo RMS SENSe AVERage TYPE Successive measurements of data can be combined to average out measurement variations Detector is set to average and Avg type is set to power RMS to measure RMS voltage avg power As a best practice set amplitude scale DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC prior to average type VIDeo logarithmically averages the power of the video data typical units are dBm This command is equivalent to pressing front panel keys BW Avg Avg Type Video RMS averages the linear power of successive measurements typical units are watts The following parameters of this command are supported but not recommended for new designs They are provided for limited compatibi
153. On is selected the trigger occurs on the signal after the resolution bandwidth filter Key Access Trig More RF Burst Setup Turns the narrow pulse discriminator on or off For modulation formats that have undesirable envelope ripple Narrow Pulse Discriminator On allows you to prevent re triggering on the ripple Key Access Trig More RF Burst Setup 171 m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be 5 be bi Front Panel Key Reference ft UP and U DOWN Arrow Keys f UP and U DOWN Arrow Keys The ff UP and U DOWN arrow keys can be used to adjust the analyzer parameters incrementally The arrow keys are also used to select between files or points on a list These keys are also called step keys ai 9 E D E E E EI Pa Em A E D Ba A 5 e 172 Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference Viewing Angle Viewing Angle Controls the optimum viewing angle of the display The viewing angle keys are located next to each other at the upper left hand corner of the analyzer bordering the display These two keys allow you to adjust the intensity of the objects on the display so that it can be optimally viewed from different angles The Viewing Angle keys automatically repeat when they are held down m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be e 5 be bi Chapter 2 173 Front Panel Key Reference Zoom Zoom Allows you to switch between the split screen
154. PIB programming They are understood by all instruments in the network When combined with the programming language codes they provide all management and data communication instructions for the system Refer to the programming language manual and your computers I O programming manual for more information The seven fundamental command functions are as follows e An abort function that stops all listener talker activity on the interface bus and prepares all instruments to receive a new command from the controller Typically this is an initialization command used to place the bus in a known starting condition sometimes called abort abortio reset halt e A remote function that causes an instrument to change from local control to remote control In remote control the front panel keys are disabled except for the Local key and the line power switch sometimes called remote resume A local lockout function that can be used with the remote function to disable the front panel Local key With the Local key disabled only the controller or a hard reset by the line power switch can restore local control sometimes called local 188 Chapter3 Programming Fundamentals Overview of GPIB Option A4H A local function that is the complement to the remote command causing an instrument to return to local control with a fully enabled front panel sometimes called local resume Aclear function that causes all GPIB instruments or a
155. Pan gt lt string gt Merges the data to the segmented sweep data Segments will be sorted in order of increasing start frequency If multiple segments have the same start frequency they will appear in order of increasing stop frequency It is possible to define segments that overlap For SSTop the data order used for each segment is start frequency stop frequency resolution bandwidth video bandwidth number of points and sweep time For CSPan the data order used for each segment is center frequency span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth number of points and sweep time This command applies to the following models having firmware revision A 05 00 or later E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B E4407B Example SENSe SWEep SEGMent DATA MERGe CSPan 150e06 5e6 1e5 1e5 101 050 110e06 5 e6 1e5 1e5 100 05 This example merges two segments into the segmented sweep table The first segment has a center frequency of 150 MHz and the second segment has a center frequency of 110 MHz Range The range depends upon the model number installed options and firmware revision of your instrument see the Specifications Guide for details The ranges that apply to all instrument models 336 Chapter5 NOTE NOTE NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe SWEep Subsection that can be controlled with this command are resolution bandwidth video bandwidth and number of points Resolution Bandwidth 1 kHz to
156. Panel Access Peak Search or Search Next Pk Left 248 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Marker Next Peak Maximum Search CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum NEXT Places the selected marker on the next highest signal peak from the current marked peak Remarks The marker will be placed at the highest peak that rises and falls by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold If no peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria a No Peak Found error 202 is given Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Next Peak Marker Peak Maximum Right Search CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum RIGHt Places the selected marker on the next highest signal peak to the right of the current marked peak Remarks The marker will be placed at the highest peak that rises and falls by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold If no peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria a No Peak Found error 202 is given Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Next Pk Right Marker Peak Minimum Search CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MINimum Places the selected marker on the lowest point on the trace that is assigned to that particular marker number Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Min Search Marker Mode CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE POSition DELTa BAND SPAN CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE Selects the type of markers that you want to activat
157. Persistent means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access Display Limits Limit 1 2 Freq Interp Log Lin Si ge S et oO a S S 5 ge Iz a Si g bi 2 Iz e oO Define Limit Line Values CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DATA x axis ampl connected x axis ampl connected CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DATA Defines limit line values and destroys all existing data Up to 200 points may be defined for each limit No units are allowed e x axis can be frequency or time values as specified by CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain Frequencies are always in Hz Chapter 5 241 Remote Command Reference CALCulate LLINe Subsection Time is always in seconds No unit is allowed in this parameter e ampl amplitude values are in the current Y axis units Up to two amplitude values can be provided for each x axis value by repeating x axis in the data list No unit is allowed in this parameter connected connected values are either 0 or 1 A 1 means this point should be connected to the previously defined point to define the limit line A 0 means that it is a point of discontinuity and is not connected to the preceding point The connected value is ignored for the first point Example CALC LLIN1 DATA 1000000000 20 0 200000000 30 1 Range x axis 30 Gs to 30 Gs for time limits x axis 30 GHz to 350 GHz for frequ
158. RST 0 Range integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Power Condition STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Power Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Questionable Power Enable STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle integer STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle gt This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Power Event register which also sets the Power Summary bit bit 3 in the Questionable Register The variable lt integer gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range integer 0 to 32767 358 Chapter5 NOTE Remote Command Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Power Event Query STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Power Event register The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the data is cleared Questionable Power Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition This command determines which bits in t
159. Ration condition register continuously monitors the hardware and firmware status of the analyzer and is read only To query the register send the STATus OPERation CONDition command The response will be the decimal sum of the bits that are set to 1 For example if bit number Chapter 4 207 Ka z D E Ki On E EI Ka E 2 Ki S Ke Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions 9 and bit number 3 are set to 1 the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 512 plus 8 So the decimal value 520 is returned The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register The changes may be positive from 0 to 1 or negative from 1 to 0 Send the STATus OPERation NTRansition num negative transition command or the STATus OPERation PTRansition num positive transition command where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The STATus OPERation event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters Event registers are destructive read only data Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register To query the event register send the STATus OPERation EVENt command The STATus OPERation event enable register lets you choose the bits that will set the operation status summary bit bit 7 of the
160. Re EX EFE P EEES ERS 330 CH EE e Ey TEE 349 StU DRESS pir ERLEBEN UE ERIT E qoe pr E bp pe PEDI Ed eq bc pq eq 350 STATus QOUESBmonable C A Libration CONDIHON 4 9 AEN ENEE EEN EELER CERE RA E 351 STATus QUEStionable CAL ibrationENABle tege AN EE ce ee EE EEN esce y ER RR orev 351 ArATDusSOUbStmosablet ALibration BNADIS A a daer EE EE EE EE Sek ges A 351 STATus QUEStionable CALibration NTRansition integer lleeeeeeeeeeeee es 332 STATus QUEStonable CALibration NTRansition sisoseue s eoo rh SEELEN EELER EE NEE 352 25 E a e S Q S E 5 E 5 a an un E S g E Q KE S z List of Commands STATus QUEStionable CALibration PTRansition integer 0 cece cece 332 SLADWs OUEStonable c AT abr tion PTEansition ANERE EE EE ERE AERA 352 STATus OUEStotsable C ALibration EVENT EEN E ER EE EE oru RR ER EEN EE E RES 351 SIA MS OVESHONA BE CONDO codecs eases pH RR EORR dE E OR EGRE Y Sep RAP RR es 352 STATUS OUES HOMINIS BNA Ble lt NE sareret ereo EELER E RR EEIEIEE Rer 353 SUA sR inlet NA Ble i ie E eb Iis d debt cL i RH EE RE ERE MES 354 STA Tus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDITION A cb EELER dock POORRSRORRRE A Y C bue de ds 353 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle integers esce es eee e x Ya eee Y Eos 354 STATus QUESDonable FREQuency ENABlIe Aug RER eh ue ua ce ER CORRER VAR Yu rd ae 354 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition integer 0 cee eee hen 354 STATus
161. Readout 107 real number data format 278 real time clock set date 153 set time 153 recall IEEE command 233 Ref Level key AMPLITUDE Y Scale 38 Ref Lvl Offst key 39 reference calibration control 264 level normalized 273 offset 276 position normalized 274 y axis amplitude 275 reference level 38 reference level offset 39 registers event enable definition 195 event definition 195 negative transition definition 195 positive transition definition 195 questionable condition 351 service request enable description 202 status byte description 201 relative limit line type 76 Remote Port 155 Rename 91 rename correction files 91 rename limits 91 rename screen files 91 rename setup files 91 rename states 91 rename traces 91 Res BW Auto Man 60 reset IEEE command 234 Resolution Auto Man 95 resolution bandwidth 60 automatic on off 306 ratio auto manual 307 ratio to video BW 307 value 306 resolution of marker counter 95 Restart 112 Restart front panel key 128 Restart key 128 Index Index Restore Sys Defaults 157 Return key 129 reverse the display color 297 RF alignment on off 261 calibration 264 overload reset 289 RF burst absolute trigger level 380 narrow pulse discriminator trigger 382 relative trigger level 381 trigger level 381 RS 232 bus baud rate 190 character format parameters 190 data transfer errors 191 handshake 190 modem handshaking 191 ove
162. Register will set bits in the Questionable Frequency Event register which also sets the Frequency Summary bit bit 5 in the Questionable Register The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Frequency Event Query STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Frequency Event register The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the data is cleared Questionable Frequency Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Frequency Event register when that bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 0 Range Integer 0 to 32767 354 Chapter 5 NOTE Remote Command Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Frequency Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRans
163. SPAN SIG iurare o ROC SCER ROGER RCH NOE ee A oed oA CR REOR A eX Rd 322 D SENSeEFREOUemo SPAN FULL 4 425 x xe 104 HOSE PANIER ER GU PER A CR RACK RR E Rd 3423 LSEISEEFRILuenGS SPAN PREVIOUS Ja pd eap pb p Ep Exo Y A ROGER CR CR RC LC E qd AN 323 Best dua dm mer t p lt i jcclietuuketeduanuchese sien wened Ure 322 LSENS6e FRE Quenec VS TARTS Meg 604 de hoo pleb bed v eR AREE eR pee veia qe d Vire dedo apis 323 PSENSeEPREOWSICY E sicko ace ce teeth eee XU Rx eee eR de quede dut vae 323 ei uen STOP Set EE 324 LESENSCEPREQUenCS KREE 324 SENSeEPREDUenci S Y NT Bhesis IDE e EE Ee ERGO YR REY KR RAO CR HE UE EA 325 LSENSe FREQuency SYNThesis AUTO OFPIONIOUL e AEN REENEN REENEN ENN ELE EE ti 325 PSENSeEFREOQvency S Y NT eslg AUTOT AR ek Rx C RR ROC GO RR CR RR WO ROR 325 SEINE a A Lad appe hoped po e Eb p RU OR Cc A RU CA opa e aed 325 SENSe MIXer BAND KIAIQIUIVIEIWIFIDIGIYUIUSER esseeeeeee RII 326 SPBSSEEMLA SIE NER piece a Eb tob cee OI PP EDPRI HP EP PCIe De pH e pe Eee qe 326 ESENSeEPONWeCOPGan STATS OFFRONO op eh hc bg o Y doi eb dote pb or dE dd 220 D SENSSLPOSVeGOPCanDnEpS LAIRIT a a uei der PE Ep ER d ER HER PEPER HE erbe err ves ts 329 SENSEEPOWeTEPI AT Ten shun rel ample saca socexpeekbnE3X EA RESAGd OE RODE AX Y Rad backs 329 SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation AUTO OFFIONIOH 0 0 0 0 III 329 SENSeE POWeit RF ATTenuationzAUTO AEN 08 REVRERERLERETERU ET RERSE REESE ERE 329 32 List of Commandes
164. Search When a marker is placed on a signal and Continuous Pk On is pressed the marker will remain on the signal even if the signal frequency changes as long as the amplitude of the signal does not change by more than 3 dB from one sweep to another If the signal is lost an attempt will be made to find it again and maintain the marker on the signal peak If there are other signals on screen near the same amplitude one of them may be found instead Signals near 0 Hz cannot be maintained effectively because they cannot be distinguished from the LO feedthrough which is excluded by intent from the search algorithm This function is intended to maintain the marker on signals with a frequency that is changing and an amplitude that is not changing 116 Chapter2 N dB Points On Off Search Criteria NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Peak Search Key Access Search More Activates the N dB function Pressing N dB Points On turns on the N dB feature and activates two arrows that are N dB down from the marker The frequency difference between the two arrows will be displayed in the upper right hand corner of the display If the feature is unable to find data N dB below the marker the value of 100 Hz will be displayed in the upper right hand corner of the display For example N dB Points can be used to measure the 3 dB bandwidth of a filter in a transmission test with the tracking generator The default value is 3 dB Possi
165. Sets the power sweep function to On or Off The value of the power sweep range is displayed in the active function block when you press Power Sweep On The analyzer continues to sweep the specified frequency range when power sweep is on To do a power sweep at a fixed frequency set the analyzer to zero span at the desired frequency The available power sweep range is a function of the source attenuator setting For your instrument s available power sweep range refer to the appropriate Specifications Guide for your analyzer The output power of the tracking generator is swept according to the sweep rate of the analyzer The output power is always swept from the source power setting to a higher power setting negative source power sweep values are not allowed Power sweep measurements are particularly useful in making gain compression measurements or output power versus frequency measurements When using the power sweep functionality the actual source amplitude will be greater than the source amplitude indicated The source amplitude value is the starting amplitude for a power sweep so the ending amplitude for a power sweep will be higher then the displayed value As a result exercise caution when connecting a power level sensitive device to the tracking generator output Key Access Source Allows you to select between automatic and manual adjustment of the tracking generator s output attenuator The Agilent E4401B and E4411B can be manuall
166. Setup key 168 Type Upper Lower 71 U units setting power 388 User key 47 user preset 369 user preset saving 370 user s reference using 36 V VBW RBW Auto Man 61 Video 167 video averaging 62 video bandwidth auto on off 307 couple to resolution bandwidth 307 ratio auto manual 307 ration to resolution bandwidth 307 values setting 306 Video BW Auto Man 60 video output on off 368 video trigger level amplitude 386 level frequency 387 source 382 video waveform sync pulse 385 View 164 view EMI 318 max min 163 164 165 view commands 269 View Trace 163 Viewing Angle 173 W wait IEEE command 235 Y Y Axis Units key 39 y axis amplitude scaling 274 frequency scaling 274 units 388 Z Zero Span 136 Zone 137 Zone Center 138 Zone On Off 138 Zone Pk Left 139 Zone Pk Right 139 Zone Span 139 Zoom 174 Index 423 Index 424 Index
167. Source More Normalize Normalize On Activates the normalize function On each sweep the normalized trace Trace 3 is subtracted from Trace 1 and the result is added to the normalized reference level The display shows the result of the following calculation Trace 1 Normalized Trace Normalized Reference Level The trace data is normalized with respect to the normalized reference level even if the value of the normalized reference level is changed This function remains in effect on all subsequent sweeps until it is turned off NOTE Segmented sweep is not available when Normalize On is selected CAUTION Trace 1 should be in clear write mode prior to setting normalize to on 134 The normalize function is most useful for applying correction data to a trace while making a stimulus response measurement with a tracking generator For example connect the cables and a thru line in place of the device to be measured between the tracking generator and the analyzer input Notice that the frequency response is not perfectly flat showing the response of the cables as well as the flatness of both the tracking generator and the analyzer Now press Store Ref 1 3 Normalize On Notice that the displayed trace is now flat or normalized The position of the normalized trace can now be moved to a different position on the display by changing the normalized reference position This may be useful if the device to be tested h
168. Source Sweep Power Range SOURce POWer SPAN rel ampl gt SOURCe POWer SPAN Specifies the range of power levels through which the source output will sweep Use SOURce POWer STARt to set the power level at the start of the power sweep This command is equivalent to SOURce POWer SWEep Factory Preset and RST 0 dB Range 0 dB to 20 dB Default Unit dB Chapter 5 345 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei CAUTION Remote Command Reference SOURce Subsystem Set the Output Power at the Start of the Sweep SOURCe POWer STARt ampl SOURce POWer STARt Specifies the source output power level at the start of the power sweep Use SOURce POWer SPAN to set the change in power level across the sweep This command is equivalent to SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Power level sensitive devices connected to the tracking generator output may be accidentally damaged This is because the actual source amplitude will be greater than the amplitude indicated on the analyzer when the power sweep function is being used The source amplitude value is used as the starting amplitude for a power sweep The ending amplitude for a power sweep is higher then the source amplitude value and it may actually be set to values beyond specified output levels Therefore exercise caution when connecting a power level sensitive device to the tracking generator output Set th
169. State Front Panel Access Trig TV Trig Setup Standard NTSC M Trig TV Trig Setup Standard NTSC Japan Trig TV Trig Setup Standard PAL M Trig TV Trig Setup Standard PAL B D GH I Trig TV Trig Setup Standard PAL N Trig TV Trig Setup Standard PAL N Combin Trig TV Trig Setup Standard SECAM L Video Trigger Level Amplitude TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel ampl TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel Specifies the level at which a video trigger will occur Factory Preset and RST 2 5 divisions below reference level Range 10 display divisions below reference level to reference level Default Unit current amplitude units Remarks Video is adjusted using this command but must also be selected using the command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce VIDeo When in FM Demod and Demod View is on the Video Trigger level is adjusted queried using the command 386 Chapter 5 NOTE NOTE Remote Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel FREQuency freq Trigger Delay is not available in Video trigger mode so turning Video on turns off Trigger Delay but preserves the value of Trigger Delay Front Panel Access Trig Video Video Trigger Level Frequency TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel FREQuency freq TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel FREQuency This command is used to adjust the Video Trigger level when in FM Demod and Demod View is on Default
170. Te If the revision of the state being loaded is newer than the revision of the instrument no state is recalled and an error is reported If the revision of the state being loaded is equal to the revision of the instrument all regions of the state will be loaded If the revision of the state being loaded is older than the revision of the instrument the instrument will only load the older regions of the state Front Panel Access File Load Type State Si ge S et oO a S S 5 ge Iz a Si g bi Ki e oO Load a Trace From a File to the Instrument MMEMOry LOAD TRACe file name gt The contents of the file are loaded into TRACEI The file name must have a file extension of trc These files contain and load a trace with its state Files with the CSV extension using the comma separated values format contain only trace data and they cannot be used to load a trace into the instrument Example MMEM LOAD TRAC C mytrace trc Remarks See also commands MMEMory LOAD STATe and MMEMory STORe STATe Chapter 5 295 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference MMEMory Subsystem If the revision of the state being loaded is newer than the revision of the instrument no state is recalled and an error is reported If the revision of the state being loaded is equal to the revision of the instrument all regions of the state will be loaded If the
171. User s Programmer s Reference Volume 1 Core Spectrum Analyzer Functions ESA Series Spectrum Analyzers Refer to Volume 2 for one button power measurements information This manual provides documentation for the following instruments Agilent Technologies ESA E Series E4401B 9 kHz 1 5 GHz E4402B 9 kHz 3 0 GHz E4404B 9 kHz 6 7 GHz E4405B 9 kHz 13 2 GHz E4407B 9 kHz 26 5 GHz Agilent Technologies ESA L Series E4411B 9 kHz 1 5 GHz E4403B 9 kHz 3 0 GHz E4408B 9 kHz 26 5 GHz Ke Agilent Technologies Manufacturing Part Number E4401 90507 Supersedes December 2006 Printed in USA February 2010 Copyright 1999 2010 Agilent Technologies WARNING CAUTION NOTE WARNING Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Safety Information The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual Familiarize yourself with the symbols and their meaning before operating this instrument Warning denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not co
172. Z pl774b 412 Chapter 6 Trace View Menu Trace View Sheet 1 of 7 Trace Operations Normalize Trace 4 2 3 Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold More 1 of 2 An active function which allows data entry Chapter 6 Normalize Store Ref 13 Normalize ot Norm Ref Lvl Norm Ref Posn Ref Trace View Blank perations Menu Maps Trace View Menu pl778b 413 sde nuaw L E e ES Z Menu Maps Trig Menu Trig Menu Trig Free Run Video Line External 0 o o z bi lt RF Burst More 1 of 2 Trig Delay o 3 Trig Offset Off o 3 TV Trig Setup RF Burst Setup Im S eet s c c e d a b f TV Trig Setup Field Sync v o o z o e Standard TV Source TV Monitor RF Burst Trigger Level s Rel requency Selsctivey Off E E Q On arrow Pulse Discriminator On Field Entire Frame Field One Field Two Standard NTSC M NTSC Japan PAL M PAL B D GH l PAL N PAL N Combin SECAM L TV Source gt Ext Video In a Agilent ESA E Series only E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B and E4407B b Available only with Option B7B TV Trigger and Picture on Screen and an FM Demod option c Trig Delay cannot be turned on if Gate is turned on d Available only in zero span and in resolution bandwidths gt 1 kHz e Available only in Line and External trigger modes f Availabl
173. a Pair Ref Delta Marker Span Pair Span Center Define Peak Excursion CALCulate MARKer PEAK EXCursion rel ampl CALCulate MARKer PEAK EXCursion Specifies the minimum signal excursion above the threshold for the internal peak identification routine to recognize a signal as a peak This applies to all traces and all windows The excursion is the delta power from the noise level to the signal peak au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE See command CALCulate MARKer PEAK SEARch MODE Factory Preset and RST 6 dB Range 0 to 100 dB Default Unit dB Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Search Criteria Peak Excursion 250 Chapter5 NOTE Remote Command Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Define Peak Search CALCulate MARKer PEAK SEARch MODE PARameter MAXimum CALCulate MARKer PEAK SEARch MODE Sets the peak search mode Factory Preset and RST MAXimum Remarks If mode is set to MAXimum peak search will place the marker at the maximum amplitude in the trace If mode is set to PARameter peak search will place the marker at the highest peak that rises and falls by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold If no peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria a No Peak Found error error 202 is issued Next peak next peak right next peak left and peak table are not affected by this command They will always use peak excursion
174. able represent absolute values or relative values In fixed the limit line amplitude values are specified in absolute amplitude and do not depend on the reference level In relative the limit line amplitude values are relative to the current reference level For Fixed Frequency Parameters The frequency values in a limit line table are fixed values and the limit line is positioned accordingly Fixed limit lines are specified in absolute frequency and do not depend upon the center frequency values For Relative Frequency Parameters The frequency values in a limit line table are relative values and positions the limit line relative to the center frequency settings Relative limit lines are specified in relative frequency and are positioned with respect to the current center frequency When the current center frequency value is changed the segment frequencies are converted according to the current center frequency value For Time Parameters Limit lines that are based on sweep time are always relative to the start time The horizontal position of the limit line is not affected by this command Front Panel Access Display Limits Limits Fixed Rel au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Set Limit Line X axis Units CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain FREQuency TIME CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain Selects how the limit line segments are defined according to frequency or according to the sweep tim
175. ace data values in the first half division will be averaged Similarly if the marker is positioned within 2 5 of the end of the trace the trace data values in the last half division will be averaged Do not use Marker Noise to evaluate the displayed average noise level of the analyzer relative to the specification Read the displayed average noise level directly from the display or use the normal marker Refer to Application Note 150 for a discussion of how noise is displayed on a spectrum analyzer To guarantee accurate data for noise like signals a correction for equivalent noise bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth is measured and included in the measurement The Marker Noise function accuracy is optimal when the detector is set either to Average or to Sample because neither of these detectors peak biases the noise Key Access Marker More Function Turns off the active function markers Key Access Marker More Function Compresses the graticule and displays marker information in a table The information includes the marker number trace number marker type X axis value and the amplitude Key Access Marker More Turns off all of the markers including markers used for signal track and demodulation Marker annotation is also removed S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Chapter 2 109 E 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E D Ba 5 x e Mkr CF NOTE
176. age size Page size A is letter and page size B is ledger There is no size standardization for legal or executive Factory Preset and RST The factory default is letter This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access Print Setup Page Size z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 07 Chapter 5 283 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference INITiate Subsystem INITiate Subsystem The INITiate subsystem is used to control the initiation of the trigger Refer to the TRIGger and ABORt subsystems for related commands Continuous or Single Measurements INITiate CONTinuous OFF ON 0 1 INITiate CONTinuous Selects whether the trigger system is continuously initiated or not This command affects sweep if not in a measurement and affects trigger when in a measurement A measurement refers to any of the functions under the MEASURE key This corresponds to continuous sweep or single sweep operation when not in a measurement and continuous measurement or single measurement operation when in a measurement Commands used for measurements in the MEASURE and Meas Setup menus are located in Volume 2 One Button Power Measurements When not in a measurement this command does the following When ON at the completion of each sweep cycle t
177. ale type is Log SENSe SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Channel Freq Offset Display Line Amplitude DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe ampl DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe Defines the level of the display line in the active amplitude units if no units are specified Factory Preset and RST 2 5 divisions below the reference level Range 10 display divisions below the reference level to the reference level Default Unit Current active units Front Panel Access Display Display Line On Off Display Line On Off DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe STATe Turns the display line on or off Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Display Display Line On Off 272 Chapter5 NOTE Remote Command Reference DISPlay Subsystem IF Gain Auto Reference Level Auto Ranging DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe LOG RANGe AUTO OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe LOG RANGe AUTO This command enables and disables auto ranging The speed benefits gained with this command are realized only when in narrow resolution digital bandwidths The setting of auto range has no effect when in analog resolution bandwidths Factory Preset and RST On History This command is available with firmware revision A 04 00 and later Remarks When using digital resolution bandwidths RBW lt 1 kHz the analyzer uses IF Gain au
178. alize has been activated Key Access View Trac More Normalize Normalize On Activates the normalize function On each sweep the normalized trace Trace 3 is subtracted from Trace 1 and the result is added to the normalized reference level The display shows the result of the following calculation Trace 1 Normalized Trace Normalized Reference Level The trace data is normalized with respect to the normalized reference level even if the value of the normalized reference level is changed This function remains in effect on all subsequent sweeps until it is turned off NOTE Segmented sweep is not available when Normalize On is selected CAUTION Trace 1 should be in clear write mode prior to setting normalize to on Norm Ref Lvl Norm Ref Posn Chapter 2 The normalize function is most useful for applying correction data to a trace while making a stimulus response measurement with a tracking generator For example connect the cables and a thru line in place of the device to be measured between the tracking generator and the analyzer input Notice that the frequency response is not perfectly flat showing the response of the cables as well as the flatness of both the tracking generator and the analyzer Now press Store Ref 1 3 Normalize On Notice that the displayed trace is now flat or normalized The position of the normalized trace can now be moved to a different position on the display by changing
179. alyzer display when it is not coupled To couple the video bandwidth press Video BW Auto or press Auto All Key Access BW Avg 60 Chapter 2 Front Panel Key Reference BW Avg VBW RBW Selects the ratio between the video and resolution bandwidths If signal responses Auto Man near the noise level are visually masked by the noise the ratio can be set to less than 1 to lower the noise The knob and step keys change the ratio in a 1 3 10 sequence When Preset Type is set to Factory and Preset is pressed or Auto Couple Auto AII have been selected the ratio is set to 1 000 X The ratio can be changed using the step keys knob or numeric keypad When VBW RBW Auto is selected the ratio is determined by the rules in Figure 2 3 Figure 2 3 VBW RBW Ratio Auto Rules Is RBW EMI No Is Detector Peak or Negative Peak No Is Trace Average On Yoe Yes Ratio 10 Is Trace Average or Noise Marker or Band Power On Is Detector Sample Is Avg Type Power Yes Ratio 10 No Yes Ratio 10 Marker or Band Yes Is Avg Type Power No Marker or Band No cl710a Key Access BW Avg Average Initiates a digital averaging routine that averages the trace points in a number of On Off successive sweeps resulting in trace smoothing The number of sweeps average Chapter 2 61 m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Ke c g E 3 Q
180. ame but consists of up to three characters total Catalog the Selected Memory Location MMEMory CATalog drive where drive is A or C Lists all files in the specified drive The return data will be of the format mem used mem free file listing Each file listing indicates the name and size of one file in the directory list ile name gt lt file size Si ge S et oO a S S 5 ge Iz a Si g bi Ki e oO Example Catalog drive C which is in instrument memory MMEMory CATalog C Front Panel Access File Copy a File MMEMory COPY file namel gt lt file name2 gt To copy a file the source file name is file namel and the destination file name is file name2 Chapter 5 293 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference MMEMory Subsystem Example MMEM COPY C oldname sta A newname sta Front Panel Access File Copy Move Data to File MMEMory DATA file name gt lt definite length block MMEMory DATA file name Loads definite length block into the memory location file name The query returns the contents of the file name in the format of a definite length block This command can be used for copying files out of the analyzer over the remote bus Refer to chapter 3 Programming Examples for more information Example Load abcd into C source txt
181. and full sized display of the active window in zone span and other functions which support split screen display modes The active window is indicated by a solid green line surrounding the window If Zoom is pressed while in a non split screen display mode it will activate the zone span mode See Span Zone and also Next Window If Zoom is pressed when zone markers are off it will turn on zone markers and put the display in split screen mode See Span Zone E 9 E D S E Ei m Si ei E E D Ba 5 x e 174 Chapter2 a vd EI ke o E B 5 ge g z a E E 5 e E N Programming Fundamentals The purpose of this chapter is to serve as a reminder of SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments fundamentals to those who have previous experience in programming SCPI This chapter is not intended to teach you everything about the SCPI programming language If you are using an optional programming compatibility modes you should refer to the manual that came with the option 175 E E E E KI S E 2 E E g S S E En S 2 Ba Programming Fundamentals The SCPI Consortium or IEEE can provide detailed information on the subject of SCPI programming Refer to IEEE Standard 488 1 1987 IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation New York NY 1987 or to IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Commo
182. and to perform the following tasks e Check the analyzer hardware and firmware status Do this by querying the condition registers which continuously monitor status These registers represent the current state of the analyzer Bits in a condition register are updated in real time When the condition monitored by a particular bit becomes true the bit is set to 1 When the condition becomes false the bit is reset to O Monitor a particular bit condition or bits Once you have enabled a bit using the event enable register the analyzer will monitor that particular bit If the bit becomes true in the event register it will stay set until the event register is cleared Querying the event register allows you to detect that this condition occurred even if the condition no longer exists The event register can only be cleared by querying it or sending the CLS command which clears all event registers Monitor a change in the condition of a particular bit or bits Once you have enabled a bit the analyzer will monitor it for a change in its condition The transition registers are preset to respond to the condition of going from 0 to 1 positive transitions This can be changed so that the selected bit is detected if it goes from 1 to 0 negative transition or if either transition occurs Query the event register to determine whether or not a change has been made to how the transition registers respond The event register can only be cleared by queryi
183. anel Access Input Output or Input Input Mixer Mixer Config Mixer Bias On Off Set External Mixer LO Harmonic Value SENSe MIXer HARMonic integer SENSe MIXer HARMonic This command allows you to set the LO harmonic value for mixers other than the HP Agilent 11970 Series or 11974 Series Mixers This is done after the mixer harmonic configuration SENSe MIXer HARMonic AUTO OFF ON 0 1 is set to Off manual This command is available only with Option AYZ External Mixing Factory Preset and RST 8 Band A 26 5 40 GHz Range Any non zero integer from 50 to 50 inclusive Remarks The harmonic value with its associated sign is automatically determined from the external mixer band selected This is the AUTO mode For mixers other than the HP Agilent 11970 Series or 11974 Series an LO harmonic other than that determined in the AUTO mode may be required This is achieved using this command and related command SENSe MIXer HARMonic AUTO OFF ON 0 1 Chapter 5 327 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D e NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe MIXer Subsection Set External Mixer LO Harmonic Mode SENSe MIXer HARMonic AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe MIXer HARMonic AUTO This command allows you to set the external mixer LO harmonic mode to either automatic or manual The manual mode is us
184. ange Title is pressed again or a trace is recalled that was previously saved with a title A display title can also be cleared by using the clear function Press Display Title Clear Title Key Access Display Title Allows you to clear a title from the front panel display Once cleared the title cannot be retrieved Key Access Display Title Accesses a menu of the following display functions which allow you to turn the graticule and annotation on or off Key Access Display Graticule On Off Annotation On Off 78 Turns the display graticule on and off Key Access Display Preferences Turns the screen annotation on or off however menu key annotation will remain on the screen The screen annotation may not be required for prints or during remote operation Key Access Display Preferences Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference Enter Enter Terminates and enters into the analyzer a numerical value that has been entered from the front panel using the numeric keypad For most applications it is better to use the units menu keys When using the File key menus the Enter key is used to terminate filename entries When entering titles Display Title Change Title the Enter key is used to terminate title entries m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be 5 be bi Chapter 2 79 Front Panel Key Reference ESC ESC Use the escape key to exit any function without modifying cu
185. anges in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register The changes may be positive from 0 to 1 or negative from 1 to 0 Send the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity NTRansition lt num gt negative transition or STATus QUEStionable INTegrity PTRansition lt num gt positive transition where lt num gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The Questionable Status Integrity Event Register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters Event registers are destructive read only Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register To query the event register send the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity EVENt See Questionable Status Event Enable Register on page 212 for an explanation of how to set the summary bit using the event enable register In this case use the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle lt num gt 226 Chapter 4 Gi t er Q S E D Ki E Gi t T S P Ki O D Remote Command Reference This chapter contains SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments programming commands for the spectrum analyzer core operation Refer to Volume 2 for the commands associated with the one button measurements that are available when you press the front panel MEASURE key 227 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D e
186. ars both the input and output buffers and clears all trace data Sets the amplitude values of trace 2 and 3 to the bottom of the screen Amplitude correction factors are turned off but remain in analyzer memory Limit line testing is turned off but the limit line tables remain in analyzer memory e Segmented sweep is turned off but the segmented sweep tables remain in analyzer memory The status byte is set to 0 See Table 2 2 on page 121 for the conditions established by performing a factory preset For Agilent E4402B or E4407Bwith Option UKB E4404B and E4405B only you can specify alternating current ac or direct current dc coupling at the analyzer input Selecting ac coupling blocks any dc voltage at the analyzer input but also decreases the frequency range of the analyzer Make sure the analyzer is dc coupled when measuring below 100 kHz for Agilent E4402B E4404B and E4405B and below 10 MHz for Agilent E4407B See Input Output in this chapter for more information on this setting If Preset Type is set to User in the System menu Pressing the Preset front panel key brings up the User Preset Mode Preset and Factory Preset menu keys If User Preset is pressed the user preset state is recalled To set the user preset state change the analyzer settings as desired then press System Power 120 Chapter2 NOTE NOTE Table 2 2 On Preset Save User Preset Front Panel Key Reference Preset
187. as positive gain such as an amplifier Now replace the thru line with the device under test and an accurate measurement of the gain or loss can be made Key Access Source More Normalize Chapter 2 Tracking Peak Man Track Adj NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Source Norm Ref Lvl Sets the level in dB of the normalized reference Key Access Source More Normalize Norm Ref Posn Offsets the displayed trace without affecting the instrument gain or attenuation settings This allows the displayed trace to be moved without decreasing measurement accuracy The normalized reference position is indicated with a gt character on the left side of the display and a character on the right side of the display Key Access Source More Normalize Ref Trace View BLank Allows you to view or blank the reference trace on the display Key Access Source More Normalize Agilent E4402B E4403B E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B only Activates a routine that automatically adjusts fine frequency tracking to obtain the peak response of the tracking generator on the spectrum analyzer display Tracking Peak is performed in the current resolution bandwidth The output frequency of the tracking generator is not exactly matched to the input frequency of the spectrum analyzer which causes tracking error As you narrow the resolution bandwidth RBW you may see the displayed signal level decrease This is because a frequency offset m
188. at the top of the list The first error listed will be the first error removed if the error list is longer than 30 entries If the same error message occurs several times the error message will be incremented rather than added to the list as a new error message The date and time identify the first time and the last time if there is more than one of the same type of error an error occurred The number of identical errors is shown and the error number is also shown with firmware revision A 08 00 and later Key Access System Prev Page Allows you to access the previous page of error messages It is grayed out if you are on the first page or only one page exists Key Access System Show Errors Next Page Allows you to access the next page of error messages It is grayed out if you are on the last page or only one page exists Key Access System Show Errors Verbose SCPI On Off The information in the Error History Screen is formatted to fit the screen size Additional information is available via the SYSTem ERRor command It indicates which SCPI command was executing when the error occurred and what about that command was unacceptable Example First set SYST ERR VERBOSE ON If the command SENSe FREQuently CENTer 942 6MHz is sent then sending SYST ERR returns 113 Undefined header SENSe FREQuently lt Err gt CENTer 942 6MHz lt NL gt Key Access System Show Errors Clear Error Queue Clears the error queue i
189. ata formats a definite length block of data is returned The query returns the current values of the designated trace The data is terminated with lt NL gt lt END gt for GPIB that is newline or linefeed followed by EOI set true for RS 232 this is newline only LLINE1 and LLINE2 can only be queried they cannot be set lt trace_name gt is TRACE1 2 3 Chapter 5 371 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 au 9 E D G o e Ei S e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference TRACe Subsystem This command does not allow setting all trace points to the same amplitude value by sending just a single value If you need to set all trace points to the same value you must send the same value to each trace point Rawtrace data is available with UINT 16 or INT 32 formatting It is unitless returns uncorrected ADC values and is the fastest method of obtaining measurement data Example Suppose you are using a data format other then ASCII TRAC DATA TRACE1 41604 lt binary trace data gt lt LF EOI gt This sends the block of data values to trace 1 The block starts with the header 41604 e The first digit in the header tells you there are 4 more digits in the header The 1604 means 1 thousand 6 hundred and 4 data bytes follow the header Divide this number of bytes by your current data format 4 for real 32 Then there are 401 trace
190. atalog Catalog By Date All Corrections Save By Name Setup Load By Extension State Measurement Delet vo Results By Size Trace o o Ji i Order c Copy Down Limits Rename File More 10f2 o c D Create Dir To Alpha Editor 2 When Type Trace When Type Corrections When Type Limits i create Din Source Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 All Traces Dir Up Dir Select Save Save Now Type a Format Source Dir Up KR Dir Select o Source Antenna Cable Other User a Grayed out if no directory selected b Continued on sheet 1 of 3 c Continued on sheet 3 of 3 d Available only when Type is setto Trace or Screen o c ro m D Setup State Trace Limits Screen More 1of2 Source Limit 1 Limit 2 Screen More 1of2 Type Corrections Measurement Results i When Type Trace When Type Screen Format Trace State Oo o lt Format Bitmap Metafile Reverse Bitmap Reverse Metafile Ka e E ES e e Available only when Type is setto Trace Limits or Corrections pi761b 398 Chapter 6 File Menus 2 of 3 File Catalog Save Load Delete Copy 7 Rename More 10f2 File Je Create Dir o D D feme Sheet 2 of 3 Load Load Now Type ke Sort d Destination a Dir Up Dir Select Delete Delete Now Type Sort a Dir Up
191. ate of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description Value 0 0 Oversweep Meas Uncal A lin this position indicates that the analyzer is in a state that could lead to uncalibrated measurements This is typically caused by sweeping too fast for the current combination of span resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth Auto coupling may resolve this problem 1 2 Signal Ident ON A in this bit position indicates that amplitude measurements may be in error due to signal identification routines being active Amplitude accuracy is degraded when signal identification is active Agilent ESA model E4407B Option AYZ External Mixing only 2 4 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 3 8 Unused This bit is always set to 0 4 16 Unused This bit is always set to 0 5 32 Unused This bit is always set to 0 6 64 Unused This bit is always set to 0 7 128 Unused This bit is always set to 0 8 256 Unused This bit is always set to 0 9 512 Unused This bit is always set to 0 10 1024 Unused This bit is always set to 0 11 2048 Unused This bit is always set to 0 12 4096 Unused This bit is always set to 0 13 8192 Unused This bit is always set to 0 14 16384 Unused This bit is always set to 0 15 32768 Always Zero 0 This bit is always set to 0 Questionable Status Calibration Condition and Event Enable Regi
192. atus Byte Event Register should be queried after each measurement to check the Questionable Status Summary bit 3 If it is equal to 1 a condition during the test made the test results invalid If it is equal to 0 this indicates that no hardware problem or measurement problem was detected by the analyzer Factory Preset and RST 0 Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Event Query STATus QUEStionable EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Event register The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the data is cleared z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 Questionable Frequency Condition STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Chapter 5 353 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Frequency Enable STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle integer STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition
193. average for each trace interval depends on the sweep time the resolution bandwidth and whether or not option B7D is installed With option B7D installed more samples are available as appropriate for wider resolution bandwidths and faster sweep times Slower sweep times also increase the number of samples averaged for each trace interval When Average is selected Avg appears on the left side of the display NOTE When the Average detector is selected and the amplitude scale is linear the fastest sweet time is 8 milliseconds Peak Sample Chapter 2 Key Access Det Demod Detector Auto Man Peak detection is used primarily when measuring sinusoidal spectral components Peak detection obtains the maximum video signal value between the last display point and the present display point and stores this value in memory Peak detection is selected at power on and by pressing Preset when Preset Type is set to Factory and Power On is set to Preset When Peak detection is selected Peak appears in the upper left corner of the display Key Access Det Demod Detector Auto Man Sample detection is used primarily to display noise or noise like S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q 65 au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E EMI Detector NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Det Demod Negative Peak signals This detection should not be used to make the most
194. ay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel ampl DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVe1 Sets the amplitude value of the reference level for the y axis Factory Preset and RST 0 dBm Range With zero reference level offset ESA E4401B E4411B 149 9 to 50 dBm ESA E4402B E4403B 149 9 to 55 dBm ESA E4404B 149 9 to 55 dBm ESA E4405B 149 9 to 55 dBm ESA E4407B E4408B 149 9 to 55 dBm 149 9 to 55 dBm with zero reference level offset and max mixer level 10 dBm In external mixing the range is 327 5 to 10 dBm with max mixer level z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 07 10 dBm Default Unit Current active units Remarks The input attenuator setting may be affected The minimum displayed value of reference level is 327 6 dBm and the maximum displayed value is 327 6 dBm See the remarks given for the command DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet rel ampl Front Panel Access Amplitude Y Scale Ref Level Chapter 5 275 Remote Command Reference DISPlay Subsystem Trace Y Axis Reference Level Offset DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet rel ampl DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Sets the amplitude level offset for the y axis Factory Preset and RST 0 dB Range 327 6 to 327 6 dB Default Unit dB Remarks The sum of reference level offset reference level is clipped to the range 327 6 to 32
195. bit position indicates that the input overload protection is tripped Agilent ESA models E4401B and E4411B only 7 128 Unused This bit is always set to 0 8 256 LO Out Unleveled A in this bit position indicates that the first local oscillator LO output is unleveled Agilent ESA model E4407B option AYZ External Mixing only 9 512 Unused This bit is always set to 0 10 1024 Unused This bit is always set to 0 11 2048 Unused This bit is always set to 0 12 4096 Unused This bit is always set to 0 13 8192 Unused This bit is always set to 0 14 16384 Unused This bit is always set to 0 15 32768 Always Zero 0 This bit is always set to 0 Questionable Status Event Enable Register The Questionable Status Event Enable Register lets you choose which bits in the Questionable Status Event Register will set the summary bit bit 3 of the Status Byte Register to 1 Send the command STATus QUEStionable ENABle num where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable 212 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions For example to enable bit 9 and bit 3 so that whenever either of those bits is set to 1 the Questionable Status Summary bit of the Status Byte Register will be setto 1 send the command STAT QUES ENAB 520 512 8 The command STATus QUEStionable ENABle returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits p
196. ble values range from 1 00 dB to 80 00 dB You can enter values to a resolution of 0 01 dB using the numeric key pad 0 1 dB using the knob or 10 dB using the step keys The N dB function follows the active marker If you turn on a marker after N dB Points has been activated the arrows will follow that marker If the marker associated with N dB Points moves the arrows will move with the marker unless there is no data N dB below the marker Key Access Search More Accesses the following menu keys Key access Search More Peak Excursion Sets the minimum amplitude variation of signals that the marker can identify as a peak If a value of 10 dB is selected the marker moves only to peaks that rise and fall more than 10 dB above the peak threshold value Pressing Preset when Preset Type is set to Factory or turning on power resets the excursion to 6 dB and the threshold to 90 dB below the reference level Two signal peaks which are so close together that the amplitude drop between them is less than the peak excursion value are not recognized as two peaks A signal peak is recognized only if it has a peak excursion drop above the noise floor on both sides of the signal When the peak excursion value is 6 dB or higher the marker peaking functions do not recognize signals less than the peak excursion value above the noise floor To correct this when measuring signals near the noise floor the excursion value can be reduced even f
197. ble Calibration Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable CALibration PTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable CALibration PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event register when that bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Condition STATus QUEStionable CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions 352 Chapter5 NOTE NOTE NOTE Remote Command Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Enable STATus QUEStionable ENABle integer STATus QUEStionable ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Event register which also sets the Questionable Status Summary bit bit3 in the Status Byte Register The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The preset condition is to have all bits in this enable register set to 0 To have any Questionable Events reported to the Status Byte Register 1 or more bits need to be set to 1 The St
198. bration Subsystem CALibration Subsystem These commands control the self alignment and self diagnostic processes Align All Instrument Assemblies CALibration ALL CALibration ALL Performs an alignment of all the assemblies within the instrument except for the tracking generator Option 1DN or 1DQ if installed except Agilent model E4401B or E4411B Before executing this command connect a cable between front panel connector AMPTD REF OUT and the INPUT connector for all Agilent ESA spectrum analyzers except Agilent models E4401B and E4411B If the cable is not connected CAL ALL will perform a subset of the RF alignment and a subsequent CAL RF will be required for the analyzer to meet its specified performance The query performs a full alignment and returns a number indicating the success of the alignment A zero is returned if the alignment is successful even if only a subset of the RF alignment is performed Front Panel Access System Alignments Align Now All Set Auto Align Mode All or Not RF CALibration AUTO MODE ALL NRF CALibration AUTO MODE This command determines whether or not to include RF alignment as part of the automatic alignment routines Eliminating automatic alignment of the RF prevents changes in the input impedance between sweeps which could cause input device instability Factory Preset and RST All at power up Front Panel Access System Alignments Auto Align All System Ali
199. but is for future use with other Agilent products 18 2 No Result Available A in this bit position indicates that a measurement terminated with no measurement results 2a 4 Measurement Timeout A in this bit position indicates that a measurement terminated due to a timeout 3 8 Data Uncalibrated Summary This is the summary bit for the Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated E Register S F 4 16 IF ADC Over Range The signal input level is too high 5 causing the analyzer analog to digital converter ADC S range to be exceeded This may occur with resolution bandwidths less than or equal to 300 Hz in zero span 52 32 Over Range A in this bit position indicates that the signal is too large at the analog to digital converter ADC 6 64 Under Range A in this bit position indicates that the signal is too small at the analog to digital converter ADC 7 128 Insufficient Data A lin this bit position indicates that there is not enough information to perform the measurement or function ga 256 Acquisition Failure A in this bit position indicates that the demod algorithm cannot correlate to the signal 98 512 Memory Problem A in this bit position indicates a failure of the file system memory or digital signal processor DSP memory 10 1024 Auto Trigger Timeout A in this bit position indicates that the measurement timed out due to no trigger 112 2048 Trigger Proble
200. can be controlled at a time The marker that is controlled is called the active marker Pressing Marker activates the Normal menu key Selects one of the four possible markers A marker that has already been turned on will become active when it is selected If a marker has been turned on and assigned to a specific trace it will become active on that trace if that marker is selected Key Access Marker Activates a single frequency marker at the center position of the active trace if a marker is not already displayed If a marker is displayed before the Normal function is enabled the marker is enabled at the position of the selected marker The marker number is indicated above the marker Use the data controls to position the marker The knob and or Up Down keys move the marker left or right If a value is entered from the numeric keypad the marker is moved to the trace point nearest to that value Annotation in the active function block and in the upper right corner of the display indicates the frequency and amplitude of the marker time and amplitude if in zero span The marker stays on the trace at the horizontal screen position where it was placed unless Signal Track or a marker to key function such as Mkr CF Mkr gt RL Mkr CF STEP Mkr A Span or Min Search is selected Pressing Normal turns off the Delta function and moves the active marker to the delta marker position Key Access Marker Activates a second marker at t
201. cates a loss in the external device User correction factors are typically entered as negative values which indicate a gain in the external device Edit Accesses menu keys that allow you to create and edit an amplitude correction factor set It puts the analyzer into a split screen mode where the correction data is displayed in a table under the trace data Pressing ESC while in this menu will exit the menu and remove the table from the screen New points will be applied only after the editor is closed The Tab keys are very useful for navigation between rows in the corrections table Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections User Point Allows you to create or edit an amplitude correction factor data point Up to 200 points may be defined for each set Enter the point number to be created or edited by using the numeric keypad then press Enter or use the knob tab or step keys to move to an existing point Press Bk Sp to correct errors After selecting a point Frequency becomes active Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections User Edit Frequency Allows you to enter the frequency value for an amplitude correction point Enter the frequency value by using the numeric keypad Change the frequency value by using the step keys or the knob Press Bk Sp to correct errors After selecting a point Amplitude becomes active A frequency coordinate must always be specified for amplitude correction factors Key
202. ccess Auto Couple Detector Auto Man Negative peak detection functions the same as peak detection Chapter2 Avg Type Auto Man NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Auto Couple but selects the minimum video signal value This detection should not be used to make the most accurate amplitude measurements of signals When Negative Peak is selected NPeak appears in the upper left corner of the screen Key Access Auto Couple Detector Auto Man Accesses the functions to automatically or manually choose from one of the following averaging scales Video or Power RMS If video averaging is selected the measurement results are the average of the signal level in the y axis scale If the power average RMS is selected all measured results are converted into power units before averaging and filtering operations and converted back to decibels for displaying The main point to remember is that there can be significant differences between the average of the log of power and the log of the average power There are actually four types of averaging processes within a spectrum analyzer All except VBW filtering are affected by this setting They are Trace averaging see BW Avg Average On Averages signal amplitudes on a trace to trace basis The type of averaging Video or Power RMS is selected by pressing BW Avg Avg Type Average detector see Det Demod Detector Average Video RMS Averages signal amplitudes during
203. ccess BW Avg Avg Type Pwr Avg Power averaging is performed by converting the trace data from logarithmic to linear power units and then averaging the power trace data When Avg Type Pwr Avg is selected PAvg appears on the left side of the analyzer display if Average is On Key Access BW Avg Avg Type Accesses the EMI Res BW menu keys and allows you to choose between 6 dB bandwidths of 120 kHz 9 kHz and 200 Hz The 200 Hz bandwidth is only available if Option 1DR narrow resolution bandwidth is installed and the span is less than 5 MHz This function is set to None when the resolution bandwidth is set to any other value using the Resolution BW key Key Access BW Avg Chapter 2 63 m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E NOTE Detector Auto Man Front Panel Key Reference Det Demod Det Demod Accesses the menu keys controlling detector functions demodulation functions and the speaker FM demod is available with options 106 BAA or AYQ installed The FM Demod internal circuitry must be aligned before use Press System Alignments Align Now FM Demod Selects a specific detector or uses the system to pick the appropriate detector through Auto for a particular measurement When discussing detectors it is important to understand the concept of a trace bucket For every trace point displayed there is a f
204. ccurred Command errors have SCPI error numbers from 199 to 100 6 64 Unused This bit is always set to 0 7 128 Power On A in this bit position indicates that the analyzer has been turned off and then on Standard Event Status Event Enable Register The event enable register contained in the standard event status register lets you choose which bits will set the summary bit bit 5 of the status byte register to 1 Send the ESE number command where number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable For example to enable bit 7 and bit 3 so that whenever either of those bits is set to 1 the standard event status summary bit of the status byte register will also be set to 1 send the ESE 136 128 8 command The ESE command returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the ESE number command Figure 4 7 Standard Event Status Event Enable Register ESE num ESE STATus OPERation Register The STATus OPERation register is used to determine the specific event that sets bit 7 in the status byte register This register also monitors the current measurement state and checks to see if the analyzer is performing any of these functions measuring calibrating sweeping waiting for a trigger Chapter 4 205 K e ES E 2 Si ys CH K Lg wn Ka D D E Ki On E EI Ka E 2 Ki S Ke Status Re
205. ceive When the number of received bytes in the input buffer of the device reaches the stop threshold the device will unassert the DTR line When the number of bytes has been reduced to the start threshold the device will assert DTR indicating that it can receive input again The device will also monitor the state of CTS and will stop transmission if the line becomes unasserted Chapter 5 361 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference SYSTem Subsystem Factory Preset no RST The factory default is On This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Serial Port RTS Setup SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 CONTrol RTS OFF ON IBFull SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 CONTrol RTS Sets the hardware pacing hand shaking scheme Many high speed asynchronous modems use this line paired with CTS as receive transmit pacing Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument Off indicates that the RTS line should always be asserted On indicates that the RTS line should always be unasserted IBFull selects the input buffer full mode for the RTS line IBFull sets the RTS line to indicate when the device is ready to receive When the number of received bytes in the input buffer of the device reaches the stop threshold the device will unassert the RTS line When the number of bytes has been reduced to the start th
206. ces 78 Presel Adjust key 39 Presel Center key 39 preselector adjustment 39 preselector centering 39 preselector peaking 331 Preset menu map 407 420 preset 234 369 customized 370 to factory defaults 369 type at power on 368 type factory user 368 369 Print key 125 Print Setup 126 Print Setup menu map 408 Printer Type 126 printer type 281 printing 125 abort 281 color 281 commands 281 form feed 282 page orientation 282 page size 283 print now 282 printer type 281 prints per page 282 Prints Page 1 2 127 programmer s reference using 36 programming commands creating valid 177 multiple commands on one line 186 notation syntax 178 parameters 180 separator syntax 186 special characters 179 terminations 186 programming errors debug information 365 Q quasi peak gain 329 quasi peak detection 316 317 queries frequency reference 263 hardware configuration 363 host identification 366 identification 232 marker frequency counter 247 marker y axis 259 operation event 349 peaks frequency amplitude 373 number of 373 sort frequency amplitude 374 SCPI version 370 standard event status register 232 state 232 sweep segments 335 system configuration instrument 364 system options 367 questionable condition registers 208 questionable condition registers queries 351 quit command 236 R range dwell time 301 ratio video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth 61
207. change although transitions of these conditions can be detected using the event registers Changing modes resets all SCPI status registers and mask registers to their power on defaults Hence any event or condition register masks must be re established after a mode change Also note that the power up status bit is set by any mode change since that is the default state after power up Example INST SEL CDMA Factory Preset Persistent state with factory default of Spectrum Analyzer mode Front Panel Access MODE 292 Chapter5 NOTE Remote Command Reference MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory Subsystem The purpose of the MMEMory subsystem is to provide access to mass storage devices such as internal or external disk drives Refer also to CALCulate and TRACe subsystems for more trace and limit line commands Agilent ESA analyzers use two types of mass storage devices e 3 5 inch disk drive high density 1 44 MBytes formatted designated A Part of flash memory and treated as a device designated C The MMEMory command syntax term lt file name gt is a specifier having the form drive directory name ext where the following rules apply e drive is A or C e AdirectoryV is the path name e name is a DOS file name of up to eight characters letters A Z a z and numbers 0 9 only lower case letters are read as uppercase e ext is an optional file extension using the same rules as n
208. command is used to override the coupling for special measurement needs COUPle NONE puts these functions into the manually set not coupled mode COUPle ALL puts the functions into the auto coupled mode and also puts the sweep coupling mode into SA couple all The following list of analyzer functions can be automatically coupled Resolution bandwidth Span Averagetype firmware revision A 08 00 or greater Marker functions Detector firmware revision A 08 00 or greater Marker functions Average On Off Average type Attenuation Reference level External amplifier gain Preamp z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 07 Center frequency step Span in swept spans Resolution bandwidth in zero spans Video bandwidth Resolution bandwidth Tracking Generator Sweep coupling mode SR SA VBW RBW ratio firmware revision A 08 00 or greater Sweep time Span Video bandwidth Resolution bandwidth Chapter 5 267 Remote Command Reference COU Die Subsystem Sweep points Phase noise optimization Phase Noise Optimization firmware revision A 08 00 or greater Span NOTE Although marker count gate time and marker trace have auto settings they are not affected by Couple Factory Preset and RST All Front Panel Access Auto Couple Auto All 2 9 E D E E E EI ki E Q 2 E EI 268 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference DISPlay Subsy
209. correspond to 10 and 0 respectively See command CALCulate NTData STATe OFF ON 0 1 Factory Preset and RST 10 Range integer Front Panel Access View Trace Normalize Norm Ref Posn Trace Y Axis Amplitude Scaling DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision rel ampl DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Sets the per division display scaling for the y axis when y axis units are set to amplitude units Factory Preset and RST 10 dB Range 0 1 to 20 0 dB Default Unit dB Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Scale Div Trace Y Axis Frequency Scaling DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision FREQuency freq DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision FREQuency This command sets the per division display scaling for the y axis when the y axis units are set to frequency units such as when looking at FM deviation with the command SENSe DEMod VIEW STATe OFF ON O 1 For Option 106 Bluetooth FM Demodulation only the query form of this command is available the value is determined during alignment 274 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference DISPlay Subsystem Factory Preset and RST 20 kHz with Options BAA or AYQ Approximately 40 kHz with Option 106 Bluetooth FM Demodulation Range 1 kHz to 240 kHz with Options BAA or AYQ Fixed with Option 106 Bluetooth FM Demodulation Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Scale Div Trace Y Axis Reference Level DISPl
210. could return the string BAH 2488CE2109E9 1DS 7ED64A85E30F 1DR C1DC3B F2BAFA History Added command with firmware revision A 14 00 Front Panel Access System Licensing Show License Display License Key Information SYSTem CONFigure LKEY STATe OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem CONFigure LKEY STATe Turns on off the display of the current license key information for instrument options Factory Preset and RST Off History Added command with firmware revision A 14 00 Front Panel Access System Licensing Show License System Configuration Query SYSTem CONFigure SYSTem Returns string of information about the configurations of the instrument 364 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference SYSTem Subsystem Front Panel Access System Show System Display System Configuration SYSTem CONFigure SYSTem STATe OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem CONFigure SYSTem STATe Shows the current system configuration of the instrument on the display Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access System Show System Set Date SYSTem DATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt SYSTem DATE Sets the date of the real time clock of the instrument Year is a 4 digit integer Month is an integer 1 to 12 Day is an integer 1 to 31 depending on the month Front Panel Access System Time Date Set Date z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t S D 7 Error Information Query SYSTem ERRor NEXT
211. ctions Note that this does not affect the signal viewed on the analyzer Key Access Trig More TV Trig Setup TV Monitor When TV Monitor is pressed the selected Standard is used to determine the proper setup of the analyzer hardware for presentation of the TV picture When the TV picture is active and on the display pressing a key that normally accesses a menu instead restores the original ESA graphical display with the selected menu enabled The active function remains active and can be adjusted while the picture is displayed Key Access Trig More TV Trig Setup NOTE The color decoding circuitry is always enabled even for weak and monochrome signals RF Burst Option B7E RF Communications Hardware only Accesses the setup functions Setup for RF burst trigger Refer to Volume 2 for more information about the Burst Power measurement Key Access Trig More Trigger Level au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E 170 Chapter2 Abs Rel Frequency Selectivity On Off Narrow Pulse Discriminator On Off Chapter 2 Front Panel Key Reference Trig Allows you to set the trigger level to a level relative to the peak of the burst or to an absolute value Key Access Trig More RF Burst Setup Allows you to turn frequency selectivity on or off With Frequency Selectivity Off selected the trigger occurs on the signal prior to the resolution bandwidth filter When Frequency Selectivity
212. cuitry is realigned Some of the switching of the analyzer circuitry is done using relays It is the rapid switching of these relays during retrace that causes the clicking sounds To eliminate the clicking sounds turn the auto alignment off by pressing System Alignments Auto Align Off When this is done the Align Now All function should be performed periodically Refer to the appropriate Specifications and Characteristics chapter of your Specifications Guide for more information on how often to perform Align Now All when the auto alignment is off Align Now Accesses the Align Now menu keys and immediately executes an alignment cycle of the selected system s Menu key selections include Key Access System Alignments All Initiates the alignment of all systems Except the Option 1DN Tracking Generator for models E4402B E4403B E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B Key Access System Alignments Align Now RF Ext Cable Initiates the alignment of the RF system with a cable connected from AMPTD REF OUT to INPUT 50 Q Models E4402B E4403B E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B Key Access System Alignments Align Now RF Initiates the alignment of the RF system Models E4401B and E4411B only This Alignment uses an Internal Signal Source Key Access System Alignments Align Now TG Ext Cable Initiates the alignment of the tracking generator only when the Option 1DN is installed in Agilent E4402B E4403B E4404B E4405B
213. d measurement at the beginning If the measurement is active it will stop it as soon as possible and restart it from the beginning Key Access Front panel key It can also be found under Meas Control E 9 E D S E Ei m Si ei E E D Ba 5 x e 128 Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference Return Return Returns you to the previous menu Repeated presses of this key move back through previously selected menus including previous pages selected by the MORE key NOTE When a menu requiring a yes or no key press has been accessed the Return key will not respond NOTE When entering an alphanumeric value a screen title or filename pressing Return terminates the entry m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Chapter 2 129 au 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E E D Ba 5 x e NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Save Save Executes a save operation as though you were in the File Save menu and had pressed Save Now If you have previously used the File Save Save Now keys to setup and save a file the Save hardkey will save your file in the same format and to the same location using a new automatically generated filename If you have not saved a file since power on a state file STA format will be saved to the C drive For example if you use the File Save menu to configure the analyzer to save Trace 1 in CSN format on the C drive us
214. d respond to service requests it should instruct the controller to perform a serial poll when the GPIB SRQ line is set true Each device on the bus returns the contents of its status byte register in response to this poll The device whose RQS bit is set to 1 is the device that requested service Chapter 4 199 K e ES E 2 Si ys CH K amp wn Ka z D E Ki On E EI Ka E 2 Ki S Ke Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions NOTE When you read the analyzer status byte register with a serial poll the RQS bit is reset to 0 Other bits in the register are not affected Restarting a measurement with the INITiate command can cause the measuring bit to pulse low A low pulse causes an SRQ if the status register is configured to SRQ upon end of measurement To avoid this perform the following steps 1 Set INITiate CONTinuous off 2 Set enable the status registers 3 Restart the measurement send INITiate Example of Monitoring Conditions Using the STATus Command Use the following steps to monitor a specific condition Determine which register contains the bit that reports the condition Send the unique SCPI query that reads that register Examine the bit to see if the condition has changed Act upon the cause of the condition and the SRQ to re enable the method Boos ks The examples below show how to use the STATus comm
215. d used by Agilent Technologies under license 262 Chapter 5 NOTE NOTE Remote Command Reference CALibration Subsystem Query the Internal or External Frequency Reference CALibration FREQuency REFerence This is a query only It reports the location of where the instrument frequency reference is generated Range INT or EXT Coarse Adjust the Frequency Reference CALibration FREQuency REFerence COARse setting CALibration FREQuency REFerence COARse Allows coarse adjustment of the internal 10 MHz reference oscillator timebase of the analyzer CALibration ALL is required after COARse is set Range Integer 0 to 255 Front Panel Access System Alignments Time Base Coarse Fine Adjust the Frequency Reference CALibration FREQuency REFerence FINE setting CALibration FREQuency REFerence FINE Allows fine adjustment of the analyzer internal 10 MHz reference oscillator timebase z S et Q E E 5 Hi Iz E 5 S c c D oO oO CALibration ALL is required after FINE is set Range Integer 0 to 255 Front Panel Access System Alignments Time Base Fine Select the Frequency Corrections CALibration FREQuency STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALibration FREQuency STATe Turns on or off the frequency corrections Chapter 5 263 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference CALibration
216. dE det eee X GRE X ER EE Rr E Y cV XU Pee OY 386 29 E a S e S E 5 E gt Q E un E S g E Q KE S z List of Commands TRIGeet SEQuence ViDeo LE Vel FREQUCHCY 22 EEE rr Rx Rex Y EE AN ek ed x Y ex x ded SS 387 TRIGeet SEQuence VIDeo LEVeEPREQUEDCV 2 ccdveaie ee anes RR EYE RAE YG P CCE RR EGER CE ERAT 387 Rigger E Aere VIDSOILE VO aide RR PER RA EE ERI DERE bab Ed pog 386 UNIT POWer DBMIDBMVIDBUVIDBUAIVIWIA 2 0 II eect n ees 388 db EE 388 Pee Se TARD MEn iE Le ov oe ee aes PP E e ti eiu pridie Riddim 301 BR es quio b bd deb d ebdocpioRq eb E be EQ ba qu Eq e dud reqi s tbq bot 301 SEN E AVERS CILE iia e ER Y ieee BING RK EE 302 SENSE AVERage COLINE EH cesa eere e acces CER D RE wei dE FG dA ded d ed ORE 302 SENSE AY BRage CDU Lo useshscebet CERES KRRSC REESE RE RN E RES EESOEEESexE CV CERE RE 302 SENSe AVERage T YPE VIDGoIR MS yc cw enc geo bo ERG bU EE EELER G4 pe Sube E RO ERA 304 LESENSeEAVEBage T YPERSETCHORBIONEOH EE 303 DESENSe AVER ape TYPE AUTO 6 1cind cect Gere EE Uer PERSP VR RR Ure Ree Ra qe Ree EEE 303 PSENSe AVERASGIYPBT EE 304 PENSE AYERS Y PET ee Egger Cr qe Rebeca pepe xd 304 ESENSep AVERAase S TAXIS OPPIOBIBIL suae EIERE ke een RR EGER RR ER RC dE A 302 bSEN Se AVIERaSe S KEE 302 SENSe BAND widthblBWIDth VIDeo efteqe eerren tractarie es ert ker y Rr REOR DEA E 306 SENSe BANDwidthlBWIDth VIDeo AUTO OFFIONIOI lssseeseeee BRI
217. data and displays the result in Trace 1 Since two measurements are taken for each display cycle the display update rate is reduced Key Access Input Output Input Mixer Signal ID Mode Allows the analyzer in a two sweep sequence to place data from the first sweep in Trace 1 and data from the second frequency shifted sweep in Trace 2 Signal responses of Trace 1 and Trace 2 having the same horizontal position are considered to be in the current band and therefore can be analyzed with the amplitude and frequency measurement systems of the analyzer All other responses are invalid and should be ignored Key Access Input Output Input Mixer Signal ID Mode Accesses the Mixer Config menu keys allowing you to manually set the harmonic control the preselected mixers and adjust the internal bias source for use with mixers requiring bias Key Access Input Output Input Mixer Harmonic Auto Man The harmonic value with its associated sign is automatically determined from the Ext Mix Band selected when in Harmonic Auto mode Harmonic Man allows you to enter a harmonic value when required If the harmonic mode for the external mixer is listed as 8 for example enter the harmonic number as 8 The minus sign indicates that the tuned frequency is below the desired LO harmonic by the IF of 321 4 MHz Similarly if the harmonic mode of the 103 S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E
218. ddressed instruments to assume a cleared condition The definition of clear is unique for each instrument sometimes called clear reset control send a vd EI ke o E B 5 ge g z a E E 5 e E N In the Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzer clear does the following 1 Clears the Input Buffer and the Output Queue 2 Resets the parser 3 Clears any current operations such as OPC i e returns the device to Operation Complete Query Idle State and Operation Complete Command Idle State 4 Aborts resumes the current sweep Anoutput function that is used to send function commands and data commands from the controller to the addressed instrument sometimes called output control convert image iobuffer transfer Anenter function that is the complement of the output function and is used to transfer data from the addressed instrument to the controller sometimes called enter convert image iobuffer on timeout set timeout transfer Chapter 3 189 E E E E KI S E 2 E E g S S E En S 2 Ba Programming Fundamentals Overview of RS 232 Option 1AX Overview of RS 232 Option 1A X Serial interface programming techniques are similar to most general I O applications Due to the asynchronous nature of serial I O operations special care must be exercised to ensure that data is not lost by sending to another device before the device is ready to receive Modem line hands
219. description of any front panel or menu key After pressing Help an explanation of the next key pressed will appear on the display After the information is displayed press any key to remove the help window Pressing ESC allows you to remove the help window without changing functions m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be e 5 be bi Chapter 2 99 E 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Input Z Corr 509 75 Coupling ACDC Table 2 1 CAUTION Front Panel Key Reference Input Output Input Output Sets the input impedance for voltage to power conversions The impedance you select is for computational purposes only since the actual impedance is set by internal hardware to 50 Q except for Option 1DP The default is 50 Q 75 Q with Option 1DP Setting the computational input impedance to 75 2 is useful when using a 75 Q to 50 Q adapter to measure a 75 Q device on an analyzer having a 50 Q input impedance Key Access Input Output Only available in Agilent models E4402B or E4407B with Option UKB and E4404B or E4405B Specifies alternating current ac or direct current dc coupling at the analyzer input Selecting ac coupling blocks any dc voltage at the analyzer input but also decreases the frequency range of the analyzer Input coupling is set to ac by an instrument preset With Preset Type set to Factory Some amplitude specifications apply only when cou
220. digitization circuitry for presentation of the TV picture Requires Option BAA and B7B Factory Preset and RST Off History Added TV trigger mode with firmware revision A 03 00 Front Panel Access Trig TV Trig Setup TV Monitor 384 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem Set the Video Waveform Sync Pulse Direction TRIGger SEQuence TV SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence TV SLOPe This command defines the direction of the sync pulse on the TV video waveform Normal baseband video has sync pulses on the bottom of the waveform use the NEG parameter for more negative voltage However when the analyzer is used to demodulate an NTSC or PAL TV RF carrier the detected video waveform is upside down with sync pulses on the top of the waveform use the POS parameter for more positive voltage When the analyzer is used to demodulate a SECAM TV RF carrier the detected video waveform has normal polarity use the NEG parameter Factory Preset and RST POSitive History Added TV trigger mode with firmware revision A 03 00 Front Panel Access Trig TV Trig Setup Sync Pos Neg Select TV Signal Path TRIGger SEQuence TV SOURce SANalyzer EXTernal TRIGger SEQuence TV SOURce This command is used to select between the internal spectrum analyzer signal path the detected video is fed to the TV trigger or the EXT VIDEO IN connector on the analyzer rear panel Requires Opti
221. ds Frequency Ranges are Band Frequency Range 1 2 85 6 7 GHz 2 6 2 13 2 GHz 3 12 8 19 2 GHz 4 18 7 26 5 GHz Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Agilent E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B only Allows manual adjustment of the preselector frequency to optimize its response on the signal of interest By changing the Presel Adjust the center of the preselector filter can be moved in frequency The signal of interest will appear to change in amplitude with the frequency response of the preselector filter Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Accesses the menu keys that change the amplitude units Amplitude units are maintained for both logarithmic and linear modes The amplitude units can be changed by pressing dBm dBmV dBuV dBuA Watts Volts and Amps This key is unavailable when FM Demod and Demod View are on Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Adds an offset value to the displayed reference level Reference level offsets are only entered by using the numeric keypad Entering an offset does not affect the Chapter 2 39 S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q E 9 E D E E Ei m z E D Ba 5 x e Int Preamp On Off Corrections Front Panel Key Reference AMPLITUDE Y Scale trace or the attenuation value Reference level offsets are used when gain or loss occurs between a device under test and the analyzer input Thus the signal level measured by the a
222. e Use the tab keys or softkey menu to navigate the editor When defining a new segment you may use the numeric keypad to set values Pressing Enter places the value in the table and highlights the next parameter available for modification The order of the segments may change when you enter center frequency or span because the sequence is based upon increasing start frequency Various parameters are coupled to ensure accurate measurements You will not be able to enter a value that would result in a measurement that is uncalibrated Amplitude parameters are common to all segments and are defined via the amplitude softkey menu Refer to AMPLITUDE Y Scale on page 38 for more information The data in the segmented sweep table is retained through a power cycle Table values can only be deleted by the Delete keys described below To exit the editor press any key except Print Help and the viewing angle adjustments Exiting the editor does not turn off segmented sweep Segmented Off must be selected m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Chapter 2 147 au 9 E D E E Ei m z E E D Ba 5 x E NOTE NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Sweep Interaction with Other Analyzer Functions Certain conditions prevent segmented sweep from being activated while others cause this mode to be turned off For analyzers with Option AYZ the mixer frequency range Input In
223. e Ig Power On Date Format Preset DMY Next Page Preset Type z o X Time Date Set Time Factory Alignments Set Date Auto Align Verbose SCPI All On Remote Port o Clear Error Queue 9 y 8 8 Ji E S zm nm ll Color Palette Alignments Align Now Timebase Default Auto Align All Coarse Vision Impair 1 Fine zu n Align Now Ext Cable Freq Correct TG a Color Palette Ext Cable Vision Impair 2 o 3 O E Timebase FM Demod c Optical Filter Diagnostics Monochrome Load Defaults Restore Sys Defaults 2of3 pl er E System Diagnostics Licensing Personalities Uninstall Option Prev Page Prev Page e L D Personalities License Key Next Page Next Page Activate License Delete License Front Panel Test Show Licenses Uninstall Uninstall Now E Y 2 os lt a 2215 3 woo bd c To Alpha Editor 1 a Agilent E4402B E4403B E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B with Option 1DN only b For Service menus refer to the ESA Spectrum Analyzers Service Guide c Available only with Option BAA FM Demodulation d Agilent ESA E series only E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B and E4407B e Grayed out when on the last page or if there is only one page f Grayed out when on the first page or if there is only one page An active function which allows data entry E I4 Ei e EI
224. e The desktop computer program must be able to properly interpret the meaning of a break and take appropriate action Chapter 3 191 a vd EI ke o E B 5 ge g z a E E 5 e E N Programming Fundamentals Overview of RS 232 Option 1AX E S E E KI S E 2 E E g S S E En S 2 Ba 192 Chapter3 K ES 2 Si ys CH K Lg a 4 Status Registers This chapter contains a comprehensive description of status registers explaining what status registers are and how to use them so you can use a program to monitor the instrument Information about all of the bits of the status registers is also provided 193 Ka D D E Ki On E EI Ka E 2 Ki S Ke Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Programs often need to detect and manage error conditions or changes in analyzer status Agilent ESA products allow this function to be performed using status registers You can determine the state of certain analyzer hardware and firmware events and conditions by programming the status register system Refer to Figure 4 1 The status system is comprised of multiple registers arranged in a hierarchical order The service request enable register is at the top of the hierarchy and contains the general status information
225. e Average detector is selected and the amplitude scale is linear the fastest sweet time is 8 milliseconds The Peak detector displays the maximum of the signal within the bucket The Sample detector displays the instantaneous level of the signal at the time of the sampling Chapter 2 53 S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Front Panel Key Reference Auto Couple The Negative Peak detector displays the minimum of the signal within the bucket Neither average nor sample detectors measure amplitudes of CW signals as accurately as peak because they may not find a spectral component s true peak but they do measure noise without the biases of peak detection The detector in use is indicated on the left side of the display A will appear next to it if the detector has been manually selected Key Access Auto Couple Auto The system selects peak detection as the default but if a condition arises where a different type of detection scheme provides greater accuracy the system will use the alternate scheme For example when using the Marker Noise function Auto mode selects Average detection for Res BWs 300 Hz and Sample for Res BWs lt 300 Hz as shown in Figure 2 1 Key Access Auto Couple Detector Auto Man E 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E E D Ba 5 z e 54 Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference Auto Couple Figure 2 1 Detector Auto Select
226. e Refer to Marker on page 105 for a more complete explanation of this function Position selects a normal marker that can be positioned on a trace and from Chapter 5 249 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 Remote Command Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection which trace information will be generated Delta activates a pair of markers one of which is fixed at the current marker location The other marker can then be moved around on the trace The marker readout shows the difference between the two markers Band activates a pair of band markers where each marker can be independently positioned on the trace The marker readout shows the difference between the two markers The repeatability of your band power marker measurement can be impacted by the current number of sweep points being used If you only have a few sweep points in the measurement band of interest then small changes will have a direct impact on the measurement result Increasing your number of sweep points will decrease that affect and improve the repeatability Span activates a pair of span markers where the marker positioning is controlled by changing the span and or center frequency between the two markers The marker readout shows the difference between the two markers Remarks If a marker is not active when the mode is queried OTT will be returned Front Panel Access Marker Normal Marker Delta Marker Delt
227. e and removes it from the display The selected trace register will not be updated as the analyzer sweeps This function is activated for traces 2 and 3 at power on and by pressing Preset when Preset Type is set to Factory Key Access Trace View Accesses the following Operations menu keys Key Access Trace View More 12 Exchanges the contents of the trace 1 register with the trace 2 register and puts trace 1 and 2 in view mode Key Access Trace View More Operations 2 DL2 Subtracts the display line from trace 2 and places the result in trace 2 and puts trace 2 in view mode The 2 DL 2 function is a math operation Key Access Trace View More Operations 203 Exchanges the contents of trace 2 with trace 3 and puts trace 2 and 3 in view mode Key Access Trace View More Operations 153 Copies trace 1 into trace 3 and puts trace 3 in view mode Key Access Trace View More Operations 253 Copies trace 2 into trace 3 and puts trace 3 in view mode Key Access Trace View More Operations Accesses the following Normalize menu keys Key Access Trace View More 164 Chapter2 Store Ref 1 3 Normalize On Off Front Panel Key Reference Trace View Copies trace 1 into trace 3 Store Ref 1 3 must be pressed before pressing Normalize On If Normalize On is pressed before Store Ref 1 3 the error message Store reference trace before turning on Normalize is displayed in the status line however Norm
228. e top window that is between the Zone Markers The span of the bottom window is 1046 of the span of the top window You can change the default zone frequency and zone span values using the Zone Center and Zone Span keys When first activated both windows have the same center frequency The bottom window is active and the sweep time resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth have been coupled to the bottom window span There are separate annotations for frequency bandwidth sweep time reference level amplitude scale and scale div for each window The values for these parameters can be changed for each window independently To activate the top window press the Next Window key located below the display The active window is distinguished by a green border Only the active window will have a sweep taken and updated to the display When the active window is toggled the state for the active window 1s saved and the last state of the inactive window is recalled When the window becomes inactive its data invalid indicator will appear on the display The data invalid indicator will remain until the window becomes the active window and a complete sweep has been executed Pressing Zoom will change to a one window display showing only the active window Pressing Zoom again will return you to the two window display Pressing Zone Off will return you to a one window display of the active window Key Access SPAN X Scale Zone NOTE Pressing Zoom
229. e EE 367 Query Instrument OPON iuekskekkeDeRERHCPRETHERE tie Eee Rede SEU adde dd en 367 Power Om Elapsed Tue uices dod Sco eb eee RE UH Ros cde lebe ael obice Bekele d 367 lo X4 TUNE RTT 368 Power D6 S euo cscbbeseebceREE ARES E KS REPE Ex QUU IM ed Mie uad Ree gai 368 Enable D video Sweep Quint POS 22e 9r ao Ceo Ee Rd ERR Reb EEN nies 368 lj Tr M n 369 Persistent State eet AE EE EELER EE EERE 369 Preset TVPG cosas RR CREER S Ed RE PRO de a edet duci ECR Ae A een bees RE E E 369 Save Uber EE 370 Speaker EE 370 SEET 370 SCPL VEIOUN QUUSPE ao V eb eot bored e ebd EE bp Ubebeb ded hee ide 370 TRACE SUDSPSIOHL uenire er pERODI V RCPPRERVE GR qe Res E Ced a pee ROCK lee RUR bol 37 BI Ai o ccm 371 Transist Tiaee Data 421 04 ate Ed e RR E V dee be Sube e PER Edd Puer rad 371 E 342 Tace ONDE EE 373 Meon Trice Dita so dochecdevegbekt deka cased ee be See I RS bea dau dade E 313 Query the Sonal Peaks EE EE IQ CE DIU PEE RP d Rire oe debe 373 Query mmber of Peaks Pound 23 sesce E re RE CRERE RC RR Are SE EROS 373 Peak Sorna 1oosdos dens EE SSS EGRLELR SRE EEL SORES DERE SEH BEDE 374 SOON EE 374 Nupibstr al Potts E EEN 376 Trace Mam EE 376 Trace Math Subitact From Display Line 22 45 2c 4000sh rue eR ER Vac RR 376 Delon Trace Display Mod ioc ssi go Le EI E REFER CREER ERE e RE ELE EE X RE 317 TRIGSer SUDSYSIOIR Lido oH BE EES ORO OR EE Eech Cr ER eoe 378 External Trigger Line and TY Trigger Delay Value ee
230. e LLINe Subsection Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Display Limits Limit 1 2 Margin On Off Control Limit Line Testing CALCulate LLINe 1 2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 STATe Turns limit line testing on off The limit and margin will only be tested if they are displayed Use CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DISPlay to turn on the display of limit lines and CALCulate LLINe 1 2 MARGin STATe to turn on the display of margins If margin and limit display are both turned off limit test is automatically turned off Use CcALCulate LLINe 1 2 FAIL to return the state of pass or fail after limit line state has been turned on Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Display Limits Limit 1 2 Limit On Off Select the Type of Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 2 TYPE UPPer LOWer CALCulate LLINe 1 2 TYPE Sets a limit line to be either an upper or lower type limit line An upper line will be used as the maximum allowable value when comparing with the data A lower limit line defines the minimum value Factory Preset and RST Upper not affected by preset Remarks If a margin has already been set for this limit line and this command is used to change the limit type then the margin value is reset to 0 dB Front Panel Access Display Limits Limit 1 2 Type Upper Lower Chapter 5 245 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S S c D 7 oO au 9 E D G
231. e Minimize DUT instrument setup changes below Minimize DUT instrument setup changes Some instrument setup parameters are common to multiple measurements You should look at your measurement process with a focus on minimizing setup changes If your test process involves nested loops make sure that the inner most loop is the fastest Also check if the loops could be nested in a different order to reduce the number of parameter changes as you step through the test Are you are using the pre configured Measurements MEASURE key Remember that if you have already set your Meas Setup parameters for a measurement and you want to make another one of these measurements later use READ lt meas gt The MEASure lt meas gt command resets all the settings to the defaults while READ changes back to that measurement without changing the setup parameters from the previous use Are you are using the pre configured Measurements MEASURE key Also remember that Mode Setup parameters remain constant across all the measurements such as center channel frequency amplitude radio standard input selection trigger setup You don t have to re initialize them each time you change to a different measurement Using an Option Mode Minimize the number of GPIB transactions When you are using the GPIB for control of your instrument each transaction requires driver overhead and bus handshaking so minimizing these transactions reduces the time us
232. e Output Power to Step Automatically SOURce POWer STEP AUTO OFF ON O 1 SOURCe POWer STEP AUTO Specifies the source power step size to be one vertical scale division when in logarithmic scale or 10 dB when in linear scale Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access Source Amptd Step Auto Man Set the Output Power Step Size SOURCe POWer STEP INCRement ampl SOURce POWer STEP INCRement Specifies the source power step size Default Unit dB 346 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference SOURce Subsystem Front Panel Access Source Amptd Step Auto Man Set the Source Sweep Power Range SOURce POWer SWEep rel ampl gt SOURce POWer SWEep Specifies the range of power levels through which the source output will sweep Use SOURce POWer STARt to set the power level at the start of the power sweep See also SOURce POWer SPAN Factory Preset and RST 0 dB Range 0 dB to 20 dB Default Unit dB Front Panel Access Source Power Sweep On Off Output Power Tracking SOURce POWer TRCKing lt integer gt SOURCe POWer TRCKing Adjusts the tracking of the source output with the spectrum analyzer sweep in the present resolution bandwidth Factory Preset and RST This command is persistent The term persistent means that the command retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Range Integer 0 to 4095 Remarks This command is not needed with the 1 5
233. e calibration Resolution bandwidth is also related to span As span is decreased the resolution bandwidth is decreased As the resolution bandwidth changes the video bandwidth if in auto couple mode changes to maintain the VBW RBW ratio With firmware A 08 00 and greater in zero span the auto manual function of this key is not applicable When Res BW Auto is selected in non zero span any changes to Res BW while in zero span will revert to the Auto value when you return to non zero span When Res BW Man is selected in non zero span any changes to Res BW while in zero span will be maintained when you return to non zero span A mark appears next to Res BW on the display when it is not coupled To recouple the resolution bandwidth press Res BW Auto or press Auto Couple Auto All The resolution bandwidth can be changed using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad Key Access BW Avg Changes the analyzer post detection filter from 30 Hz to 3 MHz in a 1 3 10 sequence using the knob step keys or the numeric keypad If an unavailable bandwidth is entered using the numeric keypad the closest available bandwidth in the 1 3 10 sequence is used Option 1DR provides additional 1 Hz 3 Hz and 10 Hz video bandwidths when the resolution bandwidth is lt 300 Hz As the video bandwidth is decreased the sweep time is increased to maintain amplitude calibration A mark appears next to VBW on the bottom of the an
234. e corresponding bit in the Operation Event register when that bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable lt integer gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Preset the Status Byte STATus PRESet Sets bits in most of the enable and transition registers to their default state It presets all the Transition Filters Enable Registers and the Error Event Queue Enable It has no effect on Event Registers Error Event Queue ESE and SRE Registers as described in IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 New York NY 1992 350 Chapter5 NOTE NOTE Remote Command Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection STATus QUEStionable Subsection This subsection controls the SCPI defined status reporting structures Questionable Calibration Condition STATus QUEStionable CALibration CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Questionable Calibration Enable STATus QUEStionable CALibration ENABle integer STATus QUEStionable CALibration ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable
235. e hue reie RACER Ras 256 CALCulate MARKer 1 DI34 X POSIGOn STARt lt param gt EE rh n rb RR YER RES 256 CALCulate MARKer 1 2134 X POSition START icona uasa dues re E heb d EE NEES 256 CALCulste MARK er 1 RBH X POSiGOon S TE W ueste REENEN 257 CALCulaie MARKern1 2BM X POSIN STOP sieri cscterierirerti reeta runtan RR ERA DEER EES 257 CALCU MARK e IBA X POSION A d eh echo E RR eaa Aae NEE dE dr 253 CALCulate MARKer 1 I2314 X READout FREQuencyITIMEITIMelPERiod 005 257 CALC wlan MARES TEE E E EE 297 ALC ulate MAR Ber BX SPAN lt param gt ugue ee dore bd DERE dree S Cb vxo vive dodo dog e 258 CALC MARBKeqIIZIHSX SPAN aoecesasecxkeer besehbuwtx es ES ERR E FATE ERA RERO ad 258 CALC wate MAR Ken EAS TARE Cparatib iiopaskRrieseRbic ux4ee RXonbERGORREREGX GA RR Rue 258 CALCU MARK er LIZA STAR sscrres tirer seres Ed obi ienei ribe des bi et YE EAR 258 CALCulate MARKer I DI3I4 X S TOP patti EELER RR ER RR ERRARE Ru RE EIER es 258 CAL E RR REN EE 258 CALCU MARK Gt ZBI EE 253 CALC UME MARKA IVY EE 259 CALCHI MAR Ker RIES RE ON NEE 222 CAN alte MAR Ker t i22 SETERLENe uu ico rine E EIER REP E ERR EC EIER epa 252 CARK ulate Wisk Kern E aE SPAN EE 252 C ALCulatecMABReT II253HI SET S TARE Lor eR ER GO RR ER CORR UC Re ER I AT 232 CALCU MAR Kern TIPDBBISETESTBP uenkkbeektbetkRbQec eA te EE RUOERRSTER EAT RERECEPENCREC E 253 X ALCUlatc MARKemnl 25H SETDSIOP serris resres boas Seo ibai natrat erab ERROR 233
236. e only with Option B7E RF Communications Hardware An active function which allows data entry pirra 414 Chapter 6 Index Symbols Local key 151 CLS command 195 ESE command 205 SRE command 202 STB command 202 TST query 235 Display Line key 119 Numerics 3 dB bandwidth command 237 A abort command 236 ac input coupling command 287 adjusting the display 173 Align Now 154 alignment all assemblies 235 261 commands 261 FM demodulation assembly 262 load default values 155 Alignments key 153 All but RF 153 Alpha Editor menu map 391 AM demodulation 313 on off 314 AM activate AM demodulation 68 amplitude correction data merging 310 data setting 309 deleting 309 external amplifier 312 set deleting 311 set turning on off 311 setting interpolation 311 turning on off 309 maximizing input signal 331 scaling 274 Amplitude Display Edit menu 73 amplitude corrections Antenna key 40 Other key 45 Amplitude Corrections menu map 393 amplitude interpolation 75 Amplitude key 49 amplitude correction point for other than antenna or cable 47 antenna corrections point 42 cable amplitude corrections 45 Amplitude menu map 392 Amplitude On Off 132 amplitude scale 38 amplitude units 39 AMPLITUDE Y Scale menu 392 amplitude correction factors 40 Amptd Interp Log Lin 75 Amptd Offset 133 Amptd Ref f 50 MHz On Off 101 Amptd Ref Out 250 MHz On Off
237. e registers and their effects are described under How Do You Access the Status Registers in this chapter and in the beginning of Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference in this guide Refer to the right hand part of the STATus QUEStionable register while reading the following register descriptions Condition Register A condition register continuously monitors the hardware and firmware status of the analyzer There is no latching or buffering for a condition register Negative S Transition S Filter A negative transition filter specifies the bits in the condition register that will set E corresponding bits in the event register when the condition bit changes from S 1 to 0 2 Positive Transition Filter A positive transition filter specifies the bits in the condition register that will set corresponding bits in the event register when the condition bit changes from 0 to 1 Event Register An event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the positive and negative transition filters Bits in the event register are latched and once set they remain set until cleared by either querying the register contents or sending the CLS command Event Enable Register An event enable register specifies the bits in the event register that can generate a summary bit Summary bits are in turn used by the status byte register Chapter 4 195 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyz
238. e setting of the spectrum analyzer NOTE Changing this setting deletes all existing limit data from the analyzer In other words if a limit line has already been defined changing the type clears the existing limit line 240 Chapter 5 NOTE Remote Command Reference CALCulate LLINe Subsection When using the CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain TIME command do not use the CALCulate LLINe 1 2 CONTrol INTerpolate TYPE LOGarithmic command An error will result because this combination attempts to determine the log of zero which is undefined Factory Preset and RST Not affected by Preset Remarks For TIME the limit line segments are placed on the spectrum analyzer display with respect to the sweep time setting of the analyzer with 0 at the left edge of the display For FREQuency segments are placed according to the frequency that is specified for each segment Front Panel Access Display Limits X Axis Units Freq Time Control Limit Line Frequency Interpolation CALCulate LLINe 1 2 CONTrol INTerpolate TYPE LOGarithmic LINear CALCulate LLINe 1 2 CONTrol INTerpolate TYPE Selects the type of interpolation done for the frequency values of the designated limit line when comparing to measured data This only applies in the frequency domain This function does not work in zero span when the analyzer is in the time domain Remarks Once this function is defined the selected type is persistent
239. eans the signal will not be at the center of the analyzer s RBW The tracking peak process will minimize this error It can be done automatically with Tracking Peak or manually with Man Track Adj With very narrow RBWs the manual process may be faster Tracking error is more of a problem when using narrow RBWs or testing a device under test DUT with high Q With a high Q DUT the tracking generator signal may need to be connected directly to the input of the analyzer rather than through the DUT while you do the tracking peak For the best measurement accuracy a tracking peak should be done whenever you reduce the analyzer RBW especially if the amplitude decreases Key Access Source More Agilent E4402B E4403B E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B only Allows you to adjust the frequency of the tracking generator oscillator manually using the step keys knob or numeric keypad The tracking adjust is tuned to maximize the amplitude of the trace Key Access Source More When Source is On resolution bandwidths 1 kHz are not available When the resolution bandwidth is 1 kHz Source may not be turned on Chapter 2 135 S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E NOTE Span Span Zoom NOTE NOTE NOTE Full Span Zero Span Front Panel Key Reference SPAN X Scale SPAN X Scale Thi
240. earch Type Excursion amp Threshold When Peak Search is set to Excursion amp Threshold a peak search places a marker on a peak that meets the Peak Excursion and Peak Threshold parameters If Peak Search Type is set to Excursion amp Threshold and no peak satisfies the selected parameters a marker is placed at the center of the trace and the error message No Peak Found will appear Refer to Show Errors on page 151 to remove the error message Key Access Peak Search More Search Criteria Peak Search Type Peak Table Accesses the following Peak Table menu keys Key Access Peak Search More 1 of 2 Peak Table 2 On Off Displays a list of up to ten signal peaks that is updated at the end F of each sweep The peaks can be sorted in order by descending E amplitude or by ascending frequency Peaks above or below the e display line can be excluded from the table The peak table g function works with trace 1 only E Key Access Search More Peak Table Bo E Peak Sort a Freq Amptd Switches the peak table sorting routine between listing the peaks 118 Chapter 2 Peak Readout Chapter 2 Front Panel Key Reference Peak Search in order by descending amplitude or by ascending frequency Key Access Search More Peak Table Accesses the following Peak Readout menu keys Key Access Search More Peak Table Normal Shows up to ten signal peaks Key Access Search More Peak Table Peak Readout Display Line Shows only peaks abo
241. ection Default Unit Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are positioned Front Panel Access Marker active marker Delta Pair Marker Read Y Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 v Read the current Y value for the designated marker or delta on its assigned trace The value is in the Y axis units for the current trace which is often dBm Default Unit Matches the units of the trace on which the marker is positioned Remarks This command can be used to read the results of marker functions such as band power and noise that are displayed in the marker value field on the analyzer z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 7 Chapter 5 259 2 9 E D E E E EI ki E Q 2 E EI Remote Command Reference CALCulate NTData Subsection CALCulate NTData Subsection Normalize the Trace Data CALCulate NTData STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate NTData STATe One sweep of trace data is copied to trace 3 firmware version greater then 4 03 03 NRML in firmware version less than or equal to A 03 03 which is used as the reference trace Then for all subsequent trace sweeps display trace 1 data collected into trace 1 data in trace 3 firmware version greater than A 03 03 NRML in firmware version less than or equal to A 03 03 Front Panel Access View Trace Normalize Normalize On Off 260 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference CALi
242. ection sets are disabled Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks To turn On or Off an individual correction set use SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 STATe Front Panel Access Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Antenna Correction On Off Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Cable Correction On Off Gi 2 5 er Q S E D Ki E Gi ge S S P D O D Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Other Correction On Off Amplitude Y Scale Corrections User Correction On Off Set Amplitude Correction Data SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DATA freq rel ampl freq rel ampl SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DATA Sets the amplitude correction data These frequency amplitude corrections will be applied to the displayed data to correct for system losses gains outside the analyzer Four different sets of correction data can be stored Example CORR CSET1 DATA Chapter 5 309 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference SENSe CORRection Subsection 900E6 0 3 1 0E9 0 35 1 3E9 0 2 Range 200 points per set Default Unit There are no units on the frequency and amplitude pairs They must be entered in hertz Hz and decibels dB Remarks CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are as follows CSET or CSET1 is Antenna CSET2 is Cable CSET3 is Other CSETA is User Front Panel Access Amplitude Y Scale Correcti
243. ections in preparation to save them in a file for retrieval at a future date Corrections provide a way to adjust the trace display for preset gain factors such as for cable loss A correction set may hold up to 200 points Pressing Corrections activates the Source key Refer to the Source key description Key Access File Save Type More Measurement Results Displays all previously saved measurement results files and detects the current measurement results in preparation to save them in a file for retrieval at a future date Measurement results files are saved in CSV format for importing into spreadsheets Key Access File Save Type More When Type is set to Trace Format allows you to save a trace accompanied by the analyzer state The CSV format is readable by a spreadsheet on your PC but cannot be loaded back into the analyzer The TRC format cannot be loaded into a PC but can be loaded back into the analyzer TRC files include the state of the analyzer and restore all settings when loaded When Type is set to Screen Format allows you to choose between bitmap and metafile formats Bitmap saves the screen image in Graphics Interchange Format GIF and Metafile saves the screen image in Windows Metafile Format WMF Reverse Bitmap and Reverse Metafile turn black backgrounds to white 84 1 Microsoft is a U S registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Chapter2 NOTE Source Name Front Panel Ke
244. ectory name will appear on your display After a successful delete the message XXXXXX file deleted where XXXXXX is the filename will appear in the status line on your display Key Access File Delete Allows you to select the type of file you want to delete Key Access File Delete All Displays all files you may wish to delete Key Access File Delete Type Setup Displays all setup files you may wish to delete SET A Setup file is a complete state of instrument parameters including traces states limits and corrections Key Access File Delete Type State Displays all state files you may wish to delete STA Key Access File Delete Type Trace Displays all trace files you may wish to delete TRC and CSV Key Access File Delete Type Limits Displays all limits files you may wish to delete LIM Key Access File Delete Type Chapter 2 Copy Sort Dir Up Dir Select Front Panel Key Reference File Screen Displays all screen files you may wish to delete GIF and WMF Key Access File Delete Type Corrections Displays all corrections files you may wish to delete CBL ANT OTH AMP Key Access File Delete Type More Measurement Results Displays all previously saved measurement results files you may wish to delete Measurement results files are saved in CSV format for importing into spreadsheets Key Access File Delete Type More Sort accesses a menu of keys that
245. ectral component sinusoid Place a normal marker on the signal press Delta place the delta marker in the noise and activate Marker Noise see below The indicated amplitude difference is signal to noise Hz Enters a mode that allows adjustment of both the Ref start and Delta stop markers independently Pressing Delta Pair toggles between the reference and delta markers The start marker number is indicated with a number and an R above the marker for example 1R and the delta marker is indicated with a marker number This mode is useful in functions such as Band Power For information on using this function while in segmented sweep refer to Interaction with Other Analyzer Functions in the segmented sweep section of this chapter which begins on Segmented on page 145 Key Access Marker Ref and Delta markers maintain their displayed x axis location but not their frequency values when you change a parameter that redefines the x axis scale Reset these markers when parameters such as Span or Center Freq are changed Enters a mode that allows adjustment of both the ref and delta markers Pressing Span Pair toggles between the span and center markers The start marker number is indicated with a number and an R above the marker for example 1R and the stop marker is indicated with a marker number Adjusting the span changes the frequency difference between the two markers while maintaining the midpoint between the two markers at a f
246. ed Ifyou are making the same measurement multiple times with small changes in the measurement setup use the single READ command It is faster than using INITiate and FETCh Chapter 3 185 E E E E KI S E 2 E E g S S E En S 2 Ba Programming Fundamentals Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line Multiple commands can be written on the same line reducing your code space requirement To do this Commands must be separated with a semicolon Ifthe commands are in different subsystems the key word for the new subsystem must be preceded by a colon Ifthe commands are in the same subsystem the full hierarchy of the command key words need not be included The second command can start at the same key word level as the command that was just executed SCPI Termination and Separator Syntax A terminator must be provided when an instrument is controlled using RS 232 Option 1A X There are several issues to be understood about choosing the proper SCPI terminator and separator when this is the case There is no current SCPI standard for RS 232 Although one intent of SCPI is to be interface independent END is only defined for IEEE 488 operation At the time of this writing the RS 232 terminator issue was in the process of being addressed in IEEE standard 1174 A semicolon is not a SCPI terminator it is a separator The purpose of the se
247. ed with mixers other than the HP Agilent 11970 Series or 11974 Series Mixers to manually choose the required LO harmonic This command is available only with Option AYZ External Mixing Refer also to commands INPut MIXer INTernal EXTernal and INPut MIXer TYPE PRESelected UNPReselect Factory Preset and RST AUTO Remarks The harmonic value with its associated sign is automatically determined from the external mixer band selected This is the AUTO mode For mixers other than the HP Agilent 11970 Series or 11974 Series an LO harmonic other than that determined in the AUTO mode may be required This is achieved using this command and related command SENSe MIXer HARMonic value Manually selecting a harmonic will remove any restrictions on Mixer Bias and Mixer Type and External Mixer Band will become USER Returning the Harmonic to AUTO will reset the band to A set Mixer Type to UNPReselect and turn Mixer Bias Off Front Panel Access Input Output or Input Input Mixer Mixer Config Harmonic Auto Man 328 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference SENSe PO Wer Subsection SENSe POWer Subsection Quasi peak Detector Gain SENSe POWer QPGain STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe POWer QPGain STATe Turns on or off the linear x10 gain stage in the quasi peak and average detector signal path This stage may be enabled disabled whenever the quasi peak or EMI average detector is first selected See SENSe DETector FU
248. eep times are usually much faster for swept response measurements Stimulus response auto coupled sweep times are typically valid in stimulus response measurements when the system s frequency span is less than 20 times the bandwidth of the device under test Key Access Sweep Requires Option 1D6 Time Gate Accesses the following menu keys that allow you to setup various gate parameters Key Access Sweep Gate On Off Requires Option 1D6 Time Gate Turns the gate function on and off When set to Gate On the video signal that is digitized is controlled by the gate circuitry The gate circuitry switches between two states When the gate is open the normal video signal of the analyzer is passed through the video filters to the peak detectors and digitizer of the analyzer When the gate is closed the video filters peak detectors and digitizer are given a signal at the bottom of the display The gate function requires that a gate trigger signal be connected to the GATE TRIG EXT TRIG IN TTL input on the rear panel When the gate function is on the state of the gate appears at the GATE HI SWP OUT TTL rear panel connector A TTL high output indicates that the gate is open The gate out signal is only valid while the analyzer is sweeping Between sweeps the gate out signal is invalid You can adjust the gate delay and gate length using an oscilloscope to view the gate out signal The analyzer sweep time should be set to a large val
249. ei 3 dE LOT bese EEG Ks 312 External Ammpliner COttectloll 6 003 065 dE p ieiet peace dece ier RR DERE 312 SBNSe DEMod Subsecllol ioa ries p b GREGOR EE AEE Od kp Rea GELEGRA TER SERRE OE RS 313 11 Ka E E KI E o KE EI S E Contents 12 Type or KE E EE 313 Ebr PIED SE FN Demouulande SUEDE ai rep rr CRERSVERSDURRR PCHRERBCEESTCFRS E E e E 314 Dendadulitam LOM oueieoss pbe ERRARE EH PERRO Eb PERIERE DEM Cb b deb db 314 Demod Lg 8 Ae dek EE VERA qur RERO RP HERE Wee quee hae HOE de 315 uM Tren 315 SBNSe Me EE 316 Autonmiaic Detection Type Selectell ioocetxes Rea ENEE ERAN 316 Bh clu E reir PETITUM 316 Tops ot DRECHO torosi pre CREE e x Rex EP RET C RENI READS at View ol EMI KE EE 318 Immediate Auto Range EMI Detector A4 dE deer he E ER RR CR dr e RR 319 Agto Ranpe EMI Deet gege Ee E REGRESS WEES Wane Wane 319 Remove BENI Ome Rage Le cckccatechostobaveneekibeed check ecegesuineeeere oaks aly SPN Se FREQuency DS UL sores web eskibesetRbegd Geen TEE 321 ior dud is EE EE 321 Center Frequency Step Size AMMOIAUE E qusc e err RA ERE ERR VR ROSE d 321 Center Frequency Siep S126 EE derhi d torii LPs a E EE 322 Eregueticy Span i264 40 de dese Goeth erae E e dd 322 pull Frequency ODE aeueke se RE Ferpp pope T CIS E ER EE EE EE EE A 323 Last Erequeney Sal ed EE Ee Eege dee 323 OIabt PUEQUEME e ce caer E A E ERAS MERE Mu RIT RE RN RE pM Rae E RD ME 323 SOP FIE MR TT D E E EA As 324 Frequency Synthesis Mode E t
250. el d E4407B Option AYZ External Mixing only e Grayed out if Input Mixer is Int f Grayed out if the Tracking Generator is on z Source Amplitude On or Internal Preamp On S is selected e g Not available when Frequency Scale Type Log is selected pl729b E Ka Anactive function which allows data entry Chapter 6 403 Ka Ki E E E EI Menu Maps Marker Menu Marker Menu Select Marker Select Marker 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Marker Trace Normal Auo 1 2 3 Delta Pair Ref Delta Function Span Pair Marker Table Span Center On of More More 1 of 2 2 of 2 a Available in zero span with Marker Delta active An active function which allows data entry 404 Readout Function pl764b Chapter 6 Menu Maps Marker Menu Marker Menu Marker 3 Mkr CF Mkr CF Step Mkr Start Mkr Stop Mkr A Span Mkr Aa Ref Lvl a Not active when span is set to zero Zero Span b Active only when Marker Delta is selected pb910a sde nuaw Chapter 6 405 Ka e E E EI Menu Maps Peak Search Menu Peak Search Menu Peak Search Peak Search ones Pk Pk Search More 1 of 2 Meas Tools Peak Table Peak Tabl Peak Search On us of Peak Sort Next Pk Right Eid ge Next Pk Left Peak Readout Mkr CF Mkr Ref Lvl Function An active function which allows data entry a Unavailable in zero span 406 Search Param Peak Excursion Peak
251. elected as the active window See Zone On Off The span limit of the lower window is the same as the span limit of the analyzer The span for the lower window is not limited to the selected span of the upper window However if the frequency span of the lower window is outside of the span of the upper window the vertical span markers will not be displayed When the lower window is active the SPAN X Scale key will change Zone Span and any change to Zone Span while the lower window is active will change the span Key Access SPAN X Scale Zone NOTE Zone Span is not available when Segmented On is selected Zone Pk Right Zone Pk Left Chapter 2 Finds the next peak to the right of the zone center frequency on the upper window trace and then moves the zone so that it is centered around the new peak The zone span is not changed The center frequency of the lower window changes to reflect the new zone center frequency The lower window will not be updated until it is made active If no peak is found the zone will not be moved A signal must obey the parameters defined in Search Search Param to be identified as a peak signal Pressing Zone Pk Right will have no effect if the upper window is not the active window or if it is in zero span Key Access SPAN X Scale Zone Finds the next peak to the left of the zone center frequency on the upper window trace and then moves the zone so that it is centered around the new peak The z
252. em Front Panel Access Print Setup Color On Off Print a Hard Copy HCOPy IMMediate The entire screen is output to the parallel port Front Panel Access Print Form Feed the Print Item HCOPy ITEM FFEed IMMediate Sends the printer a command to form feed Front Panel Access Print Setup Eject Page Page Orientation HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait HCOPy PAGE ORIentation Specifies the orientation of the print Landscape mode is not presently supported for PCL 3 printers Factory Preset and RST The factory default is Landscape This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access Print Setup Orientation Landscape Print Setup Orientation Portrait Number of Items Printed on a Page HCOPy PAGE PRINts integer HCOPy PAGE PRINts 282 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference HCOPy Subsystem Sets the number of display print outputs sent to print on one piece of paper before a form feed is sent Factory Preset and RST The factory default is 1 This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Range Integer 1 or 2 Front Panel Access Print Setup Prints Page 1 2 Printed Page Size HCOPy PAGE SIZE A B A3 A4 LETTer LEGa1 EXECutive LEDGer HCOPy PAGE SIZE Formats the print image for the selected p
253. ement Choosing these detector also gives you access to the view and quasi peak gain functions Chapter 5 317 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference SENSe DETector Subsection QPEak The quasi peak detector weights the peak detected amplitude using specific charge discharge and meter time constants The effect of this detector depends on the characteristics and repetition rate of the input signal When the quasi peak detector is selected the analyzer is forced to linear amplitude display using sample detection AVERage The EMI average detector averages the peak detection amplitude When EMI average detection is selected the analyzer is forced to linear amplitude display using sample detection OFF Turning EMI detectors off restores the amplitude reference level and scale type logarithmic or linear that was used prior to the selection of either the quasi peak or average detector Factory Preset and RST Off Couplings Dependencies When the EMI detector is Off the SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI VIEW and SENSe POWer QPGain STATe functions are not available Remarks This command is only available with Option AYQ installed History Added with firmware revision A 14 00 Front Panel Access Det Demod EMI Detector Det Demod EMI Detector Quasi Peak Det Demod EMI Detector EMI Average Det Demod EMI Detector Off View of EMI Detection SENSe DETector
254. en file that has green traces on a white background so it does not take as much black ink to print the background Use the save command MMEMory SCReen S TORe file name to save the reversed file Example MMEM SCR BACK REV Front Panel Access File Store a Corrections Table to a File MMEMory STORe CORRection ANTenna CABLe OTHer USER lt file name gt Stores the specified correction set to the file named lt file_name gt Example MMEM STOR CORR ANT A TEST1 ANT Remarks This command will fail if the lt file name gt already exists Front Panel Access File Save Type Corrections z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t S D 7 Store a Limit Line in a File MMEMory STORe LIMit LLINE1 LLINE2 lt file name gt Stores the specified limit line to the specified file in memory Example MMEM STOR LIM LLINE2 C mylimit lim Remarks This command will fail if the ile name gt already exists There is no SCPI short form for parameters LLINE1 LLINE2 Front Panel Access File Save Type Limits Chapter 5 297 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference MMEMory Subsystem Store Measurement Results in a File MMEMory STORe RESults lt file name gt Saves the results of the current measurement into a comma separated file Only works when a measurement has been chosen from the MEASURE menu SCPI commands associated wi
255. enable register bit descriptions 203 description 202 Set Date 153 set display background 296 set screen image file type 296 Set Time 153 Show Errors 151 show errors 151 Show Hdwr 156 Show System 155 Signal ID Mode key 103 Signal Ident On Off key 102 signal peaks number of 373 query 373 sorting 374 Signal Track On Off 97 signal tracking 97 signals demodulated displaying 315 identification mode 332 identification on off 332 tracking 254 Single Sweep 131 single sweep 143 single vs continuous measurement mode 284 Source 132 source calibration internal 265 internal tracking generator commands 343 See also tracking generator Source menu map 409 source power 132 Span 136 span full 136 full scale 323 last 137 marker type 249 markers values 258 to previous 323 value 322 zero 136 span functions 136 Span Pair Span Center 106 SPAN X Scale 136 SPAN X Scale menu map 410 Span Zoom 136 speaker on off 370 special characters in commands 179 Spectrum Analysis key 113 spectrum analyzer state recalled 152 153 spectrum analyzer state configuring 266 squelch 314 SRE command description 197 SRQ command 235 SRQ using 199 standard event status byte enable and read 231 status event enable register description 205 status register query 232 status register description 203 Standard key 170 Standby key 141 start and stop frequencies 110 Start Freq 96 start freque
256. ency EE 274 Trace Ys Retecenoe Level 1 iaeskdce beer Radel Raden eRe R eee REEL R ESLER Ras 215 Trace Y Sus Reference Level OSG 22 dik tus EEbesRbRAG ins a X duas pe kk do 276 NEM ORI eee oue dod ore ieee EOS ene EE bret a md den 271 PORVI EEN e EE EE EE d EE d EE ESERE 278 LEE 278 Iyadieno Data HW Lu ue vd b doe REC CY RVACV S dv ad aca wr durer Meere 278 HOP Y SUBS Ss i ede Brice Bret REP ERE oU Red Cu ELI ERU E edd d ed Wee ee 281 Fou PAM AE EE EE EELER A 281 Printer EE 281 und ri Em ETT 281 EE a Eat OD 2l esetkem tbe SHOPS Eo ETRA RACER OKT CU ER RR Ped CR d 282 Forma Feed the Prim Memi iosudzesxcopRRULCCPAXRO DC LESOR E ERES Neq aa 282 Page Orientatloli i154 242 4 bie eh ehh RI RH eed eq weder edv gd 282 Wuinker ot lems Printed ona Page ois sadoso ER EISE EEN EE RE EE A 282 Printed Paus SUE c cemaipieb edere enr ache deh a ag dap qudd qurdataniordapraue it db ek bw dg doris 283 INL Tite Susy EE 284 Continuous or Single Measurements 22 aas Raro REN ar RE REO REP E rece RR RE ee RRS 284 Take New Data AcquisiOng 8 d eh Re RR RR REES E ERG ERR RA RR Reed 285 Pause the Measurement e E pete RE PERSE EEN EE EE RR XR RSS 285 Restart the Measurement sdb ace dg oii dca oe e b e E o eed tists eka dbi arce poe 286 Resume the eu UCTMDE o sace oC eg e XO ac ego c HOC do epos bb ke 286 JN ut S UPS IC oo ee debis e EE 287 luput Port CONDE i22 died Vr icon A dee ddnde parta ex exi valeo up da e RE 287 Select temal pr External TEE 288 Select Mise
257. ency is at 1 0 GHz a relative limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz will display the limit line segment at 1 3 GHz If the amplitude component of the relative limit line segment is 10 dB then 10 dB is added to the reference level value to obtain the amplitude of the given segment reference level offset included A limit line entered as fixed may be changed to relative and one entered as relative may be changed to fixed When changing between fixed and relative limit lines the frequency and amplitude values in the limit line table change so that the limit line remains in the same position for the current frequency and amplitude settings of the analyzer If a time and amplitude limit line is used the amplitude values change but the time values remain the same Key Access Display Limits Allows you to purge data from the limit line tables Pressing Delete Limits after the prompt If you are sure press key again to delete will delete the limits Key Access Display Limits Selects the screen position for the Active Function Display Depending on the type of trace data being viewed you can move the Active Function Display position for less visual interference with your screen data Key Access Display Top Displays the active function in the top left corner of the display 76 Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference Display NOTE Do not select Active Fctn Position Top when performing limit or margin test
258. ency limits lt ampl gt 120 dBm to 100 dBm connected 0 or 1 Remarks If two amplitude values are entered for the same frequency a single vertical line is the result In this case if an upper line is chosen the amplitude of lesser frequency amplitude 1 is tested If a lower line is chosen the amplitude of greater frequency amplitude 2 is tested For linear amplitude interpolation and linear frequency interpolation the interpolation is computed as Vivi Ji L f f y fii fi mia For linear amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation the interpolation is computed as Yier Xi log f log f log log Fl s og fi yi d i For log amplitude interpolation and linear frequency interpolation the interpolation is computed as log y log y fi 17 fi au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei log y f f log y For log amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation the interpolation is computed as log y log y log y ef ese log f log f logy Front Panel Access Display Limits X Axis Units Freq Time Display Limits Limit 1 2 Edit 242 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference CALCulate LLINe Subsection Display Limits Limit 1 2 Edit Point Display Limits Limit 1 2 Edit Frequency Display Limits Limit 1 2 Edit Amplitude Display Limits Limit 1 2 Edit Connected Display Limits Limit 1 2 Edi
259. ent range without overloading the digital system To increase measurement speed select IF Gain Fixed This setting decreases the display range to 70 dB so you may have to adjust the reference level to ensure complete view of the signal Key Access Amplitude More More Chapter 2 51 m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be 5 be bi au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Auto All NOTE NOTE PhNoise Opt Auto Man Front Panel Key Reference Auto Couple Auto Couple Accesses the menus to couple functions in your analyzer Coupled functions are functions that are linked Auto couples all coupled functions If Auto All is pressed all coupled functions are set to Auto This function is not available when the segmented sweep function is set to On Segmented On Coupled functions are functions that are linked If one function is changed the coupled function is changed During normal operation the sweep time resolution bandwidth video bandwidth and center frequency step are coupled to span the input attenuation is coupled to the reference level If any of these functions become uncoupled is set to manual a sign appears next to the screen annotation representing the function on the screen If one or more functions are manually set so that the amplitude or frequency becomes uncalibrated Meas Uncal appears on the top right side of the graticu
260. ent state that will be restored when you do a preset A mode preset does not change the mode and it only resets the settings of the current mode to their factory defaults Key Access System Power On Preset Preset Type Factory Pressing Factory presets the analyzer to the configuration originally set at the factory Refer to the Preset key description for the default factory configuration settings Key Access System Power On Preset Preset Type Key Access System Power On Preset Preset Type Saves the active state of the analyzer into the User Preset register for recall on Preset if Preset User is selected Refer to Chapter2 Time Date Alignments Front Panel Key Reference System Local Preset in this chapter for more information Key Access System Power On Preset Accesses the following Time Date menu keys used to set and display the real time clock Key Access System Time Date On Off Date Format MDY DMY Set Time Set Date Turns the display of the real time clock on or off Key Access System Time Date Changes the display of the date from a month day year format to a day month year format Key Access System Time Date Allows you to set the time of the real time clock Enter the time in 24 hour HHMMSS format using the numeric keypad and pressing Enter Valid hour HH values are from 00 to 23 Valid minute MM and second SS values are from 00 to 59 Key Access Sy
261. equest Service Summary RQS Operation Status Summary Bit Hep amp io t 2 a 4 s e 7 Service Request Enable Register ck763a Chapter 4 201 Ka z D E Ki On E EI Ka E 2 Ki S Ke Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions The status byte register contains the following bits Bit Decimal Description Value 0 1 Unused This bit is always set to 0 1 2 Unused This bit is always set to 0 2 4 Error Event Queue Summery Bit A in this bit position indicates that the SCPI error queue is not empty The SCPI error queue contains at least one error message 3 8 Questionable Status Summary Bit A 1 in this bit position indicates that the questionable status summary bit has been set The questionable status event register can then be read to determine the specific condition that caused this bit to be set 4 16 Message Available MAV A lin this bit position indicates that the analyzer has data ready in the output queue There are no lower status groups that provide input to this bit 5 32 Standard Event Status Summary Bit A in this bit position indicates that the standard event status summary bit has been set The standard event status register can then be read to determine the specific event that caused this bit to be set 6 64 Request Service RQS Summery Bit
262. er Events and Conditions Figure 4 2 Overall Status Register System Diagram Status Byte Register STB STATus QUEStionable POWer R P P Tripped Source Unleveled Source LO Unleveled 50 MHz Ose Unleveled Message Available MAV Reserved s Std Event Status Sum 5 Input Overload Tripped STATus 5 Req Serv Sum RQS IN Operation Status S Unused QUEStionable LO Out Unleveled Unused Unused Trans Filter Trans Filter Event Register Event Enable Reg Reserved Condition Register Unused Reserved eler Reserved Unuced POWer Summary Always Zero 0 Reserved ONAARWNAT ven INTegrity Sum Reserved Reserved i o D FREQuency Summary 3s s s Reserved i iz 5o t o o o Reserved s c ckE lg CALibration Summal E IIS ry S s5 AE SL Oo STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Source Synth Unlocked Freq Ref Unlocked Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved un Di D E Ki On E EI Ka E 2 Ki S Ke Unused Oper Complete Synth Unlocked S i Invalid Span or BW 22 E SG Always Zero 0 Reserved ei ic ro 2 Reserved c elel s Standard Event Status Register Reserved ele ESE ESE ESR OPC Demodulation Handig i i 2018 O 0 E Unused Req Bus Control 1 e Unused Query Error 2 o Unused Dev Dep Error 3 2 Unused Execution Error 4 a Always Zero 0 Command Error 5 t Reserved 6
263. er MODE SPAN to select span markers The query returns the current X position center frequency of the designated markers Range Refer to the SENSe SWEep POINts command Front Panel Access Marker lt active marker gt Span Pair Span Markers Span X Position CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition SPAN lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition SPAN Change the frequency span of the designated span type marker pair to position the markers at the desired trace X positions Use CALCulate MARKer MODE SPAN to select span markers The query returns the current X position frequency span of the designated markers Range Refer to the SENSe SWEep POINts command Front Panel Access Marker active marker Span Pair Delta Pair Markers Start Frequency X Position CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STARt lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STARt Position the left most marker the start reference frequency of the designated band type marker pair at the specified trace X position Use CALCulate MARKer MODE BAND to select band markers The query returns the current X position start reference frequency of the 256 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection designated marker Range Refer to the SENSe SWEep POINts command Front Panel Access Marker active marker Delta Pair Delta Pair Markers Stop Frequency X Position CALCulate MARKer 1
264. er page 282 on off 270 reference level 275 reference level offset 276 reference level normalized 273 reference level position 274 scaling 274 Index Index scaling vertical axis 277 system configuration 365 time format 269 time on off 270 title 270 trace 271 units 388 Display key 71 Display Line menukeys Display Line 119 gt Display Line 119 Display Line On Off 71 display line subtraction from trace 376 Display menu map 397 display range 51 display reversing the color 297 documentation using 36 DTR for serial bus 361 dwell time 301 E Edge Pos Neg 144 Edge Setup 144 Edit 72 Edit key 48 antenna amplitude corrections 41 cable amplitude corrections 43 corrections other than antenna or cable for 46 Eject Page 127 EMI detection type selecting 317 318 EMI detector auto range 319 dwell time 301 gain setting 329 EMI Res BW 120 kHz 9kHz and 200 Hz 63 Enter key 79 Entire Frame key 169 errors data transfer R S232 191 locate SCPI 365 monitoring 235 querying 365 Esc key 80 Escape 80 ESE command description 197 event enable register definition 195 event register definition 195 event status enable 231 enable and read byte 231 register query and clear 232 exchange trace and 2 164 exchange trace 2 and 3 164 Ext Amp Gain 50 Ext Mix Band key 101 external mixer selecting 288 External Pos Neg 167 External preamplifier 50 external tri
265. ere BE rk RHODE PER HC ER rA de d e 325 Frequency Synthesis Stale EE EE EE AR AE NEE EE d pep bd 325 SENSe E MIXer Subsectlon NEE x yea EORR ERR VERRE EE EE ERS 326 select External Miter DAD ge EE EPI PEE db EE EP dh ECKE d 326 Bxtenial Seeerei uri bb EDO pK Eq ESI EESTI ERES E Kei dus 326 Set bxternal Mixer Bras OmU e ois ER e rk Huc E dE Rue A Vt Edu e RR 327 Set External Mixer LO Harmonic Valle iser cerisrirer RE E EELER AE EE AE SR eS 327 Set External Mixer LO Harmonie Mode 2 9 dE suec Ru ka RE kiren PR de Ro 328 SENSE PO Wer SI BSSODON oo szEbPICEPRRIReOC RESTE REESE KESAT RUP EERKPSTE REN UE ERN X 329 uss peak Deoh Gan soi bbq eed reb EE 329 ore DE ET 329 Tipit Por Attenuator AUD uiuos dee Eeer EE ege 329 Input Port Power Gain Luorequekck erbe pee ege ek Eed te 330 Tu pat Pos Maximum Mine EE as epo deas d peces keto go Ro Rt pd e 330 Opiinize Preselector Frege y i cc nts cdot on hetwed ebd nicis EE 330 Ereseleciar COM Lioscoxbicek tsvbkbUt ER DEN P V ME Ea RA a AS Reg Eq ert Pda aM GBNSsepstDeniy SubSegDOU c suos eR Vice ep eoe bebe opio Rhee EE 332 aet Mixer Signal Identification Mode iiis ecco sas b rb Roe RR RR RR n RR 332 set Mixer Signal Identification State iii isis coude EELER EG Rab Y aek 332 Contents S S S S E PSENDS SAVED DUDEECUOUL sss pue XC AES EE EE 334 E eet PMID cse dde bd e eb b e ERE EP Lobos Ee pese eg i eS idque 334 touery Number GE SEBTHENUE uiua cacao ENEE RE RAR EELER RE 335 Set VIE SEH
266. erload protection circuitry for the input connector There is no query form of this command This command is valid only for Agilent ESA models E4401B or E4411B The excessive input signal may have caused 15 dB of attenuation to be switched in or it may have completely switched the input connector out so that it is connected to the internal reference signal Si e S E er e s S S E 5 E Si e c E e Q Chapter 5 289 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference INSTrument Subsystem INSTrument Subsystem This subsystem includes commands for querying and selecting instrument measurement personality option modes Catalog Query INSTrument CATalog Returns a comma separated list of strings which contains the names of all the installed applications These names can only be used with the INST SELECT command Example INST CAT Query response CDMA 4 PNOISE 14 Select Application by Number INSTrument NSELect integer INSTrument NSELect Select the measurement mode by its instrument number The actual available choices depends upon which applications are installed in the instrument If you are using the SCPI status registers and the analyzer mode is changed the status bits should be read and any error conditions resolved prior to switching modes Error conditions that exist prior to switching modes cannot be detected using
267. ers to any function under the MEASURE key Remarks See also the TRG command Usethe TRIGer SEQuence SOURce EXTernal command to select the external trigger The instrument must be in the single measurement mode If INITiate CONTinuous is ON then the command is ignored Use FETCh to transfer a measurement result from memory to the output buffer Refer to individual commands in the MEASure subsystem for more information If the analyzer is in signal identification mode two sweeps are required as this mode relies on the acquisition of data from two successive sweeps Therefore if the analyzer is in single sweep mode two sweep triggers are needed to generate the sweep pair In image suppress mode synchronization is ensured by first turning off signal identification initiating a single sweep then turning on signal identification followed by two single sweeps See SENSe SIDentify for more information about signal identification state Front Panel Access Sweep Sweep Cont Single z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S c D oO Single Meas Control Measure Cont Single Pause the Measurement INITiate PAUSe This command applies to measurements found in the MEASURE menu Use this command to pause the current measurement by changing the current measurement state from the wait for trigger state to the paused state If the measurement is not in the wait for trigger state whe
268. es Off the output power of the tracking generator The power level can then be adjusted using the numeric keypad step keys or knob Pressing any digit 0 through 9 on the numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu See the specifications chapter in the calibration guide for the available output power for your tracking generator Key Access Source Power level sensitive devices connected to the tracking generator output may be accidentally damaged This is because the actual source amplitude will be greater than the amplitude indicated on the analyzer when the power sweep function is being used The source amplitude value is used as the starting amplitude for a power sweep The ending amplitude for a power sweep is higher then the source amplitude value and it may actually be set to values beyond specified output levels Therefore exercise caution when connecting a power level sensitive device to the tracking generator output 132 Chapter2 NOTE NOTE Power Sweep On Off CAUTION Attenuation Auto Man Amptd Step Auto Man Amptd Offset Front Panel Key Reference Source For spectrum analyzers with Option 1DN or Option 1DQ the tracking generator must be turned on Source Amplitude On before you set up the segmented sweep table When Amplitude Off is selected the output attenuation on the Agilent E4402B E4403B E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B is set to the maximum attenuation
269. es 391 AMPLITUDE Y Scade Mem eocbizsrikbeURe testsete te Er EPIC EnA ReSeeRE RS ERDIAN 392 Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Men 4s uua EE ER dier Eed 393 Anto Couple EEN 394 PW We Mei ei BEE EELER E EE e EE EA 395 Pea Demod Meine ides bi ee bb be ERES rns S bati qnia be p dais 396 Pinky eg LL ovest ESPERE DE EE p rue ata Sedo Eege 397 Pile Menus 1 Of 3s ee REEL EELER RER EE REOR es 398 File Meme CE 00 3 woe eb odo PE EID HI er desire a ere EE Ce 399 Pile BIDS O eorr drin ied mice qiu pap qd bau rhe E d eee qu 400 Freq Comnt Marker Mel 660i poset RR ER HR CR ede Red ld Ed RS OEE RR OS 401 FREQUENCY Channel Memi ioca vacuREXTERESWOERDARBOSARESUERUSASTERERSAN XN EA A E 402 Input EE 403 Dd arker SH x cues typ eRPRPOTEQObEP CRF EQ CRI URS SUE SbCP El 404 hib ard REPRE PT T Rh es wh Acad abr A dues ed de ea bi ee de ee RS HYG hc 405 Peak Search Men 21604 oer ee eroe e ied edax dd pee EE 406 Preset MCW EE 407 Prot emp MENN ee EE EE EE de Eege 408 DOGS NISIU ciciadedimaeveks hed eek eeue ct Pe E ENS REDESERER ERES ERE RE SNC ROS 409 SPAN X Scale Mem eg AE ENEE LC TERRESTRE HORSE EAD UE A Edd 410 Swe MET isne quee eker ROR OR V le EE 411 oysten Men iaocnicoRRRLOLRRCELRARPQSRRXERADISURE E AXqU E EA 412 Trace View MOD uere ore Ege br vier io uda e d don acini e qi dor eee a bdo eS 413 ARE NCW C epo Qe E UU dde RES do e een doa e e e polo d ARR copa d qe we ag 414 16 List of Commandes SOURce POWSEATTeuuatiogn amplo A cake wedge
270. ese PERPE EE 255 Span Markers Center Frequency X Position NEEN EE EELER REEL EE 256 Spar Markers pan A POSIBGW sq ctcsoaieseeded eb EO Rd E EE 256 Delta Pair Markers Start Frequency X Positi n 8 8 EEN e n oe d n RU aeg 256 Delta Pair Markers Stop Frequency X POSIBOD 12 scene Ree dee eee keno Res PCR ROC 257 Marker X AS REAL cucu hone Rowe ae eee ERR POUR Ra CORR Seck SE Eo 257 Span Markers Span X Vale EE ee tee EU RE RUE RES Rx EES E Ne A 258 Delta Pau Markers Start Prequency X Value cig cce reb ede ERO ERE Pbi ade 258 Delta Paw Markers Stop Frequency X Value EE EE RR EXTR RAO A ER 258 Matker Read Y Value coossuehbeLzhereb9EbeR RR EE RR EDEN REDIERE PE EO dd RAP RS 259 CATLCUulate NTDat SUbSQOHOD 2 euren quede us EE dde meet ede edes 260 Deet Tate DAI c ues bit e tees Baa RUBER E e Rr ER BUR ER Rh A 260 C Labia SUD EE 261 Alien All Instrument Assemblies Aerer EE SEET h E AS EES EES 261 Set Auto A Dan Mods Allor Not RE La Geet deeg VELA ERES EE Webb tdg 261 Automatic ASME ek oer ek I kere Ee CERT OR RECEP KR oe RO eg 262 Return to the Default Alenment Data 2c 5640s sies RERIREDLEREGC REGES ER EGG Red ERES 262 Sen PM Desch aen 24222 eek quero aepo qe ve er dede werd addc ed eK EE 262 Query the Internal or External Frequency Reference iios t Re A 263 Coarse Adjust the Preguency eege uo succes aic chp qiero ie dos ticis eb Biet A 263 Fine Adjust ihe Fiequency Referente AER EE ere 263 pelett ihe tege rol PMECTHECE T 263 Alien the RF Sil
271. eset can be accessed by pressing System Power On Preset Key Access Preset This key is only available when the Preset Type key is set to User Press System Power On Preset Preset Type User Mode Preset does not change the mode It only resets the current mode settings to the factory defaults and to continuous sweeps measurements Key Access Preset This key is only available when the Preset Type key is set to User Press System Power On Preset Preset Type User A factory preset is executed so all of the instrument modes are returned to the factory default state 1 e Spectrum Analysis Mode and continuous sweep If you are not already in the spectrum analysis mode it switches to that mode A factory preset will not reset persistent functions such as GPIB address time date display style or auto alignment state to the factory defaults Key Access Preset This key is only available when the Preset Type key is set to User Press System Power On Preset Preset Type User This key saves the current state of the analyzer into the User Preset state for recalling when the instrument is user preset After you save a state here you must go to the Preset Type key and select User in order to have this state used as the preset state Key Access Preset 124 Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference Print Print Option A4H GPIB and Parallel or Option IAX RS 232 and Parallel only Print initiates an output of the display data
272. ess Marker gt Mkr CF Set Reference Level to the Marker Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET RLEVel Sets the reference level to the specified marker amplitude In delta marker mode the reference level is set to the amplitude difference between the markers Front Panel Access Marker gt Mkr Ref Lvl Peak Search or Search Meas Tools Mkr Ref Lvl Set Span to the Marker Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET SPAN Sets the span to the value of the specified marker frequency The specified marker must be in delta mode Select the delta marker mode with CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE DELTa This command is not available in Zero span Front Panel Access Marker Delta Marker gt Mkr A Span Set Start Frequency to the Marker Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET STARt Sets the start frequency to the value of the specified marker frequency In delta marker mode the start frequency is set to the marker delta value This command is 252 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection not available in zero span Front Panel Access Marker gt Mkr Start Set Center Frequency Step Size to the Marker Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET STEP Sets the center frequency step size to match the marker frequency In delta marker mode the center frequency step size will be set to the frequency difference between the markers Select the delta marker mode
273. et values 258 trace assignment 254 trace assignment auto 254 tracking signal 254 type 249 x axis location 255 x axis readout 257 y axis query 259 Max Hold 163 max hold trace 377 Max Mixer Lvl 50 maximum power to mixer 330 mean of trace data 373 Meas Control 112 Meas Setup front panel key 111 Meas Tools 115 Measure Cont Single 112 MEASURE front panel key 111 measurement bandwidth command 238 commands 266 control of 284 increasing speed 183 input signal 301 pause 285 restart 286 results storing 298 resume 286 single continuous 284 trigger 285 measurement modes currently available 290 selecting 113 290 291 measurement speed increase 51 menu map Alpha Editor 391 Amplitude 392 Amplitude Y Scale Corrections 393 Auto Couple menu 394 BW Avg 395 Det Demod 396 Display 397 File 398 399 400 Freq Count 401 FREQUENCY Channel 402 Input Output 403 Marker 404 Marker gt 405 Peak Search 406 Preset 407 Print Setup 408 Source 409 SPAN X Scale 410 Sweep 411 System 412 Trace View 413 Trig 414 Min Hold 163 min hold trace 377 Min Search 116 minimum to marker 116 mixer external band selecting 326 external bias adjusting 326 external bias turning on off 327 external LO harmonic mode on off 328 external LO harmonic setting 327 internal external 288 maximum input power 330 type preselected unselected 288 Mixer Bias On Off key 104 Mixer Config key
274. etDeitigd WEE 64 LA coe eekelveRC PE ERETeTERFERREN PP SERM LEER OPE ena ee pee eae er M ue d 71 EDISE i ba Re aH e DR db IRE P E PETES E A de dps dud QS NM die 79 o PT M Q 80 ENEE e TII TT 81 Erog CONUM ee a ee ee ob bp dle ober bg qeu dedita gd adu dai Cree 95 FREQUENCY Channel usa duse eerte ERG CRER HR RR RERCES BEE ENDE reet es 96 DI EE 99 MUVO odes er eR ee a ee used aa dede M ee bue d edd vA ba ce EU M eed 100 C mm 105 Marker 110 MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Made i12 S9 ENER e ur ERA REN RA REERIRREEAR EESUAEE 111 Mens TNO EE EE 112 MODE e epar ea r e aA Ene x aie UA DR rd drei Pau ewe de SIE qe d 113 BIERE NOTIONE sibs bed EE EE YID TIRE RE 114 Peak Searels 13 0943654460544 ee ARAS PE bg Sep RRUDIA WC EP MON E ped Ede 115 er te S 120 PYM Er RRESER ES 125 Qum i EE 126 ACIER REOR TETTE t eeh 128 ER errereen E 129 SE Ae AE et EE 130 incl A ETT 131 SOHNEB Lo vo RESEEERAI TS CEPESE INE NAUpPSeLEE EE re ee 132 dis E mil P DTE 136 iri pM UIT 141 BUE Loo EL RE iT eR RERUM dq idu ee eid ut Rd P Ee die 142 DERE e o oio pasce SDR ASHER WEAN e dodici OUR ARE RO HR R RR n EUR T Pci 151 Tab Ne ELO oL EUR ESIBRENARENIEPRbPSSREPTIPhECIHENIME AVE LN L eibi sd rii RS 162 jo merce M mMT 163 Jo c ERUIT 167 IHUPIam D DOWN
275. ete Correction Delete Correction Delete Correction Delete Correction Frequency 300 MHz Edit Point Frequency 300 MHz Amplitude 2dB Amplitude 2dB Edit Point Frequency 300 MHz Frequency 300 MHz Amplitude 2dB Amplitude 2dB Delete Point Delete Point Delete Point Delete Point Chapter 6 pl750b 393 sde nuaw Menu Maps Auto Couple Menu Auto Couple Menu PhNoise Opt Auto f oups Detector Optimize f Auto Couple Average Type LJ Optimize LO for Average PhNoise Opt fa Pwr Avg Auto Man Sample Auto Man Negative Peak Avg Type a Not available on models E4401B and E4411B pl753b Ka Ki E E EI 394 Chapter 6 BW Avg Menu Res BW Auto Man Video BW Auto Man uto n to VBW RBW A Man Average o Off Avg Type Au Man EMI Res BW Chapter 6 EMI Res BW 120 kHz 200 Hz Average Type Video Avg a Available only with Option 1DR narrow resolution bandwidth and spans 5MHz An active function which allows data entry Menu Maps BW Avg Menu pl754b 395 sde nuo A Menu Maps Det Demod Menu Det Demod Menu Det Demod Detector Auto Man EMI Detector Off Demod Off EMI Detector Quasi Peak EMI Average Off View Pk QP Av Demod View lp QP Avg Gain On x1 X10 Range Dwell Detector mE Video RMS m Demod Time Squelch b a Ag
276. ey menu key Key Access System More Licensing Activate License Allows you to activate the option that you previously entered with License Key If your entry was correct the option will be enabled and the message Option activated will appear in the status line of your display The option number and license key number will also be cleared from the License Key and Option key If your entry was incorrect the error message License key invalid will appear in the status line of your display The option number and license key number can be edited until they are correct Key Access System More Licensing It is possible to enable an option for which the analyzer is not yet configured Therefore the message Option activated does not mean that the option will immediately function For a display of options that are enabled and for which the analyzer is properly configured press System More Show System Delete License Pressing this key deletes the license key that is associated with the currently selected Option This means the corresponding option will be disabled If this is a software option it will be disabled but the application will not be deleted from instrument memory The option and license key must be entered to perform a Delete License Key Access System More Licensing Show License Shows you the license information screen which lists all the existing license keys along with their related option code and a Chapte
277. ey Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Other Edit Frequency Allows you to enter the frequency value for an amplitude correction point Enter the frequency value by using the numeric keypad Change the frequency value by using the step keys or the knob Press Bk Sp to correct errors After selecting a point Amplitude becomes active A frequency coordinate must always be specified for amplitude correction factors Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Other Edit NOTE The amplitude correction entered for the lowest frequency will be applied to all frequencies less than the lowest frequency entered Similarly the amplitude E 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E 46 Chapter2 NOTE NOTE Front Panel Key Reference AMPLITUDE Y Scale correction for the highest frequency entered will be applied to all frequencies greater than the highest frequency entered For amplitude correction factors a maximum of two entries with the same frequency are valid Only the first and last points of a series with the same frequency values are used any middle points are ignored Amplitude correction data is sorted in the table by frequency The sorting occurs immediately after you have entered the frequency value via the front panel User Chapter 2 Delete Correction Allows you to correct for gain or loss and may be used for any type of correction Key Access A
278. f Delta Span Pair Span Center Key Access Det Demod Demod When Demod View On is pressed the vertical scaling of the display is in frequency and marker will read out the FM deviation in KHz When Demod View is On the following functions are not available Log Lin the display is always linear and calibrated in Hz Y Axis Units Normalize Display Line Peak Excursion and Peak Threshold In AM demod pressing Demod View On has no effect FM demod must be selected The Bluetooth FM Demod Option 106 has a fixed vertical scale of approximately 40 kHz Div The exact value is determined by the auto alignment process and is displayed in the upper left corner of the display Key Access Det Demod Demod Turns the internal speaker on and off The volume from the speaker is controlled by the front panel volume control knob Selecting AM or FM turns the speaker on Turning AM or FM off pressing Preset when Preset Type is set to Factory or cycling the power sets the speaker function to off Key Access Det Demod Demod Allows you to set the time in non zero spans to pause and demodulate the signal after each sweep The demodulated signal can be heard during demodulation when in Speaker On mode m T wl S Ki z e Ki Ka Icy bi ki KH Q 69 au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Det Demod In zero span demodula
279. facturer even though itis now manufactured by Agilent Technologies This is intentional Agilent Technologies was created out of the Hewlett Packard company and the Hewlett Packard name is retained to support those customers who have purchased ESA analyzers in the past Front Panel Access System Show System Instrument State Query LRN Returns current instrument state data in a block of defined length The information is in a machine readable format only Sending the query returns the following format PQQOSYST SET NMMM lt state data 232 Chapter5 NOTE Remote Command Reference IEEE Common Commands The following example is a response to LRN The actual sizes will vary depending on the instrument state data size Example 42031SYST SET 42016 lt state data The number 4 P in the preceding query response format means there are 4 numbers that make up the size of the data that follows In this example 2031 bytes will follow the number 4 42031 2031 and 2016 QQQ and MMM in the preceding query response format represent data size in bytes The state can be changed by sending this block of data to the instrument after removing the size information Example SYST SET NMMM lt state_data gt Operation Complete OPC OPC Sets bit 0 in the standard event status register to 1 when all pending operations have finished The query stops any new commands from being processed until the current proce
280. ff the auto ranging behavior See also SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI Factory Preset and RST On Remarks This command is only available with Option AYQ installed History Added with firmware revision A 14 00 Remove EMI Auto Range SENSe DETector UNRange Returns the instrument settings for reference level and attenuation to the values they were before the last auto ranging command was sent The amplitude auto ranging process optimizes the available dynamic range for measurements using the EMI quasi peak and average detectors See SENSe DETector RANGe IMMediate Remarks This command is only available with Option AYQ installed History Added with firmware revision A 14 00 Chapter 5 319 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 oO Remote Command Reference SENSe DETector Subsection 2 9 E D E E E EI ki E Q 2 E EI 320 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference SENSe FREQuency Subsection SENSe FREQuency Subsection Center Frequency SENSe FREQuency CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency CENTer UP DOWN SENSe FREQuency CENTer Set the center frequency NOTE In log sweep mode the minimum start frequency is 10 Hz Factory Preset and RST ESA E4401B E4411B 750 MHz ESA E4402B E4403B 1 5 GHz ESA E4404B 3 35 GHz ESA E4405B 6 6 GHz ESA E4407B E4408B 13 25 GHz Range ESA E4401B E4411B 80 MHz to 1
281. files in descending order for instance C B A Key Access File Catalog Dir Up Allows you to move up one directory level If at the top level Dir Up moves to the drive level displaying the available disk drives Key Access File Catalog Dir Select Accesses the highlighted directory on your display Key Access File Catalog Accesses menu keys that allow you to save analyzer setups states traces limits corrections and screen data to a floppy A drive or internal flash C drive If you intend to save trace files for use with a personal computer save them as CSV comma separated values However files fomatted in this way cannot be loaded back into the analyzer Never remove the floppy disk during a save operation To do so could corrupt all data on the floppy disk Key Access File Save Now Executes the save function When the save is complete the message XXXXXX file saved where XXXXXX is the filename will appear in the status line on your display Note that once you have used the File Save Save Now keys to setup and save a file the Save hardkey will perform an immediate Save Now of your file in the same format and to the same location Key Access File Save If the Path field above the directory box is empty when pressing Save Now the status line will display the error message Unable to save file invalid path In this case please select a drive Type Allows you to select the type of data you want t
282. first field starting with Line 1 the first line in Field One Key Access Trig More TV Trig Setup Field 169 S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Front Panel Key Reference Trig Field Two Causes the selected line number to be viewed as an offset into the second field If Line 1 is selected it is the 264th line of the frame NTSC M NTSC Japan PAL M or the 314th line of the frame PAL B D G H I PAL N Combin SECAM L Key Access Trig More TV Trig Setup Field Sync Pos Neg Refers to the nature of the video waveform Normal baseband video has a TV line sync pulse on the bottom of the waveform more negative voltage This is referred to as negative Syne Neg When the analyzer is used as a TV receiver to produce baseband video the detected video is upside down with the sync pulse on the top of the waveform this is true only for NTSC and PAL transmission standards not for SECAM This orientation is referred to as positive Sync Pos Key Access Trig More TV Trig Setup Standard Accesses the Standard menu keys which allow you to select from the following TV standards NTSC M NTSC Japan PAL M PAL B D G H I PAL N PAL N Combin SECAM L Key Access Trig More TV Trig Setup TV Source Allows you to select between the internal analyzer path SA or the EXT VIDEO IN connector on the rear panel Ext Video In as the source for the TV Trigger and TV Monitor fun
283. for the analyzer events and conditions The lower priority status registers propagate their data to the higher priority registers in the data structures by means of summary bits These registers are used to determine the states of specific events or conditions Figure 4 1 Status Register System Simplified Block Diagram Power i Status codd E atus Frequency Service Status Status Request Byte Enable H Register Register Standard Calibration Greng Status Status Uncalibrated Integrity Integrity Operation Status Status Status c7 6c The two methods used to programmatically access the information in status registers are the polling method and the service request method An explanation of these methods is given in the next section What are the Status Registers What are the Status Registers Refer to Figure 4 2 which shows the overall status register system in detail Most status registers are 194 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions composed of the five individual registers described below One such status register in the figure is entitled STATus QUEStionable which is both the name of the register and the SCPI command form used to access the register From now on the SCPI command form will be used when referring to the various registers There are IEEE common SCPI commands noted under some register names in parenthesis These commands are associated with thos
284. fset value originally entered e Specific instrument hardware in use Sweep time Number of sweep points The effective trigger offset value will be re calculated whenever any of these parameters change Front Panel Access Trig Trig Offset Chapter 5 379 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S S D 7 oO au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem Trigger Offset TRIGger SEQuence OFFSet STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence OFFSet STATe Turns the trigger offset on and off Factory Preset and RST Off Example TRIG OFFS STAT ON Front Panel Access Trig Trig Offset RF Burst Frequency Selectivity TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst FSELectivity STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst FSELectivity The RF burst circuit can sample the 21 4 MHz IF either before or after RBW filtering When frequency selectivity is On the RBW filtered IF signal is used increasing the frequency selectivity This command is available only when Option B7E RF Communications Hardware 1s installed Factory Preset and RST Off History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access Trig More 1 of 2 RF Burst Setup Frequency Selectivity RF Burst Absolute Mode Setting TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel ABSolute ampl TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst LEVel ABSolute Select the trigger level of the RF burst
285. gger 382 delay on off 378 delay value 378 slope 378 F factory defaults 262 factory preset 369 Field key 168 Field One key 169 Field Two key 170 File 81 File menu map 398 399 400 files copy 293 correction table loading 294 correction table storing 297 deleting 294 instrument state loading 295 instrument state storing 298 limit line storing 297 limit lines loading 294 listing 293 measurement results storing 298 moving data 294 screen image storing 298 trace loading from file 295 trace storing 299 fixed limit line type 76 FM demodulation type 313 deviation 313 FM Demodulation Bluetooth 38 scale division 38 FM demodulation on off 314 FM demodulation squelch 314 FM activate FM demodulation 68 form feed printer 282 format date 153 format data 278 Free Run 167 Freq Correct On Off 155 Freq Count 95 Freq Count menu map 401 Freq Interp Log Lin 74 Freq Offset 97 frequency center 321 domain type 338 optimization phase noise 325 phase noise auto manual 325 reference adjustment coarse 263 adjustment fine 263 calibration on off 263 scaling 274 selectivity trigger 380 span full 323 marker type 249 previous 323 value 322 start 323 step size 321 322 stop 96 324 Frequency Display Edit menu 73 Frequency Marker Readout menu 107 FREQUENCY Channel 96 FREQUENCY Channel menu map 402 frequency correction 155 frequency interpolation 74
286. gisters Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Figure 4 8 Status Operation Register Diagram CALibrating Reserved Reserved SWEeping MEASuring Waiting for TRIGger Waiting for ARM Reserved Paused Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Always Zero 0 Operation Status Condition Register Operation Status Positive Transition Filter Operation Status Negative Transition Filter Operation Status Event Register Operation Status ven Enable Register To Status Byte Register Bit 7 Y VY VV VYVYVYVYYVYYYV4 Y Y Y v Y YvvvvvvvyYi EE 15 14 13 12 11100987 654 3 2 1 0 F HU cl76a The STATus OPERation condition register contains the following bits Bit Decimal Description Value 0 0 Calibrating A lin this bit position indicates that the analyzer is performing a self calibration 206 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description Value 1 2 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 2 4 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 3 8 Sweeping A in this bit position indicates that a sweep is in progress 4a 16 Measuring A in this bit position indicates that a measurement is in progress 5a 32 Waiting fo
287. gnments Auto Align All but RF Chapter 5 261 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D oO au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference CALibration Subsystem Automatic Alignment CALibration AUTO OFF ON 0 1 CALibration AUTO Turns the automatic alignment on and off This is run continuously at the completion of each sweep Factory Preset and RST On at power up Front Panel Access System Alignments Auto Align All System Alignments Auto Align All but RF System Alignments Auto Align Off Return to the Default Alignment Data CALibration DATA DEFault Initializes the alignment data to the factory defaults Front Panel Access System Alignments Load Defaults Align FM Demodulation CALibration FMDemod CALibration FMDemod Performs an alignment of the FM demodulation hardware if Option 106 AYQ or BAA is installed The query form of this command performs the alignment and returns zero if the alignment is successful If you have multiple FM demodulation hardware options the hardware that will be used is automatically selected in order of priority with firmware revisions A 14 00 or later 1 Option 106 Bluetooth 2 Option AYQ Quasi peak detection and FM demodulation 3 Option BAA FM Demodulation Front Panel Access System Alignments Align Now FM Demod 1 Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor an
288. haking can he used to help solve this problem These and other topics are discussed in greater detail in your programming language documentation Settings for the Serial Interface Please refer to the documentation on your computer and I O to configure the serial interface Some common serial interface configuration settings are Baud Rate to 9600 Bits per character to 8 Parity to Odd or disabled Stop bits to 1 Handshake and Baud Rate To determine hardware operating parameters you need to know the answer for each of the following questions about the peripheral device Which of the following signal and control lines are actively used during communication with the peripheral Data Set Ready DSR Clear to Send CTS e What baud rate is expected by the peripheral Character Format Parameters To define the character format you must know the requirements of the peripheral device for the following parameters Character Length Eight data bits are used for each character excluding start stop and parity bits e Parity Enable Parity is disabled absent for each character Stop Bits One stop bit is included with each character 190 Chapter3 Programming Fundamentals Overview of RS 232 Option 1AX Modem Line Handshaking To use modem line handshaking for data transfer you would consider the following tasks 1 Set Data Terminal Ready and Request to Send modem lines to active state 2 Check Data Set
289. he Questionable Power Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register when that bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 0 Range integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Power Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition integer z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t S D 7 STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register when that bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range integer 0 to 32767 Chapter 5 359 2 9 E D E E E EI ki E Q 2 E EI Remote Command Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register when that bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Pre
290. he position of the first marker If no marker is present two markers appear at the center of the display The amplitude and frequency or time of the first marker is fixed The marker number is indicated above the delta marker and the same number is indicated with an R for example 1R above the reference marker Use the data controls to position the delta marker Annotation in the active function block and in the upper right corner of the display indicates the frequency or time and amplitude differences between the two markers The markers will be turned off if the scale type is changed between log and linear For information on using this function while in segmented sweep refer to Interaction with Other Analyzer Functions in the segmented sweep section of this chapter which begins on Segmented on page 145 Key Access Marker Pressing Delta again moves the reference marker to the active marker position so you can make delta measurements from differing reference points without having to turn off the markers and begin again Chapter 2 105 m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be e 5 be bi au 9 E D E E Ei m z E E D Ba 5 x E NOTE Delta Pair Ref Delta NOTE Span Pair Span Center NOTE Off Select Marker 1234 Front Panel Key Reference Marker The delta marker function permits signal to noise measurements provided the signal is a single sp
291. he sweep system immediately initiates another sweep cycle When OFF the sweep system remains in an idle state until CONTinuous is set to ON oran INITiate IMMediate command is received On receiving the INITiate IMMediate command it will go through a single sweep cycle and then return to the idle state The query returns 1 or 0 into the output buffer 1 is returned when there is continuous sweeping 0 is returned when there is only a single sweep When in a measurement this command does the following e When ON at the completion of each trigger cycle the trigger system immediately initiates another trigger cycle When OFF the trigger system remains in an idle state until CONTinuous is set to ON oran INITiate IMMediate command is received On receiving the INITiate IMMediate command it will go through a single trigger cycle and then return to the idle state The query returns 1 or 0 into the output buffer 1 is returned when in a continuous measurement state 0 is returned when there is only a single measurement Factory Preset Continuous RST Continuous or On Front Panel Access Sweep Sweep Cont Single 284 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference INITiate Subsystem Single Meas Control Measure Cont Single Take New Data Acquisitions INITiate IMMediate This command initiates a sweep if not in a measurement If in a measurement it triggers the measurement A measurement ref
292. ice Request Before using the SRQ method of generating a service request first become familiar with how service requests are generated Bit 6 of the status byte register is the request service summary RQS bit The RQS bit is set whenever there is a change in the register bit that it has been configured to monitor The RQS bit will remain set until the condition that caused it is cleared It can be queried without erasing the contents using the STB command Configure the RQS function using the SRE command When a register set causes a summary bit in the status byte to change from 0 to 1 the analyzer can initiate the service request SRQ process However the process is only initiated if both of the following conditions are true e The corresponding bit of the service request enable register is also set to 1 The analyzer does not have a service request pending A service request is considered to be pending between the time the analyzer SRQ process is initiated and the time the controller reads the status byte register The SRQ process sets the GPIB SRQ line true It also sets the status byte request service RQS bit to 1 Both actions are necessary to inform the controller that the analyzer requires service Setting the SRQ line only informs the controller that some device on the bus requires service Setting the RQS bit allows the controller to determine which device requires service If your program enables the controller to detect an
293. ification is unsuccessful None or Custom will automatically be set in the Printer Type menu Key Access Print Setup None The Printer Type will automatically be set to None when you press the Print key with an unsupported printer connected to your analyzer Key Access Print Setup Printer Type Custom When you press the Print key and the analyzer cannot identify your printer Custom will automatically be set in the Printer Type menu Setting the Printer Type menu key to Custom allows you to define your printer using the Define Custom menu keys Key Access Print Setup Printer Type Auto When Auto is selected and the Print key is pressed the analyzer will attempt to communicate with the printer and obtain its identification If the printer is identified the print will be successful and no message will appear on the display If the analyzer is not able to identify the printer the Printer Type will automatically be set to Custom and an error message asking you to press Define Custom to set up your printer will be displayed If the printer is not supported the Printer Type will automatically be set to None and an error message will inform you that your printer is unsupported Key Access Print Setup Printer Type Allows you to define your printer Key Access Print Setup Printer Type Language PCL3 PCL5 Allows you to define your printer as a Hewlett Packard PCL3 Most DeskJets or Hewlett Packard PCL5 LaserJets and DeskJets
294. igit 0 through 9 on the numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu To deactivate the display line press Display Line Off Key Access Display Accesses menu keys that allow you to create and define the parameters of limit lines Key Access Display Limit 1 Limit 2 Allows you to select either of the two available limits The Limit 1 and Limit 2 keys access menu keys that allow you to set parameters for the selected limit Key Access Display Limits Type Upper Lower Allows you to define the limit you are editing as either an upper or lower limit An upper limit fails if trace 1 exceeds the limit A lower limit fails if trace 1 falls below the limit Key Access Display Limits Limit 1 or Limit 2 Limit On Off Turns the limit line display on and off Either Limit or Margin as well as Test must be turned on for a limit test to work Key Access Display Limits Limit 1 or Limit 2 Test On Off Turns the testing of the limit lines on and off S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Chapter 2 71 au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Front Panel Key Reference Display 72 Margin On Off Edit If trace 1 is at or within the bounds of the set limit or margin PASS LIMIT or PASS MARGIN is displayed in green in the upper left corner of the measurement area where is the number of the selected limit line Colored annotation appear
295. ilarly to marker delta in segmented sweep with some characteristics which need to be noted When a delta or span pair is initiated in segmented sweep the analyzer defaults to the frequency domain If you wish to make time measurements in a zero span segment the domain must be set to time Marker More Readout Time The delta or span pair can traverse all segments without regard to the type of segment in which they were initiated Turn markers off Marker Off when entering or exiting segmented sweep Segmented Segmented Off Performing a factory preset will turn segmented sweep off This is also true if you select full span or last span Functions which are parameters of segmented sweep are not available when accessed by pressing the following front panel keys Auto Couple BW Avg Resolution BW and Video BW Frequency the entire softkey menu Span see above and Sweep Sweep Time and Points When the sweep trigger is set to any of the trigger selections other than free run no sweep occurs until the trigger condition is met Once the trigger occurs all segments are swept completing the entire trace For spectrum analyzers with Option 1DN or Option 1DQ the tracking generator 148 Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference Sweep must be turned on Source Amplitude On before you set up the segmented sweep table The on off state of the segmented sweep mode and the segmented sweep table can be saved as a state type
296. ile is a complete state of instrument parameters including traces states limits and corrections When using a personal computer to copy Setup files ensure the similarly named files with extensions like s01 so2 etc are also copied These files are necessary to allow complete restoration of originally saved Setup Sort Dir From To 90 State Trace Limits Screen Corrections Key Access File Copy Type Displays all state STA files you may wish to copy Key Access File Copy Type Displays all trace TRC and CSV files you may wish to copy Key Access File Copy Type Displays all limit LIM files you may wish to rename Key Access File Copy Type Displays all screen GIF and WMF files you may wish to rename Key Access File Copy Type Displays all corrections CBL ANT OTH AMD files you may wish to rename Key Access File Copy Type More Measurement Results Displays all previously saved measurement results files you may wish to delete Measurement results files are saved in CSV format for importing into spreadsheets Key Access File Copy Type More Sort accesses a menu of keys that allow you to view the files you wish to copy according to a selected file attribute The selection includes By Date By Name By Extension By Size and Order Up Down Order Up allows you to view files you may wish to copy in ascending order for instance A B C
297. ilent ESA E Series only E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B and E4407B b Available only with Option AYQ FM Demod Quasi peak BAA FM Demod or Option 106 Bluetooth FM Demodulation c Grayed out unless AM or FM Demod is on d Grayed out when span 0 Hz e Turns the speaker on f Available only with Option AY Q FM Demod Quasi peak pl756b An active function which allows data entry Ka e E ES e 396 Chapter 6 Display Menu g v S 5 lt Displa Full Screen Display Line Limits o 3 Active Fon Position ente Title Preferences Preferences o 2 a o On Annotation On Off Limit 1 Type Lower Upper SE m a EY On On o 3 o X Axis Units Time Limits n Rel Delete Limit m H x c o Z je Delete All Limits More 10f2 Title Act Fctn Posn Change Title Top Clear Title Center Bottom To Alpha Editor 3 An active function which allows data entry Chapter 6 H O Limit 1 Freq Interp Log Lin Amptd Interp Log Lin Frequency Amplitude E 9 revious Mo NN es Delete Point al Freq Interp Log Lin Amptd Interp Log Lin On Off Test On Off n Off Delete Limit More 10f2 Menu Maps Display Menu Frequency Amplitude x Connected To Yes Previous Pt o Delete Point sde nuo A pl798b 397 Menu Maps File Menus 1 of 3 File Menus 1 of 3 Sheet 1 of 3 File C
298. ing method which requires the program to repeatedly read the registers to detect a change 198 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Use the SRQ method when either you need time critical notification of changes you are monitoring more than one device which supports SRQs you need to have the controller do something else while the analyzer is making a measurement you can t afford the performance penalty inherent to polling Using the Service Request SRQ Method Your language bus and programming environment must be able to support SRQ interrupts for example using C and C with the GPIB When you monitor a condition with the SRQ method you must establish the following parameters 1 Determine which bit monitors the condition 2 Determine how that bit reports to the request service RQS bit of the status byte 3 Send GPIB commands to enable the bits that monitor the condition and to enable the summary bits that report the condition to the RQS bit 4 Enable the controller to respond to service requests When the condition changes the analyzer sets the RQS bit and the GPIB SRQ line The controller is informed of the change as soon as it occurs The time the controller would otherwise have used to monitor the condition can now be used to perform other tasks Your program also determines how the controller responds to the SRQ Generating a Serv
299. ing the automatically generated file name TRACEO001 CSV then every time the front panel Save key is pressed Trace 1 will be saved in CSV format and the filename will be incremented TRACE002 CSV TRACE003 CSV This provides a convenient format for saving several files with the same format quickly In the event that a valid save cannot be performed because a drive has not been selected the Save key will report the error No drive selected In this case press File Save and select a drive 130 Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference Single Single When analyzer is in continuous sweep mode and not in a measurement Measure Meas Off this key changes the sweep control to single sweep and executes a sweep after the trigger condition is met If the analyzer is already in single sweep pressing Single executes a new sweep after the trigger condition is met If Average is on BW Avg Average On pressing Single resets the average trace and starts the average again from a count of zero Sweeps are averaged until N sweeps are then taken where N is the average number and then the sweep is halted Some one button measurements require more than one sweep to complete the measurement The measurements selected from the functions under the MEASURE key set the trigger system to be initiated only once In this case the trigger condition can be met only once and then all the necessary sweeps will be executed to make the measurement Chapter 2 13
300. inite time during which the data for that point is collected The analyzer has the ability to look at all of the data collected during that time and present a single point of trace data based on the detector mode We call the interval during which the data for that trace point is being collected the bucket Thus a trace is more than a series of single points It is actually a series of trace buckets The data may be sampled many times within each bucket When the detector choice is Auto selecting trace averaging BW Avg Average On changes the detector The Auto choice depends on marker functions trace functions and the trace averaging function If a marker function or measurement is running the Auto choice of detector is either Average or Sample When one of the detectors such as Average is manually selected instead of Auto that detector is used without regard to other analyzer settings Average displays the average of the signal within the display bucket Set the averaging method with Avg Type Video or RMS e Sample displays the instantaneous level of the signal at the center of the bucket represented by each display point Peak displays the maximum of the signal within the bucket Negative Peak displays the minimum of the signal within the bucket Neither average nor sample detectors measure amplitudes of CW signals as accurately as peak because they may not find a spectral component s true peak Howeve
301. ints in Zero Span lt A 03 03 401 fixed A 04 xx 101 2 A 05 00 2 Zero Span sets Signal Track Off and FREQUENCY Scale Type to linear mode Changes the analyzer frequency span to the previous span setting If pressed after Signal Track is turned off the span setting returns to the span that was in effect before Signal Track was turned on This is true even if Signal Track was turned on as part of Span Zoom Last span sets Segmented Off The state of Frequency Scale Type Log Lin is included in the recalled information Key Access SPAN X Scale Accesses menu keys that allow you to control the two window zone function This function allows you to have an upper window with a broad display of frequency and two zone markers vertical bars that define the span for the lower window Key Access SPAN X Scale S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q au 9 E D E E Ei m z E E D Ba 5 x E Front Panel Key Reference SPAN X Scale Zone On Off Zone On allows you to change from a one window to a two window display The top window will display the trace with two vertical lines Zone Markers displayed at center frequency plus and minus 546 of the current span You can change the default zone frequency and zone span values using the Zone Center and Zone Span keys The top window will be inactive The bottom window will display the section of the trace in th
302. ion Flowchart Y PEAK No Marker Noise Yes Res Bw Yes AVERAGE CS anne AVERAGE No No SAMPLE Band Power Yes Res Bw Yes ON AVERAGE No No SAMPLE Trace Average N eS Average Ty Yes AVERAGE ON Power No SAMPLE 7 Yes Demod View SAMPLE ON No No Any Trace in Max Hold Any Trace in Min Hold SAMPLE No Any Trace in Min Hold Yes NEGATIVE PEAK No PEAK cl72a Average Allows you to select between video and power RMS averaging via the Average Type key Chapter 2 55 m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Si Icy be 5 be bi E 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E D Ba 5 x e Front Panel Key Reference Auto Couple Average detection is used when measuring the average value of the amplitude across each trace interval bucket The averaging method used by the Average detector will be set to either Video or Power as appropriate when the Average Type is Auto coupled or may be set explicitly through the BW Avg Avg Type Auto Man key Video Average detection computes the averaged trace interval as appropriate to the Y axis scale Log power average when in log scale Voltage average when in linear scale Frequency deviation when Demod View is enabled for FM Demod Power Average root mean square or RMS detection computes the RMS of the samples collected across the trace interval The number of samples incl
303. ion the markers press Marker to access Delta Pair and Span Pair keys If Detector Auto is selected average detection is used for RBW 1 kHz and Sample detection is used for RBW 1 KHz The repeatability of your band power marker measurement can be impacted by the current number of sweep points being used m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be 5 be bi Chapter 2 107 au 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E E D Ba 5 x e NOTE NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Marker If you only have a few sweep points in the measurement band of interest then small changes will have a direct impact on the measurement result Increasing your number of sweep points will decrease that affect and improve the repeatability Key Access Marker More Function For best accuracy set the video bandwidth to at least ten times the resolution bandwidth to minimize its averaging effect Band Power has no meaning in zero span and the indicated value is independent of signal level and marker placement Marker Noise 108 Reads out the average noise level referenced to a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth If no marker is present a marker appears at the center of the display When Marker Noise is enabled in resolution bandwidths of 1 kHz and above the auto coupled detector selection is set to Average and the Avg Type is set to Power because the trade off between sweep time and variance of the re
304. ision A 14 00 Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Scale Div FM Demodulation Squelch SENSe DEMod SQUelch integer SENSe DEMod SQUelch Allows you to adjust the squelch level The squelch level mutes weak signals and passes strong signals Only the audio level is affected If the internal speaker is On audio signals are not output unless the signal strength exceeds the squelch threshold This function is only available when Option AYQ is used as the instrument FM demodulation hardware The squelch level does not affect the rear panel AUX VIDEO OUT signal Squelch level is indicated on screen by the numbers 0 to 100 with 0 being the minimum threshold all signals are passed and 100 being the maximum threshold no signals are passed The default squelch value is 0 Factory Preset and RST 0 Range 0 to 100 History Added with firmware revision A 14 00 Front Panel Access Det Demod Demod Demodulation Control SENSe DEMod STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe DEMod STATe Turns demodulation on or off Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Det Demod Demod Off 314 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference SENSe DEMod Subsection Demod Time SENSe DEMod TIME time SENSe DEMod TIME Sets the time used for frequency domain demodulation Factory Preset and RST 500 ms Range 2 ms to 100s Default Unit seconds Front Panel Access Det Demod Demod Demod Time Demod View S
305. ition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Frequency Event register when that bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Condition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Questionable Integrity Enable STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle lt integer gt STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Event register which also sets the Integrity Summary bit bit 9 in the Questionable Register The variable lt integer gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Event Query STATus QUEStionable INTegrity EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Event register Chapter 5
306. itude correction factor data point Up to 200 points may be defined for each set Enter the point number to be created or edited by using the numeric keypad then press Enter or use the knob tab or step keys to move to an existing point Press Bk Sp to correct errors After selecting a point Frequency becomes active Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Cable Edit Frequency Allows you to enter the frequency value for an amplitude correction point Enter the frequency value by using the numeric keypad Change the frequency value by using the step keys or the knob Press Bk Sp to correct errors After selecting a point Amplitude becomes active A frequency coordinate must always be specified for amplitude correction factors m S 5 T az Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q 43 Front Panel Key Reference AMPLITUDE Y Scale Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Cable Edit NOTE The amplitude correction entered for the lowest frequency will be applied to all frequencies less than the lowest frequency entered Similarly the amplitude correction for the highest frequency entered will be applied to all frequencies greater than the highest frequency entered NOTE For amplitude correction factors a maximum of two entries with the same frequency are valid Only the first and last points of a series with the same frequency values are used any middle points are ignored
307. ive PACE XONINONE sssseeeeeee sidak 363 SYS lem OMNIuIicale SERAL RECeive PAGE deese hey t ER pt a e E ER Roto icio cR 363 Sia Tere CONFI HAR Dware STATE OFFRONO iud dde e bib pie V ete qoe qmd ES ere 363 SYSToncCONFigurc HARDwWwaress DAIG dE RES SE EEN OPER e bad bes Red 363 SYSTenv CON Eue HARD FAE errotari iere inoar huera eX MERE ER Eeer Ee nes 363 SYS Teni CONFicure LEEY STATS OPPIONIOD EE rre keri i eeka EELER 364 SYST CONF Are LEEY STAR EE 364 Soren ON een LRE EE 364 SYSTem CONFigure S YSTem STATe OPPONENT e Rt eee HERERO RR ere 365 CA RE IN Freuie Ss S Temps TATE eerta por o RI OCR OR D RS EIC EE OCHOA RR Oe c 365 Bo len ONE S YS PUR eso oboe x a epee WAR E P RA E RN EE PER EU GR E Rope pads pute 364 gt io Ton DATE year monha day ou cc cba eR DC RE 4b x eb usps qu ie p eed do eere 365 orare EE 365 SYSTenvERRor VERBoSe OPPIONIOLL reri sare e ER eR CREE EE RR ESE en 365 Dio renr ERRO ces rye toa eee OTAN oie E EEE LEEA REES ENA ntn RS RES EE 365 nYSIomERBOHITINEXT i12ssnusuekqe REA RRORxERERYRAREAGRRRXPDd RR Y RERCERERSIXERPATRARARUTES 365 mega HT re et deet L TETT T E ER 366 27 E a S e S E 5 E gt Q E un E S g E Q KE S z List of Commands DY STenuLREEY lt opion gt lt license ROW FP EEN 366 SYS Tent LEB DELete EEN neds ch aves Sheena SUES ENEE EE AE 367 E SOUR EE eros dig tots Bee maak aes EE edo ads eater ge dee 366 ped nt sid or A Ae ee ee 367
308. ixed frequency Changing the center changes the center point between the two markers while maintaining the frequency difference This mode is useful in functions such as Band Power For information on using this function while in segmented sweep refer to Interaction with Other Analyzer Functions in the segmented sweep section of this chapter which begins on Segmented on page 145 Span Pair is not available when FREQUENCY Scale Type Log is selected Key Access Marker Turns off the marker that has been selected by the Select Marker 1 2 3 4 key Off also turns off functions related to the selected marker such as signal track and demodulation It also removes marker annotation from the display Key Access Marker Selects one of the four possible markers A marker that has already been turned on will become active when it is selected If a marker has already been turned on and assigned to a specific trace it will become active on that trace if that marker is selected 106 Chapter2 Marker Trace Auto 123 Readout Function Front Panel Key Reference Marker Key Access Marker More Assigns a marker to a trace Pressing Marker Trace Auto 1 23 will activate a marker on trace 1 if there are no markers turned on If a marker is currently active press Marker Trace Auto 1 23 until 1 2 or 3 is underlined The active marker will be moved to the selected trace Selecting the Auto mode will move the marker to the trace that is
309. k Left Min Search Pk Pk Search Continuous Pk On Off NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Peak Search Key Access Peak Search Meas Tools Function Off Refer to Off on page 106 Key Access Peak Search Meas Tools Function Places the marker on the next highest peak The signal peak must exceed the peak threshold value by the peak excursion value If there is no peak the marker will not move Also see the Peak Excursion and Peak Threshold key descriptions Key Access Search Moves the marker to the next peak to the right of the current marker The signal peak must exceed the peak threshold value by the peak excursion value If there is no peak to the right the marker will not move and the No Peak Found error message will appear on the display Also see the Peak Excursion and Peak Threshold key descriptions Key Access Search Moves the marker to the next peak to the left of the current marker The signal peak must exceed the peak threshold value by the peak excursion value If there is no peak to the left the marker will not move and the No Peak Found error message will appear on the display Also see the Peak Excursion and Peak Threshold key descriptions Key Access Search Moves the active marker to the minimum detected amplitude value Key Access Search Finds and displays the frequency or time if in zero span and amplitude differences between the highest and lowest trace points Key Access
310. k Readout 119 Peak Search 115 Marker Search 115 menu map 406 peak search define 251 left 248 minimum 249 next 249 peak threshold 251 perform 248 right 249 Peak Sort Freq Ampl 118 Peak Table 118 Peak Table On Off 118 Peak Threshold 117 peak to peak measurement 116 peaks list of 373 Index 419 Index number of points 373 sorting 374 Period Marker Readout menu 107 persistent state values preset to default 369 personalities currently available 290 selecting 113 290 291 phase noise auto manual 325 phase noise optimization 325 Pk Pk Search 116 Point Display Edit menu 73 Point key 48 antenna amplitude corrections edit 41 cable amplitude corrections 43 correction data for other than antenna or cable 46 polling method accessing status register 198 portrait printing 282 positive peak detection 316 positive transition register definition 195 power tracking 347 tracking generator 344 tracking generator fixed swept 345 tracking peak 347 units 388 Power Average RMS 56 Power On Last Preset 152 154 Power On Preset 152 power sweep tracking generator on off 345 range 345 347 start amplitude 346 step auto on off 346 step size 346 Power Sweep On Off 133 power on conditions preset last 368 time milliseconds 368 time seconds 367 power on state of spectrum analyzer 152 153 preamplifier gain 50 preamplifier on off 330 Preferen
311. ker Count On is pressed a marker is activated at the center of the display Press Marker Count Off to turn the marker counter off Press Resolution Man to change the marker counter resolution to an uncoupled value Marker Count frequency readings are not affected by the frequency offset function An asterisk may appear in the upper right area of the display along with the message Cntr 1 the number in the message depends on the active marker The ratio of the resolution bandwidth to span must be greater than 0 002 for the marker count function to work properly Marker Count Widen Res BW appears on the display if the bandwidth to span ratio is less than 0 002 Widen RES BW indicates that the resolution bandwidth must be increased or the span decreased Key Access Freq Count Allows the resolution of the marker counter to be selected manually or auto coupled The marker counter has a resolution range of 1 Hz to 100 kHz The available resolution values are 1 Hz 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz and 100 KHz The resolution can be changed by using the step keys or by entering the resolution using the numeric keypad or knob The marker counter resolution can be auto coupled to the span by pressing Resolution Auto Key Access Freq Count Chapter 2 95 m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E NOTE CAUTION Center Freq
312. keys in Spectrum Analysis mode Refer to Chapter 2 Front Panel Key Reference on page 37 for key function descriptions See Volume 2 for the menu maps of the one button power measurements MEASURE key and their associated setup keys sde nwnw 389 Menu Maps What You Will Find in This Chapter What You Will Find in This Chapter This chapter provides menu maps for all front panel keys except those associated with the measurements available when you press the front panel MEASURE key Refer to Volume 2 for the one button power measurement key menus The Alpha Editor Menu is shown separately though it is accessed when entering data for many keys The front panel key menus appear in alphabetical order as follows Alpha Editor Menus Page 391 AMPLITUDE Y Scale Page 392 Page 393 Auto Couple Page 394 BW Avg Page 395 Det Demod Page 396 Display Page 397 File Page 398 Page 399 Page 400 Freq Count Page 401 FREQUENCY Channel Page 402 Input Output Page 403 Marker Page 404 Marker gt Page 405 Mode Peak Search Page 406 Preset Page 407 Print Setup Page 408 Source Page 409 SPAN X Scale Page 410 Sweep Page 411 System Page 412 Trace View Page 413 Trig Page 414 Ka Ki E E EI 390 Chapter 6 Menu Maps Alpha Editor Menu Alpha Editor Menu Alpha Editor Menus Alpha Editor 1 Alpha Editor Alpha Editor Alpha Editor More 20f2 Alpha Editor 3 Alpha Editor Alpha Editor Alpha Editor Mor More More 1
313. king capacitor is switched in for the ac mode Instrument damage can occur if there is a dc voltage present at the INPUT and dc coupling is selected Factory Preset and RST ac Remarks This command is available only on Agilent ESA spectrum analyzer models E4402B Option UKB E4407B Option UKB E4404B or E4405B See Table 5 1 for frequency range limits for your ESA model and option Selecting Input Coupling Model Number AC Frequency Range DC Frequency Range UKB E4402B with Option 100 kHz to 3 GHz 100 Hz to 3 GHz UKB E4404B 100 kHz to 6 7 GHz 9 kHz to 6 7 GHz E4404B with Option 100 kHz to 6 7 GHz 100 Hz to 6 7 GHz E4405B 100 kHz to 13 2 GHz 9 kHz to 13 2 GHz E4405B with Option UKB 100 kHz to 13 2 GHz 100 Hz to 13 2 GHz E4407B with Option 10 MHz to 26 5 GHz 100 Hz to 26 5 GHz UKB Front Panel Access Input Output or Input Coupling AC DC Chapter 5 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S c D oO 287 au 9 E D G o e Ei S e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference INPut Subsystem Select Internal or External Mixer INPut MIXer INTernal EXTernal INPut MIXer This command selects either the internal or external input mixer and is available only with Option AYZ External Mixing Refer also to commands in the SENSe MIXer subsection Factory Preset and RST INTernal
314. l Key Reference AMPLITUDE Y Scale Scales the vertical graticule divisions in logarithmic units when Log is underlined Logarithmic units may range from 0 1 to 20 dB per division When Lin is underlined the vertical divisions are linearly scaled and the default amplitude units are volts The top of the display is set to the reference level value and the bottom graticule becomes zero volts Each division of the graticule is one tenth of the reference level in volts Pressing Scale Type always sets the units specified for the current amplitude scale When Power On is set to Preset and Preset Type is set to Factory pressing Preset or powering on the analyzer sets the default units The fastest sweep time available when Lin is selected and the detector is set to average Det Demod Detector Average is 8 milliseconds Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Agilent E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B only Adjusts the frequency of the preselector filter above 2 85 GHz to optimize the amplitude accuracy at the active marker frequency With Input Mixer Ext selected and the Mixer Type set to Presel preselected Presel Center adjusts the frequency of the external preselector filter to maximize the amplitude at the active marker frequency If activated in a non preselected band Presel Center does nothing Preselector center should be used to improve amplitude accuracy for signals which fall into any one of the harmonic mixing bands The harmonic mixing ban
315. lay To eliminate an offset perform a Factory Preset or press Freq Offset 0 Hz When a frequency offset is entered its value appears on the bottom of the display as opposed to reference level offsets which appear on the left side of the display To eliminate an offset press Freq Offset 0 and Enter Pressing Preset also sets the offset to zero This function is not available when FREQUENCY Scale Type Log is selected Frequency Scale Type Log is not available when utilizing the frequency offset function Key Access FREQUENCY Channel Moves the signal that is nearest to the active marker to the center of the display and keeps the signal there ST appears in the lower left corner of the display An may appear in the upper right corner of the display while the analyzer is verifying that it has the correct signal Pressing Signal Track Off Preset with Preset Type set to Factory or Marker More Marker All Off turns off the signal track function When signal track is on and the span is reduced an automatic zoom is performed and the span is reduced in steps so that the signal remains at the center of the display If the span is zero signal track cannot be activated Key Access FREQUENCY Channel If no marker is active pressing Signal Track On will activate a marker perform a peak search and center the marker on the display Switching to zero span sets Signal Track Off FREQUENCY Scale Type Log and Seg
316. lay the measurement results Measure Cont allows you to continuously run a measurement displaying the results after each measurement cycle Key Access Meas Control Pauses the measurement Pressing Pause will toggle between pausing and resuming your measurement The key label will toggle between Pause and Resume If an averaged measurement was in progress the average counter is frozen and the measurement sweeping is halted Key Access Meas Control 112 Chapter2 Spectrum Analysis Mode Setup Spectrum Analysis Mode Front Panel Key Reference MODE MODE Selects the measurement mode of your analyzer Spectrum Analysis mode is the default mode and is for general purpose measurement use Additional measurement modes can be added to your instrument memory Example modes include Phase Noise requires Option 226 Noise Figure requires Option 219 GSM requires Option BAH and cdmaOne requires Option BAC Other modes besides Spectrum Analysis must be installed licensed in your instrument before they will appear in the Mode menu Refer to the individual measurement personality mode manuals for instructions on how to install the firmware Some modes also require the presence of specific hardware Selects the spectrum analysis measurement mode for your analyzer Enables you to change measurement settings common to all measurements in the MEASURE menu In Spectrum Analysis mode there are several built in power measurements Pa
317. le To recouple the analyzer functions the uncoupled function s must be individually set back to Auto Or you can press Auto All to return all of the functions to their default auto state Pressing Auto All will couple the following functions Sweep time will couple to the span detector mode resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth Detector Auto is set e Avg Type Auto is set e PHNoise Opt Auto is set e RF attenuation couples to reference level Center frequency step size will couple to 1046 of span Sweep coupling SR SA will couple back to SA mode e Source attenuation couples to source amplitude e Source power step couples to one vertical scale division Key Access Auto Couple Although Marker Count Gate Time and Marker Trace have Auto settings they are not affected by Auto All Chooses the LO local oscillator phase noise behavior that is optimum for measurement accuracy Key Access Auto Couple 52 Chapter 2 Detector Auto Man Front Panel Key Reference Auto Couple Auto Allows the analyzer to automatically select an LO phase noise behavior that is optimum for the selected span and RBW The Auto rules choose Fast Tuning whenever the span is gt 10 MHz otherwise the Auto rules choose Optimize f Key Access Auto Couple PhNoise Opt Auto Man Optimize f Optimizes for LO phase noise Key Access Auto Couple PhNoise Opt Auto Man Optimize LO for Fast Tuning The LO behavior compromi
318. le Delete Point Allows you to delete the amplitude correction data for the currently selected point The prompt If you are sure press key again to delete will appear on the display Pressing Delete Point again will delete the point and adjust all of the point numbers as appropriate Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections User Edit Delete Correction Allows you to clear all data from the selected amplitude correction set The prompt If you are sure press key again to delete will appear on the display Pressing Delete again will delete the correction set Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections User Freq Interp Log Lin Allows you to determine how trace values are computed between points in a correction table If the linear mode is selected a straight line is used between points in a correction table If the logarithmic mode is selected frequency values between points are computed by first taking the logarithm of both table values and the intermediate value Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections More Delete all Corrections Allows you to delete all amplitude correction sets Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections More Adds a positive or negative preamplifier gain value which is subtracted from the displayed signal Use negative values for gain and positive values for loss The function is similar to the Ref Lvl Offset function With the Ext Amp Gain function the attenuation ma
319. litude Correction Frequency Interpolation SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 X SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Sets the frequency interpolation to linear or logarithmic for the specified correction set Remarks Logarithmic frequency scale corrections are linearly interpolated between correction points with respect to the logarithm of the frequency Linear frequency scale corrections are interpolated along straight lines connecting adjacent points on a linear scale Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Corrections Freq Interp Log Lin Perform Amplitude Correction SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 STATe Turns the amplitude correction function on or off for the given set z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 SENSe CORRection CSET ALL STATe must be on for this command to function Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are as follows CSET or CSET1 is Antenna CSET2 is Cable CSET3 is Other CSET4 is User Front Panel Chapter 5 311 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference SENSe CORRection Subsection Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Corrections Antenna Cable Other User Correction On Off Input Impedance Correction SENSe CORRection IMPedance INPut MAGNitude number SENSe CORRecti
320. lity to other spectrum analyzers When used the parameters are converted as follows TYPE LINear maps to RMS TYPE LPOWer maps to VIDeo TYPE POWer maps to RMS TYPE SCALar and VOLTage will map to VIDeo in linear amplitude scale If the amplitude scale is LOG an error is generated TYPE LOG maps to VIDeo If the amplitude scale is not LOG linear or Y Axis Units Hz an error is generated For compatibility with firmware revisions prior to A 08 00 query SENSe AVERage TYPE will return LPOW or POW if LPOW or POW is used during the setting and no further changes have occurred to set the average type such as from the front panel Factory Preset and RST VID 304 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference SENSe AVERage Subsection History Changed with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access BW Avg Avg Type zx t er Q S E D Ki E Gi t T S P D O D Chapter 5 305 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference SENSe BANDwidth Subsection SENSe BANDwidth Subsection Resolution Bandwidth SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution freq SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Specifies the resolution bandwidth Example BAND 1 kHz Range 1 kHz to 5 MHz standard instrument 100 Hz to 5 MHz E4411B E4403B E4408B with Option 1DR 10 Hz to 5 MHz E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B E4407B with Option 1DR 1 Hz to 5 MHz
321. loaded into the analyzer and TRC formatted data cannot be loaded into most personal computer programs Refer to the Format key description Key Access File Save Type Displays all previously saved limits files and detects the current limits in preparation to save them in a file for retrieval at a future date Limits provide data sets to determine whether a trace has exceeded preset specifications Limit sets can hold up to 200 points and can only be saved individually Refer to the File Source key description Key Access File Save Type Displays all previously saved screen files and 83 S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q NOTE NOTE E 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Front Panel Key Reference File captures the current screen displayed in preparation to save it in a file for retrieval at a future date Screen files can be saved in any of the following formats Bitmap Metafile Reverse Bitmap and Reverse Metafile Refer to the Format key description Key Access File Save Type Screen files saved in WMF format can only be loaded into Microsoft applications such as Microsoft Word The screen saved is that which was displayed before pressing File For this reason the screens seen while in the file menus cannot be saved Format Corrections Displays all previously saved correction files and detects the current corr
322. lor Capable Yes No 126 Color On Off 127 Color Palette 156 color printing 281 colors reversing the display 297 command parameters 180 commands See command list following Contents See Also specific command condition register definition 195 configuration basic spectrum analyzer state 266 Connected To Previous Pt Yes No 74 Continuous Pk On Off 116 continuous sweep 143 continuous vs single measurement mode 284 control measurement commands 284 controller GPIB 188 copy trace 1 into 3 164 copy trace 2 into 3 164 copy trace command 371 correction amplitude 416 deleting 309 deleting correction set 311 merging data 310 on off 309 setting correction set 311 setting data 200 turning set on off 311 constant default 262 external amplifier 312 impedance mismatch 312 internal tracking generator 343 set amplitude deleting 311 set amplitude setting 311 correction factors 155 Correction On Off key cable 42 other than antenna or cable for 45 Corrections key 40 Corrections On Off key 47 corrections other than antenna or cable Edit key 46 corrections table loading from file 294 corrections table storing 297 coupled sweep time 142 Coupling AC DC 100 coupling ac dc 287 coupling none manual all automatic 267 Custom key 126 custom printer 281 D data exchange trace 372 format numeric 278 limit line merging 243 mean of trace 373 merging segmented sweep 336 moving t
323. low you to create and edit an amplitude correction factor set It puts the analyzer into a split screen mode where the correction data is displayed in a table under the trace data Pressing ESC while in this menu will exit the menu and remove the table from the screen New points will be applied only after the editor is closed The Tab keys are very useful for navigation between rows in the corrections table Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Antenna Point Allows you to create or edit an amplitude correction factor data point Up to 200 points may be defined for each set Enter the point number to be created or edited by using the numeric keypad then press Enter or use the knob tab or step keys to move to an existing point Press Bk Sp to correct errors After selecting a point Frequency becomes active Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Antenna Edit Frequency Allows you to enter the frequency value for an amplitude correction point Enter the frequency value by using the numeric keypad Change the frequency value by using the step keys or the knob Press Bk Sp to correct errors After selecting a point Amplitude becomes active A frequency coordinate must always be specified for amplitude correction factors Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Antenna Edit S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q 41 au 9 E D E E Ei m
324. m A 1 in this bit position indicates that the measurement timed out due to no trigger 12 4096 Invalid Data A in this bit position indicates that the present trace data does not reflect the existing analyzer state Trigger a new sweep and or measurement 13 8192 Unidentified Error A in this bit position indicates that a measurement has terminated for a reason other than that given in any of the other bits Chapter 4 225 Ka z D E Ki On E EI Ka E 2 Ki S Ke Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description Value 142 16384 Setting Limited Readjusted A in this bit position indicates that the user settings could not be achieved with the existing hardware values were set to limits 15 32768 Always Zero 0 This bit is always set to 0 a This bit applies to ESA optional measurement personalities only and may or may not be implemented in all such personalities Questionable Status Integrity Event Condition and Enable Registers The Questionable Status Integrity Condition Register continuously monitors the calibration status of the analyzer Condition registers are read only To query the condition register send the command STATus QUESt ionable INTegrity CONDition The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1 The transition filter specifies which types of bit state ch
325. marks The verbose SCPI error debugging state is global to all the SCPI interfaces History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access System Show Errors Verbose SCPI ON OFF au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Host Identification Query SYSTem HID This command returns a string that contains the host identification This ID is required in order to obtain the license key that enables a new application or option Front Panel Access System Show System License Key Install Application Option SYSTem LKEY option license key SYSTem LKEY lt option gt 366 Chapter 5 NOTE Remote Command Reference SYSTem Subsystem This command enters the license key required for installing the specified new application or option The query returns a string that contains the license key for a specified application or option that is already installed in the instrument The license key will also be returned if the application is not currently in memory but had been installed at some previous time Example SYST LKEY BAC 123A456B789C An option is a three character string that specifies the option or application that is to be installed as found in the Ordering Guide for example BAH for GSM Measurement Personality The option name must be enclosed in quotes A license key is a 12 character hexadecimal string given with the option The license key is unique t
326. mber of points per sweep for these models is always set to 401 Accesses the segmented sweep function and its editor Segmented sweep is a method in which you can select multiple frequency bands a maximum of 32 specify their parameters individually and display them as a single trace This function of the analyzer results in faster measurements and provides greater detail and resolution in particular bands of interest To set the parameters of individual segments go to the editor Sweep Segmented Modify Edit and refer to the parameter key descriptions below For measurement examples of the segmented sweep function refer to the Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzers Measurement Guide Key Access Sweep This feature is only available on ESA E series analyzers E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B E4407B with firmware revision 2 A 05 00 Segmented On Off S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Turning segmented sweep on Sweep Segmented Segmented On displays each Chapter 2 145 au 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E E D Ba 5 z e NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Sweep sweep segment from left to right in order of increasing start frequency When segments have the same start frequency the segments are displayed in order of increasing stop frequency Overlapping segments are acceptable Note however the reference marker for a marker delta will be displayed in the first segment
327. me SYSTem TIME lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt SYSTem TIME Sets the time of the real time clock of the instrument Hour must be an integer 0 to 23 Minute must be an integer 0 to 59 Second must be an integer O to 59 Front Panel Access System Time Date Set Time SCPI Version Query SYSTem VERSion Returns the SCPI version number with which the instrument complies 370 Chapter 5 NOTE Remote Command Reference TRACe Subsystem TRACe Subsystem The TRACe subsystem controls access to the internal trace memory of the analyzer Refer also to CALCulate and MMEMory subsystems for more trace and limit line commands Copy Trace TRACe COPY source trace dest trace Transfers the source trace to the destination trace and leaves the destination trace in VIEW mode Source traces are TRACEI1I213 Destination traces are TRACEI 213 Example TRAC COPY TRACE2 TRACEI Front Panel Access View Trace Operations 1 3 View Trace Operations 2 3 Transfer Trace Data TRACe DATA trace name gt RAWTRACE lt definite length block comma separated ASCII data TRACe DATA trace name gt RAWTRACE LLINE1 LLINE2 This command transfers trace data from the controller to the instrument The data format is set by the command FORMat TRACe DATA If you ve selected the ASCII data format the data returned is comma separated ASCII values For REAL INTeger and UINTeger d
328. ment conditions after a power on or Preset PRESet The instrument settings at power on will be either the factory preset or user preset as set by SYSTem PRESet TYPE FACTory USER LAST The instrument settings at power on will be the settings at the time of power down Factory Preset and RST The factory default is Preset This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access System Power On Preset Power On Last Preset Enable IF Video Sweep Output Ports SYSTem PORTs IFVSweep ENABle OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem PORTs IFVSweep ENABle This command enables or disables the IF video and sweep output ports for analyzers having options A4J IE Sweep and Video Ports and AYX Fast Time Domain Sweeps Factory Preset and RST On Example SYST PORT IFVS ENAB ON 368 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference SYSTem Subsystem Range On Off History Added with firmware revision A 04 00 Remarks Disable the output ports for faster measurement times Preset SYSTem PRESet Returns the instrument to a set of defined conditions The particular set is selected by SYSTem PRESet TYPE This command does not change any persistent parameters The term persistent means that the command retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access Preset Persistent State Reset SYSTem PRESet PERSistent Sets the
329. mented On are not available when Signal Track On is selected m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be 5 be bi Chapter 2 97 au 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E E D Ba 5 z e Scale Type Log Lin NOTE NOTE NOTE Front Panel Key Reference FREQUENCY Channel Agilent ESA E Series only E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B and E4407B Scales the horizontal x axis or frequency graticule divisions logarithmically when Scale Type Log is selected When Scale Type Lin is selected the horizontal divisions are linearly scaled In Scale Type Log the number of sweep points is limited to a multiple of the number of sweep segments For example if you select 308 points when 3 segments are required to create a logarithmic display the points will be set at 306 points The span determines the minimum number of sweep points Pressing Preset when Preset Type is set to Factory sets Scale Type to Lin Sweep time is auto coupled when Scale Type Log is selected Marker Span Pair Frequency Offset Input Mixer Ext Segmented On Signal Track On and Demod View On are not available when Scale Type Log is selected FREQUENCY Scale Type Log is not available when Frequency Offset Segmented On Input Mixer Ext Zero Span Signal Track On is selected Key Access FREQUENCY Channel 98 Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference Help Help Accesses a short
330. mputed by first taking the logarithm of both the table values Chapter2 NOTE X Axis Units Freq Time Front Panel Key Reference Display and the intermediate value A linear interpolation is then performed in this logarithmic frequency space An exactly analogous manipulation is done for logarithmic amplitude interpolation Key Access Display Limits Limit 1 or Limit 2 More Amptd Interp Log Lin Allows you to determine how limit trace values are computed between points in a limit table The available interpolation modes are linear and logarithmic If the linear mode is used for both frequency and amplitude a straight line is used when interpolating between points in a limit table Key Access Display Limits Limit 1 or Limit 2 More Interpolation modes determine how limit values are computed between points in the limit table The appearance of a limit trace is also affected by the amplitude scale which may be linear or logarithmic Selects whether limit lines will be entered using frequency or sweep time to define the segments They can be specified as a table of limit line segments of amplitude versus frequency or of amplitude versus time Time values are evaluated with respect to the analyzer sweep time A time value of zero corresponds to the start of the sweep which is at the left edge of the graticule Switching the limit line definition between frequency and time will erase both of the current limit lines
331. n num negative transition or STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition num positive transition where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The Questionable Status Power Event Register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters Event registers are destructive read only Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register To query the event register send the command STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt See Questionable Status Event Enable Register on page 212 for an explanation of how to set the summary bit using the event enable register In this case use the command STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle num 214 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Register Figure 4 12 Questionable Status Frequency Register Diagram Source Synth Unlocked Freq Ref Unlocked Reserved Reserved Synth Unlocked Invalid Span or BW Reserved Reserved Reserved Demodulation Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Always Zero 0 K e EI E Ki x oO ge CH a e oO bi a QUEStionable Status eed Condition Register 15 14 13 12 11109 87 654 321 0 QuEStionableStatusy y y y Y y v y y y v Y v Y v Y Positive 15 14 13 12 11109 87 654 321 0 Transition Filter QUEStionable Status REY Y V Yi titt tvt ttti FREQuency
332. n Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 486 1 1987 New York NY 1992 Valid ESA Spectrum Analyzer SCPI commands are used for examples in this chapter Topics included in this chapter are Creating Valid Commands Command Notation Syntax Special Characters in Commands Parameters in Commands Improving Measurement Speed Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line Overview of GPIB Option A4H Overview of RS 232 Option 1AX 176 Chapter 3 Creating Valid Commands Commands are not case sensitive and there are often many different ways of writing a particular command These are examples of valid commands for a given command syntax Command Syntax SENSe BANDwidth RESolution freq Programming Fundamentals Creating Valid Commands a vd EI ke o E B 5 Ke Es g z a E E 5 E N Sample Valid Commands The following sample commands are all identical They will all cause the same result e Sense Band Res 1700 e BANDWIDTH RESOLUTION 1 7e3 sens band 1 7KHZ SENS band 1 7E3Hz e band 1 7kHz e bandwidth RES 1 7e3Hz CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 Y The last command below returns different results than the commands above it The number 3 in the command causes this See the command description for more information CALC MARK Y calc mark y CALC MARK2 Y SENSe DETector FUNCtion NEGative POSitive SAMPle e DET FUNC NEG
333. n Memory CALCulate LLINe ALL DELete Deletes all limit lines in volatile memory History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access Display Limits Delete All Limits Control Limit Line Amplitude Interpolation CALCulate LLINe 1 2 AMPLitude INTerpolate TYPE LOGarithmic LINear CALCulate LLINe 1 2 AMPLitude INTerpolate TYPE Selects the type of interpolation done for the amplitude values of the designated limit line when comparing to measured data Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Remarks Once this function is defined the selected type is persistent Persistent means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 Front Panel Access Display Limits Limit 112 Amptd Interp Log Lin Set Fixed or Relative Limit Lines CALCulate LLINe CMODe FIXed RELative CALCulate LLINe CMODe Specifies whether the current limit lines are fixed or relative If you need to change the domain with CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain do it before this command Changing the domain deletes all the existing limit line values Chapter 5 239 Remote Command Reference CALCulate LLINe Subsection Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Remarks For Amplitude Parameters Regardless of whether the limit line is based on frequency or sweep time amplitude parameters in a limit line t
334. n SAMP1e is one possible is selected command choice A vertical stroke between key Command words indicates identical SENSe CHPower BANDwidth BWIDth INTegrati effects exist for several key on words Only one of these ke scd y Two identical commands are words is used at a time The f SENSe CHPower BANDwidth INTegration command functions the same SENSe CHPower BWIDth INTegration for either key word Key words in square brackets Command are optional when composing SENSe BANDwidth RESolution AUTO the command These implied P The following commands are all valid and have identical key words will be executed even if they are omitted uem y bandwidth auto bandwidth resolution auto sense bandwidth auto lt gt Angle brackets around a word Command U or words indicates they are not to be used literally in the command They represent the needed item Parameters in braces can optionally be used in the command either not at all once or several times SENSe FREQ freq In this command example the word freq should be replaced by an actual frequency SENSe FREQ 9 7 MHz Command SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DATA MERGe lt freq gt lt rel_ampl gt lt freq gt lt rel_amp1 gt A valid form of this command is SENSe CORRection CSET1 DATA MERGe 740000 94 1250000 31 3320000 1 7 Chapter 3 179 a vd EI ke o E B
335. n the Show Errors display Key Access System Show Errors Chapter 2 151 o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be 5 be bi au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Power On Preset Front Panel Key Reference System Local Accesses the following menu keys Key Access System Power On Last Preset Preset Type Save User Preset 152 Determines the state of the analyzer when the analyzer is powered on If the Power On function is set to Preset the state of the analyzer is the same as it is after Preset is pressed when the analyzer is powered on If the Power On function is set to Last then the state that the analyzer was in when it was powered off is recalled The setting Last or Preset of the Power On function is not changed by pressing Preset Use the Power On Preset menu key function to change the setting of the analyzer state that is recalled at power on Limit lines are not recalled when the analyzer is powered on Refer to Preset in this chapter for more information Key Access System Power On Preset Allows you to select User Mode or Factory preset Key Access System Power On Preset User Pressing Preset User sets the analyzer to the settings defined by the Save User Preset key Refer to Preset in this chapter for more information Key Access System Power On Preset Preset Type Mode Selects the mode preset type to be the instrum
336. n the command is issued the transition will be made the next time that state is entered as part of the trigger cycle When in the pause state the analyzer auto align process stops If the analyzer is paused for a Chapter 5 285 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D e Remote Command Reference INITiate Subsystem long period of time measurement accuracy may degrade Front Panel Access Meas Control Pause Restart the Measurement INITiate RESTart This command applies to measurements found in the MEASURE menu Use this command to restart the present measurement from the idle state regardless of its operating state It is equivalent to ENITiate IMMediate for single measurement mode or ABORt for continuous measurement mode Front Panel Access Restart Meas Control Restart Resume the Measurement INITiate RESume This command applies to measurements found in the MEASURE menu Use this command to resume the current measurement by changing the current measurement state from the paused state back to the wait for trigger state Front Panel Access Meas Control Resume 286 Chapter 5 CAUTION Table 5 1 INPut Subsystem The INPut subsystem controls the characteristics of analyzer input ports Input Port Coupling INPut COUPling AC DC INPut COUPling Remote Command Reference INPut Subsystem Selects ac or dc coupling for the front panel INPUT port A bloc
337. nalog to digital converter ADC 7 128 FM Demod Align Failure A in this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the FM demodulation circuitry Agilent ESA models E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B and E4407B Option BAA FM Demodulation only 8 256 Misc Sys Align Failure A in this bit position indicates that a digital demodulation RF alignment failure has occurred 9 512 Unused This bit is always set to 0 10 1024 Tracking Peak Needed A in this bit position indicates that a tracking peak needs to be performed the tracking generator is in operation Agilent ESA models E4402B E4403B E4405B E4407B and E4408B with Option IDN Tracking Generator only 11 2048 Align RF Skipped A in this bit position indicates that the alignment of the RF section was skipped perhaps due to an external 50 MHz signal having been detected 12 4096 Align RF Now Needed A in this bit position indicates that the RF section needs to be aligned Chapter 4 219 Ka Di D E Ki On E EI Ka E 2 Ki S Ke Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description Value 13 8192 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 14 16384 Align Needed A in this bit position indicates that a full alignment is needed perhaps due to a large tem
338. nalyzer may be referred to as the level at the input of an external amplitude conversion device When an amplitude offset is entered its value appears on the left side of the display under Of fst as opposed to frequency offsets which appear at the bottom of the display To eliminate an offset press Ref Lvl Offst 0 dB When Preset Type is set to Factory pressing Preset also sets the Offset to zero See also the Ext Amp Gain key description Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Agilent ESA E Series only E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B and E4407B with Option 1DS Turns the internal preamp on and off Pressing Int Preamp On results in a correction being applied to compensate for the gain of the preamp so that amplitude readings show the value at the input connector When the preamp is on a PA indication appears on the left side of the display The preamp is switched off in frequency bands above 3 GHz and the correction is not applied In this case the PA indication will still appear even though the preamp is not activated The preamp is specified to operate over a 1 MHz to 3 GHz range for the E4402B E4404B E4405B and E4407B The preamp range for the E4401B is 100 kHz to 1 5 GHz except for Option 1DP which is 1 MHz to 1 5 GHz Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Accesses the Corrections menu keys which allow you to enable the corrections function and to select which set of correction factors you wish to modify Key Access AMPLITUDE Y
339. nclude a 3 character extension which is automatically set by the instrument Key Access File Rename Dir Up Allows you to move up one directory level If at the top level Dir Up moves to the drive level displaying the available disk drives Key Access File Rename Dir Select Accesses the highlighted directory on your display Key Access File Rename Create Dir Allows you to create subdirectories A Key Access File More KI E S Create Dir E Now Executes the create directory function When the directory has 2 been created the message Directory XXXXXX created where XXXXXX is the directory name will appear in the k status line on your display E Key Access File More Create Dir 2 92 Chapter2 NOTE Format Front Panel Key Reference File Name Accesses the Alpha Editor and allows you to enter a filename The external keyboard can also be used to enter a filename while the alpha editor is accessed Complete your entry by pressing Return or Enter Key Access File More Create Dir Only capital letters A Z and digits 0 9 may appear in file names 8 characters maximum Additionally file names include a 3 digit extension which is automatically set by the instrument Dir Up Allows you to move up one directory level If at the top level Dir Up moves to the drive level displaying the available disk drives Key Access File More Create Dir Dir Select Accesses the highlighted directory on your display
340. ncy 96 323 start measurement 235 state of spectrum analyzer at power on 152 133 states setting amplitude correction 309 amplitude correction set 311 automatic averaging 303 Index 421 Index automatic detection type 316 averaging on off 302 external mixer 327 loading from file 295 query 232 recall 233 resolution BW automatic 306 save 234 signal identification 332 tracking generator output 300 status byte clearing 231 IEEE command 235 register 201 status command using 200 status registers commands 197 descriptions 193 194 operation condition register description 207 operation condition register description of bits 206 operation register description 205 operation register diagram 206 querying 200 questionable condition 208 questionable power register bit descriptions 211 questionable power register diagram 211 questionable register diagram 210 questionable status power register diagram 211 questionable status power bit descriptions 211 setting 200 standard event 203 using 194 STB command description 197 stimulus response mode 143 stop command 236 frequency 324 Stop Freq 96 stop frequency 96 subdirectories creating 296 subdirectories deleting 296 subtract display line from trace 2 164 Sweep 142 Sweep Cont Single 143 sweep control continuous 143 single 143 Sweep menu map 411 sweep output on off 368 sweep points setting number 33
341. nd 287 power maximizing 331 signal measuring 301 input attenuation 329 input attenuation control 38 input impedance 100 Input key 100 Input Mixer Int Ext key 101 Input Mixer key 101 Input Z Corr 100 Input Output key 100 Input Output menu map 403 instrument GPIB type 188 preset 369 reset 234 state loading from file 295 state storing 298 status monitoring 235 Int Preamp On Off key 40 intensity display angle 269 418 internal mixer selecting 288 internal preamplifier 40 internal source See tracking generator Inverse Time Marker Readout menu 107 IP instrument preset 369 L landscape printing 282 Language PCL3 PCLS5 126 Language Reference 227 Last Span 137 Level Setup 144 license key information display 364 license key deleting 367 license key entering 366 licensing 158 limit lines adding values 243 amplitude interpolation 239 correction sets delete all 239 define values 241 deleting 243 displaying 244 fixed and relative 76 fixed relative 239 frequency interpolation 241 from memory 294 margin size setting 244 margin displaying 244 maximum test 245 on off 245 storing 297 testing 238 testing data 244 type upper lower 245 x axis units 240 Limits 71 LIMITS FIX REL 76 Limits Fixed Rel 76 Line 167 line trigger 382 linear scale Amplitude Y Scale 39 linear scaling 277 listener GPIB 188 LO harmonic value 327 Load 86 Load Defaults 1
342. ned condition that is appropriate for remote programming operation RST is equivalent to performing the two commands SYSTem PRESet and CLS This command always performs a factory preset The preset performed by RST is always a factory preset That is the same preset performed by SYSTem PRESet when SYSTem PRESet TYPE is set to FACTory Front Panel Access Preset Save SAV lt register gt This command saves the instrument state to the specified instrument memory register Range Registers are an integer 0 to 127 Remarks See also commands MMEMory LOAD STATe and MMEMory STORe STATe Front Panel Access File Save State 234 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference IEEE Common Commands Service Request Enable SRE integer SRE This command sets the value of the service request enable register The query returns the value of the register Range Integer 0 to 255 Read Status Byte Query STB Returns the value of the status byte register without erasing its contents Remarks See CLS Trigger TRG This command triggers the instrument Use the TRIGger SEQuence SOURce command to select the trigger source Remarks See also the INITiate IMMediate command T H o Ki S Self Test Query Z amp TST S ZS T This query is used by some instruments for a self test g e For Agilent ESA analyzers TST always returns 0 no tests are performed Front Panel Access S
343. ng it or sending the CLS command which clears all event registers Setting and Querying the Status Register See Figure 4 3 Each bit in a register is represented by a numerical value based on its location This number is sent with the command to enable a particular bit To enable more than one bit send the sum of all of the bits involved For example to enable bit O and bit 6 of the standard event status register you would send the command ESE 65 1 64 The results of a query are evaluated in a similar way If the STB command returns a decimal value of 140 140 128 8 4 then bit 7 is true bit 3 is true and bit 2 is true 200 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Figure 4 3 Status Register Bit Values o 3 E e g A amp 3 o o Q S56 725 64 3o 76 e 4 2 7 Ki EE QO qy w Jo Le EEN OG dr Bit Number 15 14 1312 111098 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ck730a Details of Bits in All Registers S El Refer to Figure 4 2 The rest of this chapter lists the bits in each register shown in the figure along with S descriptions of their purpose G Status Byte Register Figure 4 4 Status Byte Register Diagram Status Byte Register Error Event Queue Summary Bit Questionable Status Summary Bit 4 Message Available MAV Standard Event Summary Bit 6 R
344. nt DATA ALL will delete any previous segment data Example SENSe SWEep SEGMent DATA ALL CSPan 50e06 5e6 1e5 1e5 101 0050 1e09 5e6 le5 1e5 101 05 This example defines two segments The first segment has a center frequency of 50 MHz and the second segment has a center frequency of 1 GHz Range The range depends upon the model number installed options and firmware revision of your instrument see the Specifications Guide for details The ranges that apply to all instrument models Chapter 5 335 Si ge S et oO a S S 5 ge Iz a Si g bi 2 Iz e oO au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe SWEep Subsection that can be controlled with this command are resolution bandwidth video bandwidth and number of points Resolution Bandwidth 1 kHz to 5 MHz Video Bandwidth 30 Hz to 3 MHz Number of Points 101 to 8192 2 to 8192 in zero span The total number of points for all segments is 8192 Default Unit Fundamental units without entering the actual units Front Panel Access Sweep Segmented Modify Edit Center Freq Sweep Segmented Modify Edit Span Sweep Segmented Modify Edit Resolution BW Sweep Segmented Modify Edit Video BW Sweep Segmented Modify Edit Points Sweep Segmented Modify Edit Sweep Time Merge Data With Segmented Sweep Data SENSe SWEep SEGMent DATA MERGe lt SSTop CS
345. nts and all of their associated setup keys and commands 36 Chapter 1 Front Panel Key Reference The front panel keys in this chapter are listed alphabetically The lower level menu keys are arranged as they appear in your analyzer menus Volume 2 describes all the front panel key information for the measurements that are available when you press the MEASURE key and all their associated setup keys 37 m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be 5 be bi au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Ref Level Attenuation Auto Man CAUTION Scale Div Front Panel Key Reference AMPLITUDE Y Scale AMPLITUDE Y Scale Activates the reference level function and accesses the amplitude menu keys Amplitude menu keys allow you to set functions that affect the way data on the vertical axis is displayed or corrected Allows the reference level to be changed This function is activated when AMPLITUDE Y Scale is pressed The reference level is the amplitude power or voltage represented by the top graticule on the display Changing the value of the reference level changes the absolute amplitude level in the selected amplitude units of the top graticule line The reference level can be changed using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad Pressing any digit 0 through 9 on the numeric keypad brings up the terminator menu Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Sets the in
346. o a specific option installed in the instrument with a specific host ID as returned by SYST HID The license key must be enclosed in quotes Front Panel Access System Licensing Delete a License Key SYSTem LKEY DELete option This command allows you to delete the license key from instrument memory for the selected option In general deleting the license key number is not recommended If the license key is deleted you will be unable to reload or update the application in instrument memory without re entering the license key The license key works with one particular instrument host ID only Query Instrument Options SYSTem OPTions Returns a list of the options that are installed It is a comma separated list such as 1DS 1D6 A4H A4J 1DN Front Panel Access System Show System Power On Elapsed Time SYSTem PON ETIMe Chapter 5 367 Si ge S et oO a S 8 5 f Iz a Si amp bi Ki e oO au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference SYSTem Subsystem Returns the number of seconds that have elapsed since the analyzer was turned on for the very first time Front Panel Access System Show System Power On Time SYSTem PON TIME Returns the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since the analyzer was last turned on Power On Type SYSTem PON TYPE PRESet LAST SYSTem PON TYPE Sets the defined instru
347. o file 294 testing against limit line 244 trace normalize 260 transferring trace 371 date display format 269 display on off 270 setting 365 date display 153 Datemode MDY DMY 153 dc input coupling command 287 defaults preset 369 Define Custom 126 delay time demodulation 315 gate trigger to open 340 Delete Display Edit menu 74 Delete Correction key 50 antenna amplitude corrections 42 cable amplitude corrections edit 45 other amplitude corrections edit 47 Delete Point Display Edit menu 74 Delete Point key 50 amplitude correction point for other than antenna or cable 47 antenna amplitude corrections 42 cable amplitude corrections 45 Delta 105 115 delta markers 249 Demod View 69 vertical scale 69 demodulation 313 AM 69 Bluetooth FM 69 displaying signal 315 FM 69 on off 314 squelch 314 time 315 type AM FM 313 Det Demod menu map 396 detection type auto on off 316 detection type selecting 316 317 detector EMI auto range 319 diagnostic commands 261 Diagnostics 157 digital resolution bandwidths 51 directories creating 296 deleting 296 of memory disk 293 display angle 269 annotation on off 271 auto ranging on off 273 commands 269 date format 269 date on off 270 display line amplitude 272 display line on off 272 full screen on off 271 graticule on off 271 hardware configuration 363 intensity angle 269 license key information 364 number printed p
348. o save Setup Displays all previously saved setup files and 82 Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference File detects the current setup parameters in preparation to save them in a file for retrieval at a future date Setup files include all instrument settings including traces states limits and corrections NOTE When viewing a floppy disc with saved Setup files filename set on a personal computer notice there are also many similarly named files with extensions like s01 s02 etc Do not delete these files as they are necessary to allow complete restoration of originally saved Setup State Trace Limits Screen Chapter 2 Key Access File Save Type Displays all previously saved state files and detects the current state parameters in preparation to save them in a file for retrieval at a future date State files include all instrument settings but not traces limits and corrections This is the default setting when power is applied to the analyzer Key Access File Save Type Displays all previously saved trace files TRC and detects the current trace in preparation to save it in a file for retrieval at a future date A trace can be saved individually or as a group of traces It can also be saved in CSV comma separated values format for importing into spreadsheets or in TRC format accompanied by the analyzer state for later recalling into the analyzer Note that CSV formatted data cannot be re
349. on BAA and B7B Factory Preset and RST SANalyzer Si ge S et oO a S S E E Ki a Si amp bi D e oO History Added TV trigger mode with firmware revision A 03 00 Front Panel Access Trig TV Trig Setup TV Source SA Trig TV Trig Setup TV Source EXT Video In Select TV Standard TRIGger SEQuence TV STANdard MNTSc JNTSc MPAL BPAL NPAL CPAL LSEC TRIGger SEQuence TV STANdard Chapter 5 385 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem This command allows you to choose one of the various TV standards Requires Option BAA and B7B As the TV standard is changed the current line value is clipped as necessary to keep it valid for the chosen standard and field mode For example line 600 is selected in Entire Frame mode in PAL N if NTSC M is selected the line number is clipped to 525 Or if line 313 is selected in Field 1 mode in PAL N and NTSC M is selected the line number is clipped to 263 Changing back to the PAL N standard will leave the line number at 263 Factory Preset and RST NTSC M Example TRIG SEQ TV STAN MNTS History Added TV trigger mode with firmware revision A 03 00 Remarks Once this function is defined the selected type is persistent Persistent means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle The setting will change with Load
350. on IMPedance INPut MAGNitude Amplitude correction is applied to the display data to adjust for measurement situations where the unit under test has a different impedance than the 50 Q input impedance of the analyzer Some Agilent ESA analyzers have Option 1DP 75 Q input In this case you may want to convert the data to make measurements in a 50 Q system Factory Preset and RST The factory default is the input impedance of the analyzer Range 50 or 75 ohms Default Unit ohms Front Panel Access Input Input Z Corr 50 75 Q External Amplifier Correction SENSe CORRection OFFSet MAGNitude rel ampl SENSe CORRection OFFSet MAGNitude A single value of amplitude correction can be applied to the displayed trace data to compensate for signal losses or gains that are due to other devices in the measurement setup rather than the unit under test Factory Preset and RST 0 dB Range 81 9 to 81 9 Default Unit dB Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Ext Amp Gain 312 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference SENSe DEMod Subsection SENSe DEMod Subsection Type of Demodulation SENSe DEMod AM FM SENSe DEMod Sets the type of demodulation FM is only available with Option BAA AYQ or 106 If you have multiple FM demodulation hardware options the hardware that will be used is automatically selected in order of priority with firmware revision A 14 00 and later 1 Option 106 Blueto
351. one span is not changed The center frequency of the lower window changes to reflect the new zone center frequency The lower window will not be updated until it is made active If no peak is found the zone will not be moved A signal must obey the parameters defined in 139 m S 5 T az Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Front Panel Key Reference SPAN X Scale Search Search Param to be identified as a peak signal Pressing Zone Pk Left will have no effect if the upper window is not the active window or if it is in zero span Key Access SPAN X Scale Zone ai 9 E D E E E EI Pa Em A E D Ba A 5 e 140 Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference Standby Standby Removes power from the analyzer except for a small portion of circuitry inside the switching power supply No internal time base circuitry or any other function outside of the power supply is powered when the analyzer is in standby S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e D Si c g E 3 Q Chapter 2 141 au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Sweep Time Auto Man NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Sweep Sweep Activates the sweep time function and accesses the following menu keys Selects the length of time the analyzer takes to tune across the displayed frequency span or in zero span the time the analyzer takes to sweep the full screen Reducing the sweep
352. ons Antenna Edit Point Frequency Amplitude Delete Point Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Cable Edit Point Frequency Amplitude Delete Point Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Other Edit Point Frequency Amplitude Delete Point Amplitude Y Scale Corrections User Edit Point Frequency Amplitude Delete Point Merge Additional Values into the Existing Amplitude Correction Data SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DATA MERGe freq rel ampl freq rel ampl Adds the points with the specified values to the current amplitude correction data allowing you to merge correction data If too much data is merged as many points as possible are merged into the existing data and then an error is reported e lt freq gt is the frequency in Hz where the correction should be applied no unit is allowed in this parameter e rel ampl gt is the amount of relative amplitude correction in dB needed no unit is allowed in this parameter Remarks CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are as follows CSET or CSET1 is Antenna CSET2 is Cable CSET3 is Other CSETA is User 310 Chapter 5 NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe CORRection Subsection Delete Amplitude Correction SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DELete Deletes the specified correction set If the set was On it is turned Off Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Corrections Antenna Cable Other User Delete Correction Set Amp
353. or analyzers having Option B7E RF Communications Hardware with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access Trig Free Run 382 Chapter 5 NOTE NOTE Remote Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem Trig Video Trig Line Trig External Pos Neg Trig TV Trig RF Burst Trigger Delay is not available in Free Run so turning Free Run on turns off Trigger Delay but preserves the value of Trigger Delay Set TV Field Mode TRIGger SEQuence TV FMODe ENTire ODD EVEN TRIGger SEQuence TV FMODe This command allows the user to determine how the fields of the TV picture signal will be treated by the trigger system Requires Option BAA and B7B Factory Preset and RST Range ENTire entire frame ENTire entire frame For formats NTSC M NTSC Japan and PAL M the minimum line is 1 and the maximum line is 525 For formats PAL B D G H I PAL N PAL N Combin and SECAM L the minimum line is 1 and the maximum line is 625 ODD Field 1 For formats NTSC M NTSC Japan and PAL M the minimum line is 1 and the maximum line is 263 For formats PAL B D G H I PAL N PAL N Combin and SECAM L the minimum line is 1 and the maximum line is 313 EVEN Field 2 For formats NTSC M NTSC Japan and PAL M the minimum line is 1 and the maximum line is 262 For formats PAL B D G H I PAL N PAL N Combin and SECAM L the minimum line is 1 and the maximum line is 312 Refe
354. ory Preset and RST On Turn the Full Screen Display On Off DISPlay MENU STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay MENU STATe Turns the full screen display mode on or off Press System System to turn off full screen mode History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Window Annotation DISPlay WINDow ANNotation ALL OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay WINDow ANNotation ALL Turns the screen annotation on or off for all windows Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access Display Preferences Annotation On Off Trace Graticule Display z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 DISPlay WINDow TRACe GRATicule GRID STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay WINDow TRACe GRATicule GRID STATe Turns the graticule on or off Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access Display Preferences Graticule On Off Trace X Axis Scale Offset DISPlay WINDow TRACe X SCALe OFFSet freq Chapter 5 271 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay WINDow TRACe X SCALe OFFSet Specifies the frequency offset for all frequency readouts such as center frequency except that it does not affect marker count Factory Preset and RST 0 Hz Range 500 THz to 500 THz Default Unit Hz History Prior to firmware revision A 06 00 the lower range is 3 GHz Remarks Frequency offset is not available when frequency sc
355. osetenberen d RARE ORE RR RA Y RR 359 Questionable Power Negative Transition A3 EUEE ENEE 005 a8 EE EE ER A EEN 359 Questionable Power Positive Transition 44 ses EE eR EELER NENNEN EN 459 Questionable Positive Heng ENEE IER Gp Re E UC ERE GU SEU eee 360 oie Deh UDEV e Me CD TTE 361 GPIB EE EE 361 Sepa Port DTR BOP ue ausi wen Redi ER eT Rd RU DERE REMANERE Bed VPE 361 aerial Port RIS SO Te eg eet SCR ROREN RUP Rep EE Kol Bee 362 Geer Port Baud Rare SOU be EE AE A E eh Ee 362 aenal Port Receive Pace Seb 445 9x bre Pr eoe debt dich ene dq 363 burial Por Transm Pace Setup uere eco uipeckDCRRECEEPPEREHPEERU E REROPYES CEPS 363 Hardware Contieuration Query AE Ee Ee 93d bee A Ee 363 Display the Hardware Confttgutallol d oscebe deme bier see ERR RES E RE ee 363 Query License Key IntoftaDOly usos sx dee EE dereen 364 Display License Key IBDOEIWBOD 4 edades dree breede Bee Seet b sql 364 System Conidnslom QUIY ule excReez E REDXU RERUC RE RR KP acie E RE qe Ead 364 Display System E E voie o qol eor iebs qoe eoe beds FERE ERE PERS 365 det Dale La diens ect e Aoi R HIS de R hob Re iie dob Rode dele e Re e RR ER Roe EP e ERA 365 Error Intormalton Query 62 64 4552 625 Rib S ROSAS EERE EE A 365 Contents S S g 2 S Locate SCPI Command ENOS 2 gd LE eee Pra 365 n post dentucatior QUOD Leo ebd p dob Sq Ede obe bbb ed MACRO rep bo FEED PE PES 366 License Key Install Application Option ENER EEN REN ERKENNEN EE RERO 366 Deleted L3pednts
356. ositive Transition Filter 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 6 QUEStionable Status Y Y v v Y v vs Negative 15 14 13 12 1110987 6 Transition Filter QUEStionable Status Y Y v Y Y Y Y Event Register 15 14 13 12 11109 87 6 CO A C Zr CO c1 A Po Sch e c1 A Po e ol aS n2 wesch e ZZ GE a I 1 1 L1 CERES S amp CT CT 1I L L 1 1 ERR ER EE L l1 T l 1 1 L 1 amp ELE E amp QUEStionable Status LL ETT R Enable EE 15 14 18 12 11 10 0 To Status Byte Register Bit 3 ck759a 210 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions STATus QUEStionable POWer Register Figure 4 10 Questionable Status Power Register Diagram R PP Tripped Source Unleveled Source LO Unleveled LO Unleveled 50 MHz Osc Unleveled Reserved Input Overload Tripped Unused LO Out Unleveled Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Always Zero 0 QUEStionable Statu POWer 15 14 13 12 11 109 87654 32 10 Condition Register QUEStionable Status Y y Y v Y Y Yt Y Y YS Aiba 15 14 13 12 11 00987 65432 10 Positive Transition Filte Werer VY X V Y Y Y V Y Y Y V Y Y v 3 POWer 15 14 13 12 11 1009 87 65 43 210 Negative Transition Filter Foy Y Y Y V V Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y QUEStionable Status POWer 15 14 13 12 11109 87 654 32 1 0 Event Regi
357. oth 2 Option AYQ Quasi peak detection and FM demodulation 3 Option BAA FM Demodulation Factory Preset and RST AM Front Panel Access Det Demod Demod AM Det Demod Demod FM FM Deviation SENSe DEMod FMDeviation freq SENSe DEMod FMDeviation Sets the total FM frequency deviation for displaying the demodulation FM Deviation can only be changed if you have Options BAA or AYQ installed For Option 106 only the query form of the command is applicable If you have multiple FM demodulation hardware options the hardware that will be used is automatically selected in order of priority with firmware revision A 14 00 or later 1 Option 106 Bluetooth 2 Option AYQ Quasi peak detection and FM demodulation 3 Option BAA FM Demodulation Factory Preset and RST 100 kHz for Option BAA AYQ Approximately 40 kHz for Option 106 determined during FM demodulation alignment 1 Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Agilent Technologies under license Chapter 5 313 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe DEMod Subsection Range 5 kHz to 1 2 MHz If 1 0 MHz is entered as the deviation frequency peak to peak would be 1 MHz times 2 2 0 MHz or 200 kHz division Default Unit Hz History Modified with firmware rev
358. ough takes into account Start Frequency Span Resolution Bandwidth Resolution Bandwidth shape factor and Frequency Accuracy If there is no point of inflection within the LO feedthrough range the point on the trace with maximum amplitude that is higher in frequency than the LO feedthrough range will be selected Peak Search may locate the LO feedthrough when FREQUENCY Scale Type Log is selected Accesses the following frequently used menu keys which are replicated here for your convenience Peak Search Performs peak search as described above Key access Peak Search Meas Tools Next Pk Right Refer to Next Pk Right on page 116 Key access Peak Search Meas Tools Next Pk Left Refer to Next Pk Left on page 116 of this chapter Key access Peak Search Meas Tools Delta Refer to Delta on page 105 Key access Peak Search Meas Tools Mkr CF Refer to Mkr CF on page 120 Key access Peak Search Meas Tools Mkr gt Ref Lvl Refer to Mkr Ref on page 121 Key access Peak Search Meas Tools Function Refer to Function on page 107 Key Access Peak Search Meas Tools Band Power Refer to Band Power on page 107 Key Access Peak Search Meas Tools Function m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be e 5 be bi Marker Noise Refer to Marker Noise on page 108 Chapter 2 115 E 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E D Ba 5 x e Next Peak Next Pk Right Next P
359. p Set the Average Count SENSe AVERage COUNt integer SENSe AVERage COUNt Specifies the number of measurements that are combined Factory Preset and RST 100 Range 1 to 8192 Front Panel Access BW Avg Average On Off Turn Averaging On Off SENSe AVERage STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe AVERage STATe This command toggles averaging off and on Averaging combines the value of successive measurements to average out measurement variations Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks When a measurement under the front panel MEASURE key is started this command is turned off for video averaging SENSe AVERage TYPE VIDeo If this command is turned on for video averaging when any of the MEASURE key measurements are in progress that measurement will be stopped Front Panel Access BW Avg Average On Off 302 Chapter5 Figure 5 1 Remote Command Reference SENSe AVERage Subsection Turn Automatic Averaging On Off SENSe AVERage TYPE AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe AVERage TYPE AUTO Sets the averaging to be automatically set to the appropriate type for the current measurement setup Or allows you to manually choose the type of averaging with SENSe AVERage TYPE When AUTO is On If the Y Axis Scale is not Linear or Log then average type is Video Y Axis Scale Averaging If the Y Axis Scale is Linear or Log then average type is Power Averaging If the Detector is Peak Sample or
360. page of show system It is grayed out if you are on the last page or only one page exists Key Access System More Show System Gives detailed information about the hardware installed on your analyzer Key Access System More Prev Page Next Page Allows you to access the previous page of show hardware It is grayed out if you are on the first page or only one page exists Key Access System More Show Hdwr Allows you to access the next page of show hardware It is grayed out if you are on the last page or only one page exists Key Access System More Show Hdwr Accesses the Color Palette menu keys These keys are only available with analyzers having a color display Key Access System More Default Vision Impair 1 and Vision Impair 2 Optical Filter Monochrome 156 Sets all the display screen attributes to the factory defined colors Key Access System More Color Palette The special colors built into the Vision Impair 1 and Vision Impair 2 keys accommodate most color deficient vision problems Key Access System More Color Palette Accommodates the use of protective goggles while viewing lasers Key Access System More Color Palette Sets the display screen to green monochrome The monochrome display uses different shades of green for each green value This is especially useful for driving external monochrome monitors Key Access System More Color Palette Chapter2 Front Panel Key
361. parator is to queue multiple commands or queries in order to obtain multiple actions and or responses Make sure that you do not attempt to use the semicolon as a terminator when using RS 232 control Basically all binary trace and response data is terminated with lt NL gt lt END gt as defined in Section 8 5 of IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 486 1 1987 New York NY 1992 The following are some examples of good and bad commands The examples are created from an ESA spectrum analyzer with the simple set of commands indicated below SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation 40dB SENSe FREQuency STARt POWer RF MIXer RANGe UPPer 186 Chapter3 Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal 1 SLOPe POSitive Bad Command Good Command PWR ATT 40dB Programming Fundamentals o E ke bei E E E 5 ke E 5 E 5 5 Et GC 2 POW ATT 40dB The short form of POWER is POW not PWR FREQ STAR 30MHz MIX RANG 20dBm FREQ STAR 30MHz POW MIX RANG 20dBm The MIX RANG command is in the same SENSE subsystem as FREQ but executing the FREQ command puts you back at the SENSE level You must specify POWto get to the MIX RANG command FREQ STAR 30MHz POW MIX RANG 20dBm FREQ STAR 30MHz POW MIX RANG 20dBm MIX and POW ATT 40dB TRIG FREQ
362. perature change having been detected with auto align off or due to default data being used 15 32768 Always Zero 0 This bit is always set to 0 220 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated Register Figure 4 14 Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Register Diagram Oversweep Meas Uncal Signal Indent On Reserved Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused DR e EI E Ki x oO ge CH a e oO bi a Always Zero 0 QUEStionable Status Condition Register 15 14 13 12 11109876543 2 1 QUEStionable Status EE Integrity Uncalibrated Positive 15 14 13 12 131109 87 65 4 3 2 1 T ition Filt QUEStionable Status EENENZEIIIIFIZIE Necative nealibrated 15 44 13 12 1110987654321 Transition Filter QUEStionable Status GER Integrity Uncalibrated Event Regieter 15 14 18 12 41100987 65 4 3 2 1 O 14 13 12 11109 87 65 4 3 2 1 QUEStionable Status LLL LLLLLLELLLLA Event 15 14 13 12 11109 87 654 321 0 Enable Register To Questionable Integrity Status Register Bit 3 cl77a Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition Register are given in the following table Chapter 4 221 Ka Di D E Ki On E EI Ka E 2 Ki S Ke Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the St
363. pki 249 Marker Peale Minmim m Search 4o vro pbk SESSLER AREAS TERR RLEKGP TEE RS 249 Marker Mode EE 249 Dene Peak BESCO sees p can gay EE EEN eee PO ebd e A 250 eme PESE Sear Age me Rated ded AER Pici e bani ean idle rd ke OE eee OR 251 Deine Peak ThiSSBoli s ied pe boc Aes crab EE 23 Pe3k to Peak Delta MIKES ouo Lega ex es pen NER M REI eR EN Rite E oper arii dedc uos 2l Set Center Frequedcy to the Marker Value iiec secte Re X DR HERES Rs 232 set Reference Level to the Marker Value iaushkeak bxc kk a REN RR REA E RERO UR 252 net pan be the Marker Valeo Mote EUR So ied ES RE FEE eben ddp dicis da 2932 Set Start Frequency to the Marker Value 222scnckseeieee gies DERE O E EEREN CER ERR E 292 Set Center Frequency Step Size to the Marker Value 00 02 ce eee eee ee ees 253 Set Stop Frequency to the Marker Valle 98 8 dE EIER RR REESE ER Ed a Ea A Eee 253 Maker QMO EE 254 Marker Table CDM 4uudbucbaosdsct ach heehee dr dh dur dab SURE Hoe garde Re 2323 Markert EE ou cede dep e te Rede RUE ERR to REC Ec gd RS Rap Rer e d ipse 254 Marker te Mace AU 2 ich 8 Ret Hie Ree obiit eie opo dee do eh oido dole deb EE 254 Con nuous Signal Tracking FUNGON e oescu es kr ert ROC Ed Or RR RR ded 254 Marker Valle ove hs oS sax oe REO ORE S eH EEEESISS SEL TERAASEREERONEESELEL ORDER 232 Contents S S g 2 E Span Markers Center Frequency X Value causes aa dvecedevekived EEN NEE LERRA SEES 235 n Wither A Pasion olde bebo EC ER PECES
364. plays all limit LIM files you may wish to rename Key Access File Rename Type Screen Displays all screen GIF and WMF files you may wish to rename Key Access File Rename Type S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q 91 Front Panel Key Reference File Sort Name Corrections Displays all corrections CBL ANT OTH AMP files you may wish to rename Key Access File Rename Type More Measurement Results Displays all previously saved measurement results files you may wish to rename Measurement results files are saved in CSV format for importing into spreadsheets Key Access File Rename Type More Sort accesses a menu of keys that allow you to view the files you wish to rename according to a selected file attribute The selections include By Date By Name By Extension By Size and Order Up Down Order UP allows you to view files you may wish to rename in ascending order for instance A B C Order Down allows you to view files you may wish to rename in descending order for instance C B A Key Access File Rename Accesses the Alpha Editor and allows you to enter a filename The external keyboard can also be used to enter a filename while the alpha editor is accessed Complete your entry by pressing Return or Enter NOTE Only capital letters A Z and digits 0 9 may appear in file names 8 characters maximum Additionally file names i
365. pling is set to dc Refer to the appropriate amplitude specifications and characteristics for your analyzer Selecting Input Coupling ESA Model AC Frequency Range DC Frequency Range UKB E4402B with Option 100 kHz to 3 GHz 100 Hz to 3 GHz UKB E4404B 100 kHz to 6 7 GHz 9 kHz to 6 7 GHz E4404B with Option 100 kHz to 6 7 GHz 100 Hz to 6 7 GHz E4405B E4405B with Option UKB 100 kHz to 13 2 GHz 100 kHz to 13 2 GHz 9 kHz to 13 2 GHz 100 Hz to 13 2 GHz E4407B with Option UKB 10 MHz to 26 5 GHz 100 Hz to 26 5 GHz When operating in dc coupled mode ensure protection of the input mixer by limiting the input level to 0 Vdc 30 dBm Key Access Input Output 100 Chapter 2 Amptd Ref f 50 MHz On Off Amptd Ref Out f 50 MHz On Off Input Mixer NOTE NOTE NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Input Output Agilent E4401B and E4411B only Turns the internal amplitude reference signal on or off When the internal amplitude reference signal is on the RF input is disabled Key Access Input Output Agilent E4402B E4403B E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B only Turns the external amplitude reference signal on or off Key Access Input Output Agilent E4407B with Option AYZ only Accesses the following Input Mixer menu keys Key Access Input Output Input Mixer Int Ext Allows you to select either the internal or an externally connected mixer a
366. plitude correction set The prompt If you are sure press key again to delete will appear on the display Pressing Delete again will delete the correction set Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Antenna Allows you to correct for cable loss but may be used for any kind of correction Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Correction On Off Turns the amplitude correction function on Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference AMPLITUDE Y Scale or off for the selected set The corrections state must be set to On for the correction to be applied Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Cable NOTE Antenna Cable and Other correction factors are generally entered as positive values This indicates a loss in the external device User correction factors are typically entered as negative values which indicate a gain in the external device Chapter 2 Edit Accesses menu keys that allow you to create and edit an amplitude correction factor set It puts the analyzer into a split screen mode where the correction data is displayed in a table under the trace data Pressing ESC while in this menu will exit the menu and remove the table from the screen New points will be applied only after the editor is closed The Tab keys are very useful for navigation between rows in the corrections table Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Cable Point Allows you to create or edit an ampl
367. points in the block The line feed EOI is sent as the terminator when using GPIB Remarks Commands MMEM STOR TRAC and MMEM LOAD TRAC are used to transfer trace data to or from the internal hard drive or floppy drive of the instrument The number of points in a trace is specified by SENSe SWEep POINts The trace data format is determined by FORMat TRACe DATA and the binary data byte order is determined by FORMat BORDer If the parameter to the query is LLINE1 or LLINE2 a very large positive or negative value is returned at any point outside the range of limit values A large positive number is returned for an upper limit and a large negative value for lower limits There is no SCPI short form for parameters LLINE1 LLINE2 Exchange Traces TRACe EXCHange trace 1 gt lt trace 2 Exchanges 2 traces point by point and leaves both in VIEW mode Trace 1 choices are TRACEII213 Trace 2 choices are TRACEII213 Example TRAC EXCH TRACE3 TRACE2 372 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference TRACe Subsystem Front Panel Access View Trace Operations 1 lt gt 3 View Trace Operations 2 lt gt 3 Trace Math Add TRACe MATH ADD lt destination trace gt lt source tracel gt lt source trace2 gt Adds the magnitudes of the two source traces and places the result in the destination trace Destination traces are TRACEI 213 Source traces are TRACEI1I213 Example TRAC MATH ADD TRACE2
368. programming language basics and on using GPIB and RS 232 Status Registers contains a comprehensive description of status registers explaining what status registers are and how to use them to programatically monitor instrument operation Remote Command Reference contains SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments programming commands for the spectrum analyzer Volume 2 includes the SCPI command information for all the functions associated with the one button measurements available when you press the front panel MEASURE key It also describes all the setup commands associated with each measurement 2 vo G E KI a E On ZS Ka Menu Maps illustrates the menu structure of the front panel and lower level keys Refer to this chapter to identify the lower level softkeys associated with the front panel keys Volume 2 includes the front panel key reference information for all the functions associated with the one button measurements available when you press the front panel MEASURE key and It also describes all the setup keys associated with each measurement One Button Measurement Functions are described in Volume 2 of the user programmer guide These measurements are selected from those available when you press the front panel MEASURE key with the default Spectrum Analysis Mode selected Volume 2 provides menu maps key descriptions and programming commands for the one button measureme
369. ps are a complete set of instrument parameters including traces states limits and corrections Key Access File Catalog Type Displays all state files STA in the selected directory State files contain most instrument settings Key Access File Catalog Type Displays all trace files TRC and CSV in the selected directory Key Access File Catalog Type Displays all limits files LIM in the selected directory Key Access File Catalog Type Displays all screen GIF and WMF files in the selected directory Key Access File Catalog Type Displays all correction files CANT CRL OTH AMP in the selected directory Key Access File Catalog Type More Measurement Results Displays all measurement results files in Chapter 2 the selected directory Measurement results files are saved in CSV format for importing 81 S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Save NOTE NOTE NOTE Front Panel Key Reference File into spreadsheets Key Access File Catalog Type More Sort Accesses the Sort menu keys that allow you to sort your files according to a selected file attribute The selections include By Date By Name By Extension By Size and Order Up Down Order Up allows you to sort files in ascending order for instance A B C Order Down allows you to sort
370. put Mixer Ext Ext Mix Band must be set to include the frequencies of interest in the segmented sweep table If the mixer range is not the same segmented sweep will not turn on If the mixer range is changed segmented sweep will be turned off Segmented sweep is not available when the following analyzer functions are turned on Demod Signal ID and Signal Track In addition keys which access these functions are grayed out if segmented sweep is on This is also true for the following functions MkrCF Mkr CF Step Mkr CF Start Mkr CF Stop MkrA Span Span Zoom Zone Span and Zero Span Confining marker pairs marker delta delta pair and span pair to one segment facilitates interpretation of marker readings However marker pairs can provide useful information across segments Amplitude readings are straightforward because the y axis is consistent over all segments Frequency or time readings require consideration of differences in sweep time number of and span when interpreting measurements across segments Marker delta functions differently depending upon the type of segment in which it is activated If you turn on marker delta in a segment set to 0 Hz span it remains in that segment and provides amplitude and time difference measurements If you initiate a marker delta in a non zero span segment it will function across segments and continue to display frequency and amplitude information Delta pair and span pair function sim
371. put attenuation to manual or automatic and allows you to set the attenuation level in 5 dB increments when Attenuation Man is selected The analyzer input attenuator which is normally coupled to the reference level control reduces the power level of the analyzer input signal at the input mixer The attenuator is recoupled when Attenuation Auto is selected Attenuation can be changed using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad To select 0 dB the numeric keypad must be used except for E4401B or E4411B Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale To prevent damage to the input mixer do not exceed a power level of 30 dBm at the input To prevent signal compression keep the power at the input mixer below 0 dBm With the attenuator set to Auto a signal at or below the reference level will result in a mixer level at or below the Max Mixer Lvl Sets the logarithmic units per vertical graticule division on the display The Scale Div function is only available when the Scale Type key is set to Log Scale Div values may range from 0 1 to 20 dB per division With FM Demod Option BAA installed and Demod View On selected the range is 1 KHz to 240 kHz div With Bluetooth FM Demodulation Option 106 installed and Demod View On selected the scale division is fixed at approximately 40 kHz division Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale 38 Chapter2 Scale Type Log Lin Presel Center Presel Adjust Y Axis Units Ref Lvl Offst Front Pane
372. r they both measure noise better without the positive bias of peak detection The detector in use is indicated on the left side of the display A will appear next to it if the detector has been manually selected Key Access Det Demod Auto The system selects peak detection as the default If a measurement condition arises where a different type of detection scheme would be better utilized the system will use the alternate scheme For example the Marker Noise function 64 Chapter2 Average Front Panel Key Reference Det Demod uses Average detection when in Auto mode because the system determines that the data will be more accurate for noise type signals Refer to Figure 2 1 on page 55 for more information Key Access Det Demod Detector Auto Man Average detection measures the average value of the amplitude across each trace interval bucket The averaging method will be set to either Video or Power as appropriate when the Average Type is Auto coupled or it may be set explicitly with the BW Avg Avg Type Auto Man key Video Average detection computes the averaged trace interval as appropriate to the Y axis scale e Log power average when in log scale Voltage average when in linear scale Frequency deviation when Demod View is enabled for FM Demod Power Average root mean square or RMS detection computes the RMS of the samples collected across the trace interval The number of samples included in the RMS
373. r 2 159 S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q E 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E D Ba 5 x e Personalities NOTE Service Front Panel Key Reference System Local brief description of the option Pressing any front panel key exits the license information screen e Prev Page Views a previous page of license information It is grayed out if you are on the first page or only one page exists e Next Page Views the next page of license information It is grayed out if you are on the last page or only one page exists Key Access System More Licensing Accesses a display listing the personalities that are currently installed in the analyzer Information about the personalities are under the column headings Opt option number Name option name Version personality version Licensed whether or not the personality is licensed and Size personality memory At the bottom of the display is a line showing the available memory for installing personalities Key Access System More More Some files are shared between personalities If shared files are installed a personality may require less room than is indicated on the display The Uninstall key will not delete any shared file unless the personality being deleted is the last personality to use the shared file Prev Page Allows you to view a previous page of installed personalities It is grayed out if
374. r Trigger A lin this bit position indicates S that a measurement is in a wait for trigger state S g 2 6 64 Waiting for ARM A lin this bit position indicates that 5 the hardware is being set up and is not yet ready to be S triggered E 7 128 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products gb 256 Paused A in this bit position indicates that the instrument is in the paused state of the measurement 9 512 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 10 1024 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 11 2048 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 12 4096 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 13 8192 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 14 16384 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 15 32768 Always Zero 0 a The description of this bit refers to any measurement under the MEASURE key b This bit applies to ESA optional measurement personalities only and may or may not be implemented in all such personalities STATus OPERation Condition and Event Enable Registers The STATus OPE
375. r Types RE EE Ee dee E ER Rea d Set RUP Ke E RUP dn Red RO e 288 Clheartbe Input Overload EE 289 INS Dorint SUPRISE A heed eh qo rb quie Qe bb dor Pw a d ER dale Heeb 290 G AD a MF 290 Select Application by NOMD Ae EE EE ROS BS Ee eb n 290 Select Appblicalol 3 due desee depre bead ue Pede dd ede bar edd ebd eI AE 291 MMENIG SUBS yE EE 293 Catalog the Selected Memory LOGSBOD s issues geriet ek ch Erde Er rr e 293 Copy EE rrr 293 Move Das to EE 294 LR EE 294 Loadatomccuons Table EE 294 10 Contents 3 S g 2 S Load a Limit Line from Memory to the Instrument 294 n Load ax Instrument State from amp Ple 4444s b ERR RO ROC EA E dE 295 Laad Trace Fron a Fileto the nsbutniesb 569 ccc eee tee EIREEN E ur ORCI Og 295 ake DHOSCIDIS E PEE quio b do dedi deitas epp das chaos Monee een debuts depended 296 Delete a DIMEO ss coche seth YA REES eee Rees 296 Set the save Screen Iimape Fil Typ EE 296 Set the Save Screen Image Background ioo osse eee OES hr RR ESS 296 Reverse the Colors of the Display cio ase dues korisiti EE Re EN EELER A A 297 Siore a Corrections Tableto a PM uu saepe och oboe bc Hata bodes 297 ated Eie NEE 297 plore Measurement Results ima Pile 222sresszre3erpea EE EE EE UR 208 Store a Screen Inge m a Graphie File i0s5050 5 nates ck ede Hee RR Se H A 208 Store an Instriment State 4 amp EE 298 Swed Taco mA Pe MP 299 Oat SBbRTSEETEG Leve EERAA ERPLeESeKEE RIEDEdeRERT ERES TL RREY E RENE boeP PME PRU ES 30
376. r is incremented beyond the upper limit the value will change to the lower limit and continue incrementing from there When the line number is decremented below the lower limit the value will change to the upper limit and continue decrementing from there Key Access Trig Option B7E RF Communications Hardware only Allows the analyzer to be m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Chapter 2 167 E 9 E D E E Ei m z E D Ba 5 x e Trig Delay On Off NOTE Trig Offset On Off NOTE NOTE TV Trig Setup Front Panel Key Reference Trig triggered by an RF burst envelope signal The trigger level can be set to either a level relative to the peak of the burst or to an absolute value Key Access Trig Allows you to set and turn on or off a delay during which the analyzer will wait to begin a sweep after receiving an external trigger signal This function is not available when Gate is on Trig Delay is active when External is selected Key Access Trig More This function is not available in Free Run or Video Trigger modes Allows you to set and turn on or off an offset value from the trigger point of the sweep at which to begin storing data in the trace of the analyzer The offset is specified as a function of time and permits positive pre trigger and negative post trigger values to be specified Key Access Trig More This func
377. r measurements in the MEASURE and Meas Setup menus are located in Volume 2 One Button Power Measurements These commands may be used only to set parameters of a specific measurement when the measurement is active Auto range Dwell Time SENSe ARDTime time SENSe ARDTime Sets the auto range dwell time for the EMI Detectors The amplitude ranging process optimizes the available dynamic range for the measurement The dwell time is the time spent auto ranging You may need to set this value if you have a signal with a very low PRF signal 5Hz Dwell time must be gt 1 PRF See also SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI Factory Preset and RST 0 2 s Range 0 001 to 2000 s The actual minimum value varies It is dependent on the number of trace points and the ADC period Remarks This command is only available with Option AYQ installed History Added with firmware revision A 14 00 Front Panel Access Det Demod EMI Detector Si ge S et oO a S S 5 ge Iz a Si amp bi Ki e oO Chapter 5 301 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe AVERage Subsection SENSe AVERage Subsection Clear the Current Average SENSe AVERage CLEar Re start the trace averaging function Re start the trace at the beginning of a sweep to obtain valid average data To do this remotely abort the sweep and initiate a single swee
378. r to TV on page 167 for a more detailed explanation of TV fields and command dependencies Chapter 5 383 Si ge S et oO a S S 5 ge Iz a Si g bi 2 Iz e oO au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem History Added TV trigger mode with firmware revision A 03 00 Front Panel Access Trig TV Trig Setup Field Entire Frame Trig TV Trig Setup Field Field One Trig TV Trig Setup Field Field Two Set TV Line Number for Synchronization TRIGger SEQuence TV LINE line TRIGger SEQuence TV LINE This command allows you to set the TV line number to which the analyzer will synchronize its sweep Requires Option BAA and B7B Factory Preset and RST 17 Range The range is dependent upon the Field Mode as described in the command TRIGger SEQuence TV FMODe ENTire ODD EVEN The minimum value is the minimum line and rolls over to the maximum value The maximum value 1s the maximum line and rolls over to the minimum value History Added TV trigger mode with firmware revision A 03 00 Remarks Refer to the command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce TV which is used to activate TV triggering Set Analyzer for TV Picture Monitoring TRIGger SEQuence TV MONitor OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence TV MONitor The currently selected standard is used to determine the proper setup of the hardware state of the video
379. race 3 trace 3 trace 2 Trace Math Subtract From Display Line TRACe MATH SUBTract DLINe trace Subtracts the magnitude of the display line from the selected trace and places the result back in the selected trace Trace is TRACEII213 Example TRAC MATH SUBT DLIN TRACE1 is equivalent to tracel trace 1 display line 376 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference TRACe Subsystem Front Panel Access View Trace Operations 2 DL 2 Select Trace Display Mode TRACe1 2 3 MODE WRITe MAXHold MINHold VIEW BLANk TRACe1 2 3 MODE Selects the display mode for the selected trace Write puts the trace in the normal mode updating the data Maximum hold displays the highest measured trace value for all the data that has been measured since the function was turned on Minimum hold displays the lowest measured trace value for all the data that has been measured since the function was turned on View turns on the trace data so that it can be viewed on the display Blank turns off the trace data so that it is not viewed on the display Remarks Whenever the number of sweep points change the following functions are affected e All trace data is erased Any traces in view mode will go to blank mode Front Panel Access View Trace Clear Write View Trace Max Hold View Trace Min Hold View Trace View View Trace Blank View Trace Normalize Ref Trace View Blank Si ge S et oO a S S 5
380. rameters that you set in the Mode Setup menu affect all of these measurements see Volume 2 One Button Power Measurements User s and Programmer s Reference for more information m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be e 5 be bi Chapter 2 113 Front Panel Key Reference Next Window Next Window Allows you to select the active window in functions which support split screen display modes such as zone span In split screen display modes pressing Zoom allows you to switch between split screen and full sized displays of the active window See also Zoom NOTE The active window is indicated by a solid green box around the window 2 9 E D E E E EI Pa Em x E D Ba FS 5 e 114 Chapter2 NOTE Meas Tools Front Panel Key Reference Peak Search Peak Search Places a marker on the highest peak based on the settings of the Search Criteria on page 117 Refer to Peak Search Type on page 118 for more information on the effect of setting Peak Search Type to Max Value or Excursion amp Threshold When you preset the analyzer the Peak Search Type is set to Max Value unless you save Peak Search Type Excursion amp Threshold as part of the user preset conditions and set Preset to User Refer to Preset on page 120 for more information on presetting the analyzer All peak search functions ignore the LO feedthrough The process for determining if the Peak is the LO feedthr
381. real array For example suppose the header is 512320 The first character digit in the header 5 tells you how many additional digits there are in the header e The 12320 means 12 thousand 3 hundred 20 data bytes follow the header Divide this number of bytes by your current data format bytes data point 8 for real 64 For this example there are 1540 data points in the block of data Minimize the number of GPIB transactions When you are using the GPIB for control of your instrument each transaction requires driver overhead and bus handshaking so minimizing these transactions reduces the time used You can reduce bus transactions by sending multiple commands per transaction 184 Chapter3 Programming Fundamentals Improving Measurement Speed See the information on Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line in the SCPI Language Basics section If you are using the pre configured MEASURE key measurements and are making the same measurement multiple times with small changes in the measurement setup use the single READ command It is faster then using INITiate and FETCh o E ke bei E E E 5 ke m E 5 a 5 E 5 e GC 2 Avoid unnecessary use of RST Remember that RST presets all the measurements and settings to their factory defaults and my also change the mode This forces you to reset the measurement settings of the analyzer even if they use similar mode setup or measurement settings Se
382. register when that bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 Factory Preset and RST 0 Range integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated PTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Chapter 5 357 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Uncalibrated Event register when that bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register when that bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and
383. remember is that there can be significant differences between the average of the log of power and the log of the average power There are actually four types of averaging processes within a spectrum analyzer All except VBW filtering are affected by this setting They are Trace averaging see BW Avg Averages signal amplitudes on a trace to trace basis Press Video or Power RMS when Avg Type Man is selected e Average detector see Detector Average Averages signal amplitudes during the time or frequency interval represented by a particular measurement point Noise Marker see Marker Noise Averages signal amplitudes across measurement points to reduce variations for noisy signals e VBW filtering Filtering the video is a form of averaging the video signal 62 Chapter 2 EMI Res BW Front Panel Key Reference BW Avg When trace average is on BW Avg Average On the Average Type is shown on the left side of the display When Avg Type Auto is selected the analyzer chooses the type of averaging to be used as shown in Figure 2 2 on page 58 When one of the average types is selected manually the analyzer uses that type without regard to the other analyzer settings and sets Avg Type to Man Key Access BW Avg Video Avg Video averaging averages the data as appropriate for the y axis scale When Avg Type Video Avg is selected VAvg appears on the left side of the analyzer display if Average is On Key A
384. reshold the device will assert RTS indicating that it can receive input again RTS is sometimes called RFR ready for receiving The device will also monitor the state of CTS and will stop transmission if that line becomes unasserted Factory Preset no RST The factory default is IBFull This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Serial Port Baud Rate Setup SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 RECeive BAUD baud rate SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 RECeive BAUD Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument Factory Preset no RST The factory default is 9600 This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Range Supported baud rates are 11013001600 12001240014800196001192001384001 576001115200 362 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference SYSTem Subsystem Front Panel Access System Remote Port Serial Port Receive Pace Setup SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 RECeive PACE XON NONE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 RECeive PACE Set the receive pace to on or none for an instrument with the RS 232 interface installed Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument If no optional serial port number is specified port 1 is assumed Factory Preset no RST The factory default is none This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the set
385. reviously enabled with the STATus QUEStionable ENABle num command Figure 4 11 Questionable Status Event Enable Register ien number 16 ro e 9 8 7 e s 4 s 2 1 O STATus QUEStionable ENABle num STATus QUEStionable ENABle K e EI E Ki x oO ge CH a Lg oO bi E cb95a Bit descriptions in the Status Questionable Condition Register are given in the following table Bit Decimal Description Value 0 1 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 1 2 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 2 4 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 3 8 POWer Summary This is the summary bit for the Questionable Power Status Register 4 16 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 5 32 FREQuency Summary This is the summary bit for the Questionable Frequency Status Register 6 64 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 7 128 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products Chapter 4 213 Ka z D E Ki On E EI Ka E 2 Ki S Ke Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
386. revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access AUTO COUPLE PhNoise Opt Frequency Synthesis State SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis AUTO This command switches between auto and manual phase noise selection When in auto mode the phase noise optimization is set as follows e For spans lt 10 MHz the analyzer is optimized for phase noise e For spans gt 10 MHz the analyzer is optimized for fast tuning This command is available for the following models only E4402B E4403B E4404B E4405B E4407B E4408B Factory Preset and RST On History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access AUTO COUPLE PhNoise Opt Chapter 5 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 07 325 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe MIXer Subsection SENSe MIXer Subsection Select External Mixer Band SENSe MIXer BAND K A Q u v E w F D G Y J USER SENSe MIXer BAND This command allows the selection of one of the pre defined bands corresponding to the external mixer currently in use This command is available only with Option AYZ External Mixing Factory Preset and RST Band A 26 5 40 Ghz Remarks If the mixer harmonic configuration SENSe MIXer HARMonic AUTO OFF ON 0 1 is set to Off manual then a query will return USER Bands
387. revision of the state being loaded is older than the revision of the instrument the instrument will only load the older regions of the state Make a Directory MMEMory MDIRectory lt dir path gt where path is A V or CH Makes a directory or subdirectory in the specified path Example Make a directory in C which is in instrument memory MMEMory MDIRectory C Front Panel Access File Create Dir Delete a Directory MMEMory RDIRectory lt dir name gt Deletes the specified directory and all files and subdirectories within that directory Front Panel Access File Delete Set the Save Screen Image File Type MMEMory SCReen FORMat BITMap METafile Allows you to set the format of the screen image to bitmap or metafile format History Added with firmware revision A 12 00 Front Panel Access File Save Type Screen Format Set the Save Screen Image Background MMEMory SCReen BACKground NORMal REVerse 296 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference MMEMory Subsystem Allows you to set the display background to normal or reverse Reverse is used to change the dark background to a light background for printing purposes History Added with firmware revision A 12 00 Front Panel Access File Save Type Screen Format Reverse the Colors of the Display MMEMory SCReen BACKground NORMal REVerse MMEMory SCReen BACKground This reverses the screen colors for screen file saving It lets you save a scre
388. ribute The selections include By Date By Name By Extension By Size and Order Up Down Order Up allows you to view files in ascending order for instance A B C Order Down allows you to view files in descending order for instance C B A Key Access File Load When Type is set to Trace Destination allows you to direct your data to Trace 1 Trace 2 or Trace 3 If the data is for all three traces for instance Source was All when they were saved the data will be returned to the original trace registers When Type is set to Limits Destination allows you to direct your 87 S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q E 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E D Ba 5 x e Delete Front Panel Key Reference File Dir Up Dir Select data to Limit 1 or Limit 2 Key Access File Load Allows you to move up one directory level If at the top level Dir Up moves to the drive level displaying the available disk drives Key Access File Load Accesses the highlighted directory on your display If is highlighted this key acts in the same manner as Dir Up Key Access File Load Allows you to delete files and directories Key Access File Delete Now Type 88 Executes the delete function If a directory is selected to be deleted the message WARNING You are about to delete the contents of directory XXXXXX where XXXXXX is the full path and dir
389. ring data 371 view 377 writing 377 Trace 1 2 3 163 trace register contents 164 trace registers copying contents 164 exchanging contents 164 trace loading from file 295 Trace View menu map 413 tracking generator attenuation 343 attenuation auto on off 344 calibration 265 commands 343 correction offset 343 fixed swept 345 output on off 300 output power 132 power level 344 tracking 347 tracking peak 347 power sweep 133 on off 345 range 345 347 start amplitude 346 step auto on off 346 step size 346 power sweep range 133 source power offset 133 source power step size 133 tracking generator functions 132 Tracking Peak 135 Trig Delay On Off 168 Trig key 167 Trig menu map 414 Trig Type Edge Level 144 Index Index trigger burst level frequency selectivity 380 commands 378 external 167 delay on off 378 delay value 378 slope 378 IEEE command 235 level gate 330 line 167 measurement 285 offset 379 380 RF burst absolute 380 level 381 relative 381 RF burst narrow pulse discriminator 382 source video 382 TV field entire odd even 383 video 167 video level amplitude 386 video level frequency 387 turning off markers 109 TV field entire odd even 383 picture monitoring 384 signal path analyzer external 385 standby 385 synchronization line number 384 video waveform sync pulse 385 TV key 167 TV Monitor key 170 TV Source key 170 TV Trig
390. ring the interval being displayed Positive peak detection displays the highest sample taken during the interval being displayed Sample detection displays the sample taken during the interval being displayed and is used primarily to display noise or noise like signals In sample mode the instantaneous signal value at the present display point is placed into memory This detection should not be used to make the most accurate amplitude measurement of non noise like signals e Average detection is used when measuring the average value of the amplitude across each trace interval bucket The averaging method used by the average detector is set to either video or power as appropriate when the average type is auto coupled Factory Preset and RST Positive History Added Average and RMS elements to the command with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access Det Demod Detector Det Demod Detector Peak Det Demod Detector Sample Det Demod Detector Negative Peak Det Demod Detector Average Si ge S et oO a S S 5 ge Iz a Si g bi Ki e oO Type of EMI Detection SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI QPEak AVERage OFF SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI Specifies the specified type of EMI detection Selecting either quasi peak or EMI average runs an amplitude ranging process that affects the reference level and attenuation settings This optimizes the available dynamic range for the measur
391. rmat for setting and querying trace data for the TRACe DATA and query TRACe DATA commands REAL and ASCii formats will format trace data in the current amplitude units The format of state data cannot be changed It is always in a machine readable format only machine units This command specifies the format used for trace data during data transfer across any remote port One button measurement functions only support Binary Real 32 Binary Real 64 and ASCii data formats For corrected trace data TRACe DATA with parameter trace name REAL and ASCii formats will provide trace data in the current amplitude units INTeger format will provide trace data in mdBm The fastest mode is INTeger 32 278 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference FORMat Subsystem For example 24 353 mdBm converts to 24 353 dBm ASCii Amplitude values are in amplitude units separated by commas ASCii format requires more memory than the binary formats Handling large amounts of this type of data takes more time and storage space Integer 32 Binary 32 bit integer values in internal units mdBm in a definite length block Real 32 or 64 Binary 32 bit or 64 bit real values in amplitude units in a definite length block Transfers of real data are done in a binary block format For uncorrected trace data TRACe DATA with parameter RAWTRACE UINTeger and INTeger formats apply to RAWTRACE queries and return uncorrected ADC
392. rns the amplitude correction function on or off for the selected set The corrections state must be set to On for the correction to be applied Key Access Amplitude Y Scale More Corrections Other S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q 45 Front Panel Key Reference AMPLITUDE Y Scale NOTE Antenna Cable and Other correction factors are generally entered as positive values This indicates a loss in the external device User correction factors are typically entered as negative values which indicate a gain in the external device Edit Accesses menu keys that allow you to create and edit an amplitude correction factor set It puts the analyzer into a split screen mode where the correction data is displayed in a table under the trace data Pressing ESC while in this menu will exit the menu and remove the table from the screen New points will be applied only after the editor is closed The Tab keys are very useful for navigation between rows in the corrections table Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Corrections Other Point Allows you to create or edit an amplitude correction factor data point Up to 200 points may be defined for each set Enter the point number to be created or edited by using the numeric keypad then press Enter or use the knob tab or step keys to move to an existing point Press Bk Sp to correct errors After selecting a point Frequency becomes active K
393. rol Query Error Device Dependent Error Execution Error Command Error Unused Power On 4 Event Register un D D E Ki On E EI Ka E 2 Ki S Ke E 7 BB 5 4 8 2 1 Enable Register y To Status Byte Register Bit 5 ck723a The standard event status register contains the following bits Bit Decimal Description Value 0 1 Operation Complete A in this bit position indicates that all operations were completed following execution of the OPC command 1 2 Request Bus Control This bit is always set to 0 The analyzer does not request control 2 4 Query Error A in this bit position indicates that a query error has occurred Query errors have SCPI error numbers from 499 to 400 3 8 Device Dependent Error A in this bit position indicates that a device dependent error has occurred Device dependent errors have SCPI error numbers from 399 to 300 and 1 to 32767 4 16 Execution Error A in this bit position indicates that an execution error has occurred Execution errors have SCPI error numbers from 299 to 200 204 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description Value 5 32 Command Error A in this bit position indicates that a command error has o
394. rrectly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Caution denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Note calls out special information for the user s attention It provides operational information or additional instructions of which the user should be aware The instruction documentation symbol The product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the documentation This symbol is used to mark the on position of the power line switch This symbol is used to mark the standby position of the power d line switch A This symbol indicates that the input power required is AC This is a Safety Class 1 Product provided with a protective earth ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall be inserted only in a socket outlet provided with a protected earth contact Any interruption of the WARNING WARNING CAUTION NOTE protective conductor inside or outside of the product is likely to make the product dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to
395. rreererore mrecher4 aedes a de RA TREKS Red E OER ETE 345 wd u clofioics jy TC rre 345 SOUR POW STAR Samp e EK RE RE ER Se BE Heo Lee RE Ca Rd ce Rog ER qt 346 SOUR POWERS DARII 2349425 TEE ENEE EE EE EE EE re 346 ISOUBSSPOWeESTEP AU TO OFFIONQI ENEE RRE sates RH EE e Eet 346 SOUiRce FU Wer o EP AU EE 346 SOURCE PO WerS TEP ING Renient lt ampl gt d 08 ER oe hae es erte ovesha cre awe aac E ER ES 346 SOURCE POWT STEP INCRE mEn iue tee ae ee eben ee eee reiec me deh oleae dde xd 346 SOUBce POWor S W Rep tel umplsiisosperem e t ernst cha rE eRe Ree RE 347 SOUR Ce PO Weir WEEP v 04 125 5424 ob AERO DELS CRAGGGd SEGRE EN RS RINSE RAYS E ES RAMS ODA ROME OS 347 SURGE Ne 347 SOUBRce PO Wer TREK me PEAK AE deco RE ek pee RO Fae EEE eR eee PS ERR ER 347 SOURCE POWT EENS Ae hoe th Gan ek dour eee RA ENEE Flue dE TEER dE RI 347 SOURce PO Werl LE Vel DMiMediate AMPLitude ampbe ee REINER pe n EELER EES CE 344 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UPIDOWN seseeee RB 344 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 0 0 0 0 0 0 sosis 344 CH KK E EIER 349 GTATus OPBRsDonmENABlesINIGERES cuoolbsuskhesskbeitRrxa rbRbRa 4 MERGRRRREREESCRRESRE REGERE 349 CH ENK E EE 349 SIATus OPERation NTRansition IDtegetb A AE NEE kde LINER EDGE REY Qao K RA E ADRS RRR RS 330 SIAMES OFER NEE 350 STATUS OPERation PTRansiton SUM SEES e aee E EE EE dE EE EEN ER R ER RE 350 STATS OPER om P Ra BOT Laos eeuea rua Pex req RE genes geeks etre
396. rrent parameters Pressing the ESC key will Clear any numeric entry that you have begun to enter and cancels the active function see the section on display annotation active function area and other display features in the Getting Started Guide for your instrument Clear any title entry that you have begun to enter and cause the title to revert to the previous name Clear input or output overloads Clear error messages from the status line along the bottom of the display Clear peak threshold from the display turn it off if the peak threshold line is on e Cancels a print if one is in progress E 9 E D S E Ei m Si ei E E D Ba 5 z e 80 Chapter2 Catalog File Front Panel Key Reference File Accesses the menu keys used to view save load and manage data on a floppy disk or the internal analyzer drive Refer to the Getting Started Guide for your instrument for more information on file menu functions Displays all directories and files located on the selected drive depending upon the preferences set under the Type and Sort keys defined below Key Access File Type Allows you to select all types or one type of file s for viewing Key Access File Catalog All Setup State Trace Limits Screen Corrections Displays all files located on the selected drive Key Access File Catalog Type Displays all setup files SET in the selected directory Setu
397. rview 190 serial interface settings 190 RTS for serial bus 362 S sample detection 316 Save 82 save command 234 Save key 130 save limits 82 save screen image file type 296 save setup files 82 save states 82 save traces 82 Scale Type Log Lin Y axis 39 scale type linear logarithmic 338 Scale Div Bluetooth FM Demodulation 38 FM Demod 38 Scale Div key 38 scaling 277 SCPI command subsystems locating 229 errors during execution 365 errors locating 365 version query 370 screen annotation on or off 78 screen data output 125 screen graticule 78 screen image storing 298 screen title 76 77 78 screen reversing the color 297 Search Criteria 117 Segmented sweep 145 segmented sweep changes in segment order 147 deleting all data 337 deleting some data 337 displaying the trace 145 editor 146 interaction with other analyzer functions 147 merging data 336 on off 337 query number of segments 335 segment parameters 335 Select Marker 1 2 3 4 105 106 selecting EMI detection type 317 318 instrument modes 113 modes 113 self test query 235 separator syntax 186 serial bus DTR 361 receive baud 362 receive PACE 363 RTS 362 transmit PACE 363 serial bus overview 190 serial interface settings 190 Service key 160 service key access 160 service request accessing status register method 198 enable register 202 generating 199 IEEE command 235 using 199 service request
398. s Trace View Changing the vertical scale Amplitude Scale Type Log or Lin pressing Restart turning averaging on BW Avg Average On or switching window in Zone Span Span Zone restarts the held trace Maintains the minimum level for each trace point of the selected trace 1 2 or 3 and updates each trace point if a new minimum level is detected in successive sweeps Key Access Trace View Chapter 2 163 S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E NOTE NOTE View Blank Operations Normalize Front Panel Key Reference Trace View If the detector is Auto Coupled when you select Min Hold the detector may change dependent on the other active trace functions Manually select a detector if a specific detector is required before selecting Min Hold Refer to Figure 2 1 Detector Auto Selection Flowchart on page 55 Changing the vertical scale Amplitude Scale Type Log or Lin pressing Restart turning averaging on BW Avg Average On or switching window in Zone Span Span Zone restarts the held trace Holds and displays the amplitude data of the selected trace The trace register is not updated as the analyzer sweeps If a trace is deactivated by pressing Blank the stored trace data can be retrieved by pressing View Key Access Trace View Stores the amplitude data for the selected trac
399. s as the pass fail messages for these functions will be overwritten by the active function information Agilent 15 33 57 Feb 13 2003 Act Fetn Posn ef 10 dBm Atten 5 dB Marker a 5 000 kHz Top Center Bottom EN 100 Hz T em UMMM Key Access Display Active Fctn Position Center Displays the active function in the center left side of the display Key Access Display Active Fctn Position Bottom Displays the active function in the bottom left corner of the display Agilent 16 23 15 Feb 13 2003 fict Fctn Posn Top Center Bottom Ref Level 68 31 mV Key Access Display Active Fctn Position Title Accesses the following Title menu keys which allows you to change or clear a title on your display m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Chapter 2 77 au 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E E D Ba 5 z e NOTE Preferences Front Panel Key Reference Display Key Access Display Change Title Allows you to write a title across the top of the display The marker readout may interfere with the last characters The markers can be turned off by pressing Marker More Marker All Off Pressing Change Title accesses the Alpha Editor Menus that contain available characters and symbols Pressing ESC before exiting the Alpha Editor menus will retain the previous title Clear Title The display title will remain until either Ch
400. s in sweep time as such frequency resolution is decreased Also signal peaks are reduced with large smoothing Chapter 5 375 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference TRACe Subsystem values and this can cause the amplitude to appear to be less than its actual value Number of Points for Smoothing TRACe MATH SMOoth POINts integer TRACe MATH SMOoth POINts Specifies the number of points that will be smoothed in TRACe MATH SMOoth See that command for an explanation of how smoothing is performed Increasing the number of points increases smoothing at the cost of decreasing resolution If the number of points is an even number then the number of points is increased by one If the number of points is larger than the number of sweep points then the number of sweep points is used unless the number of sweep points is even in which case the number of points will be the sweep points minus one The number of points smoothed is always an odd number Range Integer 3 to current number of sweep points Trace Math Subtract TRACe MATH SUBTract lt destination trace gt lt source tracel gt lt source trace2 gt Subtracts the magnitude of the two source traces trace 1 trace 2 and places the result in the destination trace Destination traces are TRACEI11213 Source traces are TRACEI112I3 Example TRAC MATH SUBT TRACE3 TRACE3 TRACEZ2 is equivalent to t
401. s installed Factory Preset and RST Relative History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access Trig More 1 of 2 RF Burst Setup Chapter 5 381 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem RF Burst Narrow Pulse Discriminator TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst NPDiscrim STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence RFBurst NPDiscrim The narrow pulse discriminator prevents undesirable re triggering on multiple peaks when the RF envelope has significant ripple Factory Preset and RST Off History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access Trig More 1 of 2 RF Burst Setup Narrow Pulse Discriminator Trigger Source TRIGger SEQuence SOURce IMMediate VIDeo LINE EXTernal RFBurst TV TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Specifies the source or type of triggering used to start a measurement Immediate is free run triggering Video triggers on the video signal level Line triggers on the power line signal External allows you to connect an external trigger source RF Burst triggers on the bursted frame TV triggers on the selected line of a TV frame Factory Preset and RST Immediate free run triggering Remarks Free run activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start as soon as possible after the last sweep History Added TV trigger mode with firmware revision A 03 00 Added RF Burst mode f
402. s menu may change if one button measurements are selected Some measurements will alter the Span X menu keys to make the measurement easier to use Activates the Span function and accesses the menu of span functions Pressing SPAN X Scale allows you to change the frequency range symmetrically about the center frequency The frequency span readout describes the total displayed frequency range To determine frequency span per horizontal graticule division when the frequency scale type is set to linear divide the frequency span by 10 Allows you to enter a span frequency range value Key Access SPAN X Scale Performs an automatic zoom so that the signal at the marker remains at the center of the display If a marker is already on the zoom begins at the frequency of the marker If a marker is not already on a marker is placed on the highest on screen signal ignoring the LO feedthrough Signal track is turned on and the span function is activated Entering a new span value causes the analyzer to change the span in steps keeping the signal centered on the screen until the desired span is reached The analyzer is left in Signal Track mode Pressing Span Zoom performs the routine similar to pressing the following keys Search Frequency Signal Track On and Span Span Zoom is not available when the Frequency Scale Type Log is selected Span Zoom leaves the analyzer in Signal Track mode Span Zoom is not available when Segmented On is
403. s only with a color display Only positive margins are allowed for lower limits and only negative margins are allowed for upper limits If the trace is out of the limit or margin boundaries FAIL LIMIT or FAIL MARGIN is displayed in red The results for Limit 2 are displayed below those for Limit 1 Either Limit or Margin must be turned on for Test to work Key Access Display Limits Limit 1 or Limit 2 Margin Off turns the margin off Margin On allows you to set a limit line offset for the selected limit line Either Limit or Margin as well as Test must be turned on for a limit test to work Key Access Display Limits Limit 1 or Limit 2 Accesses the Edit menu keys which include Point Frequency or Time if Display Limits X Axis Units Time has been selected Amplitude Connected to Previous Pt and Delete Point Edit also accesses the limits table The Tab keys allow you to move between the rows in the limits table New limit segments will only be applied after the editor is closed Pressing Return or any key not associated with the editor will close the editor Key Access Display Limits Limit 1 or Limit 2 Chapter 2 Chapter 2 Front Panel Key Reference Display Point Allows you to create or edit a limit point Up to 200 points may be defined for each limit line Enter the point number to be created or edited using the numeric keypad then Press Enter or use the knob Tab or step keys to move to
404. s set by any mode change since that is the default state after power up Status Subsystem Commands Individual status registers can be set and queried using the commands in the STATus subsystem in Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference in this guide There are two methods used to programmatically detect and manage error conditions or changes in analyzer status Either method allows you to monitor one or more conditions The two methods are The Polling Method The Service Request SRQ Method The Polling Method In the polling method the analyzer has a passive role It only tells the controller that conditions have changed when the controller asks the right question The polling method works well if you do not need to know about changes the moment they occur This method is very efficient Use the polling method when either your programming language development environment does not support SRQ interrupts you want to write a simple single purpose program and don t want the added complexity of setting up an SRQ handler The Service Request SRQ Method The SRQ method allows timely communication of information without requiring continuous controller involvement Using this method the analyzer takes a more active role It tells the controller when there has been a condition change without the controller asking The SRQ method should be used if you must know immediately when a condition changes This is in contrast to the poll
405. s the input device Selecting Input Mixer Ext activates all other keys in the Input Mixer menu and changes the attenuator annotation to Ext Mix When Input Mixer Ext is selected the attenuator function in the AMPLITUDE key menu is unavailable Key Access Input Output Input Mixer When Input Mixer Ext is selected FREQUENCY Scale Type Log is not available Input Mixer Ext is not available when FREQUENCY Scale Type Log is selected Ext Mix Band Accesses the Ext Mix Band key menus and allows you to select one of the pre defined bands corresponding to the external mixer being used The start and stop frequencies and a letter corresponding to the waveguide band in use appears on each menu key If Mixer Type Presel is selected selecting K E W F D G Y or J is not allowed If Harmonic Man is selected the word User will appear on the Ext Mix Band key Key Access Input Output Input Mixer Segmented sweep is only operable for this function when center frequency and span are set within the frequency band of the mixer If the mixer range is changed segmented sweep is turned off Chapter 2 101 m S 5 T az Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Front Panel Key Reference Input Output Signal Ident On Off Activates a signal identification algorithm when Signal Ident On is selected that either removes or aids with the identification of multiple and image responses
406. sabes ERNEIEREN REENERT RR REOR e DE RES 374 ODROSCSSIATEIEPBAR SORTS o 225 by ib eb C b i t b HE phases guessed eb ub e pe ebd 374 ORASCESIATEIBPBARDDATA IT 5 imbge bg Pg ei ebbe hd e be C eq pre qe bg beh aid Shane 373 STRACSMATH SMOoth eI ace e reek er ee R E REE ER SE ER dd eed 374 TRACE MATH SMOoth POINIS IDIBBEIS EE ER ERRARE RETIRER ARR RR RREAG RRREG REN RE RE 376 SRACCNLIATEISSMOOGPOINIS E EE EE AER A A EE AE A 376 TRACe MATH SUBTract destination trace source tracel source trace2 0 0 eee eee 376 28 List of Commandes JRACCMALTH SUBTEaCUDLINe Sace gt AEN EE RE ibaia EE 376 TRACe DATA trace name2IRAWTRACE definite length blocks coninns separated ASCIT dalat e sse ehbwe tein x OR ERR HER YE RU Pede ue d CERA S E 371 CTR eA etree Hali m e corbpECRRewekere Fipelbk n eiin RESCKRRESEEREWSEREDLRC EEG bes 371 TRACe 11213 MODE WRITelMAXHOoIdIMINHoHIVIEWIBLANK sseeeeee IIIA 377 TRAC SII le TEE KEE VRICHOPPS 3 TALON NEE 380 SR ES DOK c 2565 coped REX e yagi ease nee pq la pp EE eek e eee E hax hengue sees dee 339 ET Eed ee s a qub qb e Eb do P Eo E 499 eo or TEENETE EIEEE RAPPE ee a eds 378 ZRIGEeer 3BOucnoe DELA STA Te OPPIOPIOI inis t ed deeg RC xd RE RR DR Rr oido Edi 378 STE eeler geneet e bacca pe RECEPERAT UHR OI RC eee ees bs et uas 378 TRK eea SEQuetice DELA uuo quekEArRS X RARG Ard QueREX ER Fu do ee Re wr dd quede due queen 378 TRIGeer SEQuence BXTernal 1 SLOPe POSiiivelNEGAve
407. selected Key Access SPAN X Scale Changes the analyzer span to full span showing the full frequency range of the analyzer In external mixing mode pressing Full Span changes the analyzer span to the specified range for the selected external mixing band Full span sets Signal Track Off and Segmented Off Key Access SPAN X Scale Changes the frequency span to zero In this mode the current center frequency is displayed in the time domain the x axis is displayed in units of time like a conventional oscilloscope Sweep times faster than those in the frequency domain display mode are available if Option AYX or B7D are installed 136 Chapter2 NOTE NOTE NOTE NOTE Last Span Zone Chapter 2 137 Front Panel Key Reference SPAN X Scale Resolution Bandwidths less than 1 KHz are unavailable when in zero span if the sweep time is being achieved by utilizing the Option AYX or B7D Key Access SPAN X Scale Sweep times that would require Option AYX or Option B7D are not available in zero span if the Resolution Bandwidth is less than 1 kHz Zero Span is not available when Segmented On is selected Segments in the segmented sweep function can be set to zero span by setting the span parameter in the segmented sweep editor to 0 Hz Sweep Segmented Modify Edit Span The minimum number of sweep points in zero span varies with firmware revision Firmware Revision Minimum of Sweep Po
408. ses phase noise within approximately 10 MHz of the carrier This allows rapid measurement throughput when changing the center frequency or span Key Access Auto Couple PhNoise Opt Auto Man Selects a specific detector or in Auto picks the appropriate detector for a particular measurement When discussing detectors it is important to understand the concept of a trace bucket For every trace point displayed there is a finite time during which the data for that point is collected The analyzer has the ability to look at all of the data collected during that time and present a single point of trace data based on the detector mode We call the interval during which the data for that trace point is being collected the bucket Thus a trace is more than a series of single points It is actually a series of trace buckets The data may be sampled many times within each bucket Selecting Detector Auto and BW Avg Average On changes the detector The Auto choice depends on marker functions trace functions and the trace averaging function If a marker function or measurement is running the Auto choice of detector is either Average or Sample When one of the detectors such as Average is manually selected instead of Auto that detector is used regardless of other analyzer settings The Average detector displays the average of the signal within the bucket The averaging method depends upon Avg Type selection Video or RMS When th
409. set and RST 32767 all 1 s Range integer 0 to 32767 360 Chapter5 NOTE Remote Command Reference SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem Subsystem This subsystem is used to set the controls and parameters associated with the overall system communication These functions are not related to instrument performance GPIB Address SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB 1 SELF ADDRess integer SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB 1 SELF ADDRess Sets and queries the GPIB address This command applies only to analyzers having Option A4H Only one Option A4H can be installed in an instrument Factory Preset and RST Itissetto 18 by SYSTem PRESet PERSistent which sets the persistent state values to their factory defaults This command is persistent The term persistent means that the command retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 CONTrol DTR OFF ON IBFull Range Integer 0 to 30 Front Panel F Access System Remote Port o S S S E Serial Port DTR Setup F a KH E SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 CONTro1 DTR Sets the hardware pacing scheme Only one Option 1 AX can be installed in an instrument Off holds the DTR line in the unasserted off condition On holds the DTR line in the asserted on condition IBFull selects the input buffer full mode for the DTR line The IBFull parameter sets the DTR line to indicate when the device is ready to re
410. span is set to zero span the displayed bandwidth is used Key Access Det Demod Demod FM Turning FM demodulation on turns off AM demodulation if it is on For non zero spans a 100 kHz resolution bandwidth is used during the demodulation regardless of the screen annotation When the span is set to zero span the displayed bandwidth is used For best results move the signal to be demodulated to within 3 divisions of the top of the display Follow these steps to use this key 1 Turn auto align off System Alignments Auto Align Off 2 Calibrate the demodulator System Alignments Align Now FM Demod Set the center frequency FREQUENCY Go to zero span SPAN Zero Span 5 Set the resolution bandwidth BW Avg Res BW 6 Set the detector to sample Det Demod Detector Sample 7 View the FM demodulation Det Demod Demod FM Demod View On 8 Use the Markers to measure the FM demodulation and the modulation rate Marker 9 Adjust the sweep time as necessary Bum E 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E 68 Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference Det Demod Figure 2 4 1 GHz 10 dBm 5 kHz deviation 5 kHz Modulation Rate m amP Marker A FMV 3 Agilent 17 45 57 Mar 10 2003 Marker Atten 5 dB Select Marker 1 8 500000000 ms kHz 2 976 kHz Normal Demod View On Off Speaker On Off Demod Time Chapter 2 Delta Pair Tracking Ref Re
411. ssing is complete Then it returns a 1 and the program continues This query can be used to synchronize events of other instruments on the external bus OPC and OPC are currently effective only when immediately preceded by either the INITiate IMMediate ora CALibration command Query Instrument Options This function is provided in the analyzer SCPI language reference in the SYSTem subsystem under SYSTem OPTions Recall RCL register This command recalls the instrument state from the specified instrument memory register Range Registers are an integer 0 to 127 Remarks See also commands MMEMory LOAD STATe and Chapter 5 233 Si ge S et oO a S S 5 ge Iz a Si oN bi oO Ki e oO au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference IEEE Common Commands MMEMory STORe STATe If the state being loaded has a newer firmware revision than the revision of the instrument no state is recalled and an error is reported If the state being loaded has an equal firmware revision than the revision of the instrument the state will be loaded If the state being loaded has an older firmware revision than the revision of the instrument the instrument will only load the parts of the state that apply to the older revision Front Panel Access File Recall State Reset RST This command presets the instrument to a factory defi
412. status byte register to 1 Send the STATus OPERation ENABle num command where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable For example to enable bit 9 and bit 3 so that whenever either bit 9 or 3 is set to 1 the operation status summary bit of the status byte register will be set to 1 send the STATus OPERation ENABle 520 512 8 command The STATus OPERation ENABle command returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the STATus OPERation ENABle num command STATus QUEStionable Registers STATus QUEStionable registers monitor the overall analyzer condition They are accessed with the STATus OPERationand STATus QUEStionable commands inthe STATus command subsystem The STATus QUEStionable registers also monitor the analyzer to see if there are any questionable events that occurred These registers look for anything that may cause an error or that may induce a faulty measurement Signs of a faulty measurement include the following hardware problems out of calibration situations unusual signals 208 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions NOTE All bits are summary bits from lower level event registers For a general diagram of the STATus QUEStionable register see Figure 4 9 A Questionable Status condition register query response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to
413. ste Ge EE o_o oo one ond oon oo ont ool oot auestionablesiaus TICO Event 15 14 18 12 111009 87 65 432 Enable Register To Questionable Status Register Bit 3 cb96a Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Power Condition Register are given in the following table Chapter 4 211 K e e Ei E Ki Gel ge x a e a ui Ka Di D E Ki On E EI Ka E 2 Ki S Ke Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description Value 0 0 R P P Tripped A in this bit position indicates that the reverse power protection is tripped Agilent ESA models E4401B and E4411B only Reverse power protection is overload protection for the tracking generator 1 2 Source Unleveled A lin this bit position indicates that the source tracking generator output is unleveled 2 4 Source LO Unleveled A in this bit position indicates that the local oscillator LO in the source tracking generator is unleveled 3 8 LO Unleveled A in this bit position indicates that the analyzer local oscillator LO is unleveled 4 16 50 MHz Osc Unleveled A in this bit position indicates that the 50 MHz amplitude reference signal is unleveled 5 32 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 6 64 Input Overload Tripped A 1 in this
414. stem DISPlay Subsystem The DISPlay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual graphical and trace information Within a display information may be separated into individual windows Active Function Position DISPlay AFUNction POSition BOTTom CENTer TOP DISPlay AFUNCtion POSition Changes the position of the active function block Factory Preset and RST The factory default is center This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Range Top Center or Bottom Front Panel Access Display History Added with firmware revision A 10 00 Display Viewing Angle DISPlay ANGLe lt integer gt DISPlay ANGLe Changes the viewing angle for better viewing in different environments Factory Preset and RST The factory default is 4 This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c D 7 Range Integer 1 to 7 Front Panel Access Viewing angle keys Date and Time Display Format DISPlay ANNotation CLOCk DATE FORMat MDY DMY DISPlay ANNotation CLOCk DATE FORMat Chapter 5 269 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference DISPlay Subsystem Allows you to set the format for displaying the real time clock To set the date time use
415. stem Time Date Allows you to set the date of the real time clock Enter the date in the YYYYMMDD format using the numeric keypad and press Enter Valid year YY YY values are 0000 through 9999 Valid month MM values are from 01 to 12 and valid day values are from 01 to 31 Key Access System Time Date Accesses the following Alignments menu keys which align the internal circuitry of the analyzer load default values for the alignment system and adjust the 10 MHz reference Key Access System Auto Align Chapter 2 Accesses the Auto Align menu keys All Turns on the automatic alignment of all measurement systems When Auto Align All is selected AA appears along the left edge of the display Key Access System Alignments All but RF Turns on the automatic alignment of all measurement systems except the RF section Eliminating automatic alignment of the RF prevents changes in the input impedance between sweeps which could cause input device instability When Auto Align All but 153 S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Front Panel Key Reference System Local RF is selected AB appears along the left edge of the display Key Access System Alignments Off Turns off automatic alignment Key Access System Alignments NOTE It is normal to hear clicking sounds when the Auto Alignment function is On During retrace a small portion of the analyzer cir
416. sters The Questionable Status Calibration condition register continuously monitors the calibration status of the analyzer Condition registers are read only To query the condition register send the command STATus QUEStionable CALibration CONDition The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1 222 Chapter 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register The changes may be positive from 0 to 1 or negative from 1 to 0 Send the command STATus QUEStionable CALibration NTRansition lt num gt negative transition or STATus QUEStionable CALibration PTRansition num positive transition where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The Questionable Status Calibration Event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters Event registers are destructive read only Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register To query the event register send the command STATus QUEStionable CALibration EVENt See Questionable Status Event Enable Register on page 212 for an explanation of how to set the summary bit using the event enable register In this case use the command STATus QUEStionable CALibration
417. strument model is then created to represent the way in which instrument functionality is viewed and categorized by SCPI Refer to IEEE SCPI 1997 Volume 2 Command Reference Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments Version 1997 0 May 1997 for a more complete description of the SCPI instrument model The SCPI subsystems in this chapter are listed in alphabetical order Likewise the SCPI commands are in alphabetical order within the subsystem in which they belong Refer to the following table to locate SCPI command subsystems and subsections by page number SCPI Subsystem Subsection Page IEEE Common Commands page 231 ABORt page 236 CALCulate page 237 CALCulate LLINe page 239 CALCulate MAR Ker page 246 5 CALCulate NTData page 260 CALibration page 261 S CONFigure page 266 d COU Pie page 267 S DISPlay page 269 FORMat page 278 HCOPy page 281 INITiate page 284 INPut page 287 INSTrument page 290 MMEMory page 293 OUTPut page 300 SENSe page 301 SENSe AVERage page 302 Chapter 5 229 2 9 E D E E E EI ki E Q 2 E EI Remote Command Reference SCPI Sections and Subsections 230 SCPI Subsystem Subsection Page SENSe BANDwidth page 306 SENSe CORRection page 309 SENSe DEMod page 313 SENSe DETector page 316 SENSe FREQuency page 321 SENSe
418. sult is best with power Average detection When the Average detector is selected and the amplitude scale is linear the fastest sweet time 1s 8 milliseconds In resolution bandwidths 1 kHz the auto coupled detector selection is Sample However the Marker Noise function generates appropriately corrected values for all supported detector modes If the marker delta function is on and the noise marker is activated and moved to measure the noise floor the marker readout will display the signal to noise ratio Chapter2 NOTE NOTE Off Marker Table On Off Marker AU Off Front Panel Key Reference Marker You can use Delta and Marker Noise to indicate noise level relative to sinusoidal signal signal to noise Activate the delta marker before pressing Marker Noise or the reference marker units may be incorrect The noise marker averages 5 of the trace data values one half a horizontal division centered on the location of the marker on the frequency or time scale Marker noise indicates noise power density per Hertz or noise voltage per root Hertz depending upon the amplitude units selected The number of sweep points is noted in parenthesis to the right of the sweep time in the lower right corner of the graticule Note that the data values averaged will not always be symmetrical with respect to the marker position If the marker is positioned within 2 5 of the beginning of the trace one quarter division the tr
419. t Delete Point Merge Additional Values into the Existing Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DATA MERGe x axis ampl connected x axis ampl connected Adds the points with the specified values to the current limit line allowing you to merge limit line data Up to two amplitude values are allowed for each x value If too much data is merged as many points as possible are merged into the existing limit and then an error is reported Up to 200 points total may be defined for each limit e x axis can be frequency or time values as specified by CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain Frequencies are always in Hz Time is always in seconds No unit is allowed in this parameter e ampl amplitude values are in the current Y axis units No unit is allowed in this parameter connected connected values are either O or 1 A 1 means this point should be connected to the previously defined point to define the limit line A 0 means that it is a point of discontinuity and is not connected to the preceding point The connected value is ignored for the first point Range x axis 30 Gs to 30 Gs for time limits x axis 30 GHz to 350 GHz for frequency limits ampl 120 dBm to 100 dBm z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c D oO lt connected gt 0 or 1 Front Panel Access Display Limits X Axis Units Freq Time Delete Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DELete
420. t span markers The query returns the current X value frequency span of the designated markers If span markers are not selected the query returns the latest marker reading as a span always positive Default Unit Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are positioned Front Panel Access Marker active marker Span Pair Delta Pair Markers Start Frequency X Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X STARt lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X STARt Position the start reference frequency of the designated band type marker pair at the specified trace X value The value is in the X axis units which is often frequency or time Use CALCulate MARKer MODE BAND to select band markers The query returns the current X value start reference frequency of the designated marker Default Unit Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are positioned Front Panel Access Marker lt active marker gt Delta Pair Delta Pair Markers Stop Frequency X Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X STOP lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X STOP Position the stop frequency of the designated band type marker pair at the specified trace X value The value is in the X axis units which is often frequency or time Use CALCulate MARKer MODE BAND to select band markers The query returns the current X value stop frequency of the designated marker 258 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference CALCulate MARKer Subs
421. t to normal at the center frequency Mkr A Span is not available if the marker is off or in zero span Key Access Marker gt The above menu keys are not available when Segmented On is selected Changes the reference level to the active marker value moving the marked point to the reference level top line of the graticule In Delta mode Mkr Ref Lvl sets the reference level to the amplitude difference between the markers For example if the difference is 15 dB the reference level will be set to 15 dBm Key Access Marker gt 110 Chapter 2 NOTE Meas Setup Front Panel Key Reference MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode MEASURE Spectrum Analysis Mode In the Spectrum Analysis mode see the Mode key this key displays a menu that lets you make transmitter power measurements such as adjacent channel power occupied bandwidth and harmonic distortion measurements refer to Volume 2 One Button Power Measurements User s and Programmer s Reference for more information about these measurements If other modes are available and have been selected the measurements for that particular mode will be displayed Some common settings can be made for these measurements using the function under the Mode Setup key For example you may select one of several radio standards available by pressing Mode Setup Radio Std The measurements described in Volume 2 One Button Power Measurements User s and Programmer s Reference are a
422. t zero span segment For a non zero span segment the sweep time is auto coupled to Span Resolution Bandwidth and Video Bandwidth and cannot be manually defined The minimum sweep time is displayed Refer to Sweep Time Auto Man on page 142 for more information Key Access Sweep Segmented Modify Edit More NOTE The parameters for each segment are limited to ensure the occurrence of only calibrated measurements Delete Segment Deletes the highlighted segment Key Access Sweep Segmented Modify Edit More Delete Segment Initiates the deletion of all segments After pressing this key once the message If you are sure press key again to delete will be displayed Pressing Delete again will complete the process Key Access Sweep Segmented Modify E 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E 150 Chapter2 Show Errors Front Panel Key Reference System Local System Local Accesses the System menu keys Pressing System Local after the analyzer has been placed in the remote mode places the analyzer in the local mode and enables front panel control During remote operation R appears in the upper right corner of the screen R T L or S may appear during remote operation indicating talk listen or service request Pressing the System Local key removes the R symbol in the upper right corner Accesses a display of the last 30 errors reported The most recent error will appear
423. te Command Reference HCOPy Subsystem HCOPy Subsystem The HCOPy subsystem controls the setup of plotting and printing to an external device Abort the Print HCOPy ABORt Aborts hard copy printout of results Front Panel Access ESC with print in progress Printer Type HCOPy DEVice TYPE AUTO CUSTom NONE HCOPy DEVice TYPE Sets up the printer by selecting printer type AUTO the instrument queries the printer to determine the printer type and automatically sets itself for that printer CUSTom allows you to select a custom printer if your printer cannot be auto configured NONE tells the instrument that the hard copy output device is not a printer Factory Preset and RST The factory default is AUTO This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access Print Setup Printer Type Color Hard Copy HCOPy IMAGe COLor STATe OFF ON 0 1 HCOPy IMAGe COLor STATe Selects between color and monochrome mode for hard copy output Factory Preset and RST The factory default is On This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Chapter 5 281 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference HCOPy Subsyst
424. ters to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Status registers except for the status byte register and the standard event status register consist of the registers whose contents can be used to produce status summary bits These summary bits are then manipulated as follows The condition register passes summary bits to the negative and positive transition filters after which they are stored in the event register The contents of the event register are logically ANDed with the contents of the event enable register and the result is logically ORed to produce a status summary bit The status summary bit is then passed to the status byte register either directly or through the STATus QUEStionable register Next the summary bits are logically ANDed with the contents of the service request enable register and the result is logically ORed to produce the request service RQS bit in the status byte register How Do You Access the Status Registers There are two different methods to access the status registers Common Commands Accesses and Controls Status Subsystem Commands K e ES E 2 Si ys CH K Lg wn Common Command Access and Control Most monitoring of the analyzer conditions is done at the highest level using the following IEEE common commands CLS clear status clears the status byte by emptying the error queue and clearing all the event registers ESE ESE event status enable
425. tes the source output level Specifically setting SOURce POWer ATTenuation ampl sets the mode to manual SOURce POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF Si ge S et oO a S S 5 ge Iz a Si amp bi D e oO Factory Preset and RST ESA E4401B E4411B 0 dB ESA E4402B E4403B 8 dB ESA E4404B 8 dB ESA E4405B 8 dB ESA E4407B E4408B 8 dB Range ESA E4401B E4411B 0 dB to 60 dB in 10 dB steps ESA E4402B E4403B 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps ESA E4404B 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps Chapter 5 343 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei CAUTION Remote Command Reference SOURce Subsystem ESA E4405B 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps ESA E4407B E4408B 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps Default Unit dB Front Panel Access Source Attenuation Auto Man Automatic Source Attenuation SOURce POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SOURce POWer ATTenuation AUTO Selects if the source output level attenuator will be set automatically or manually Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access Source Attenuation Auto Man Sets the Output Power SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude ampl SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UP DOWN SOURce POWer LEVe1 IMMediate AMPLitude Specifies the source output power level Use SOURce POWer SWEep to set the change in power level across the sweep Also see SOURce POWer STARt and OUTPut
426. th these measurements are located in Volume 2 One Button Power Measurements The filename extension is CSV This command will fail if the file lt file name gt already exists Example MMEM STOR RES A ACP CSV Front Panel Access File Save Type Measurement Results Store a Screen Image in a Graphic File MMEMory STORe SCReen file name Saves the current instrument screen image as a graphic file to the specified file in memory The file must have a gif or wmf file extension The specified file extension determines which file format the instrument will use to save the image Use the MMEM SCReen BACKground REVerse command to reverse the display image before saving the screen file Example MMEM STOR SCR C myscreen gif Remarks This command will fail if the ile name gt already exists Front Panel Access File Save Type Screen Store an Instrument State in a File MMEMory STORe STATe 1 lt file name gt Saves the instrument state to the file in memory This file data is only readable by the analyzer Example MMEM STOR STAT 1 C mystate sta Remarks You must be in Spectrum Analysis mode to use this command The SAV commands stores all of the mode states This command will fail if the ile name gt already exists 298 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference MMEMory Subsystem Store a Trace in a File MMEMory STORe TRACe label file name Saves the specified trace to a file in memory The
427. the normalized reference position This may be useful if the device to be tested has positive gain such as an amplifier Now replace the thru line with the device under test and an accurate measurement of the gain or loss can be made Key Access Trace View More Normalize Sets the level in dB of the normalized reference Key Access Trace View More Normalize Offsets the displayed trace without affecting the instrument gain or attenuation settings This allows the displayed trace to be 165 m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be 5 be bi Front Panel Key Reference Trace View moved without decreasing measurement accuracy The normalized reference position is indicated with a gt character on the left side of the display and a character on the right side of the display Key Access Trace View More Normalize Ref Trace View Blank Allows you to view or blank the reference trace on the display Key Access Trace View More Normalize ai 9 E D E E E EI Pa Em x E D Ba A 5 e 166 Chapter2 Free Run Video NOTE Line NOTE External Pos Neg TV RF Burst Front Panel Key Reference Trig Trig Accesses the menu of keys that allow you to select the sweep mode and trigger mode of the analyzer New sweep starts as soon as possible after the current sweep ends Key Access Trig Activates the trigger condition that allows the next
428. the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth Si ge S et oO a S S E E Ki a Si g bi Ki e oO Factory Preset and RST 1 0 Range 0 00001 to 3 0e6 Front Panel Access BW Avg VBW RBW Ratio Video to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio Mode Select SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio AUTO Selects auto or manual mode for video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth ratio Chapter 5 307 Remote Command Reference SENSe BANDwidth Subsection Refer to Figure 2 3 on page 61 which is a flowchart that illustrates VBW and RBW Ratio auto rules Factory Preset and RST On History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access BW Avg VBW RBW Auto Man ai 9 E D E E E EI ki E Q 2 E EI 308 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference SENSe CORRection Subsection SENSe CORRection Subsection Delete All Corrections SENSe CORRection CSET ALL DELete This command deletes all existing corrections History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Delete All Corrections Perform Amplitude Correction SENSe CORRection CSET ALL STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe CORRection CSET ALL STATe Turns On or Off the amplitude corrections When turned On only the correction sets that were turned on are enabled When turned Off all of the corr
429. tified peaks by increasing frequency Smooth Trace Data TRACe MATH SMOoth trace Smooths the trace according to the number of points specified in TRACe MATH SMOoth POINts There is no equivalent front panel function Traces are TRACEII213 and RAWTRACE commands The purpose of this function is to perform a spatial video averaging as compared to the temporal version supplied by the video average command SENSe AVERage TYPE VIDeo The functions of TRACe MATH SMOoth trace and SENSe AVERage TYPE VIDeo POWer are not interchangeable Each point value is replaced with the average of the values of the selected number of points with half of those points located on each side of any particular point when possible Refer to Figure 5 2 This figure illustrates a 401 point trace with a smoothing number of 31 Think of the trace points as buckets of data To smooth arbitrary point 273 the analyzer averages buckets 258 through 287 and applies that value to point 273 374 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference TRACe Subsystem Figure 5 2 Smoothing With 401 Trace Points and 31 Smoothing Points cl71a Increasing the number of points increases smoothing at the cost of decreasing resolution The amount of smoothing decreases at the end points Because TRACe MATH SMOoth trace averages values that occur before and after the data point in time display irregularities can be caused at the start and stop
430. time increases the sweep rate The sweep time can be changed using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad In non zero Spans When the sweep time is auto coupled the analyzer selects the optimum shortest sweep time for the current settings This selection process is influenced by several factors The maximum tuning rate of the spectrum analyzer e The selected Resolution Bandwidth and Video Bandwidth filters The maximum sample rate of the Analog to Digital converter ADC Trace data are digitized and stored in memory The number of trace points Sweep Points The Amplitude Scale logarithmic or linear The Detector mode You may select a sweep time less than the auto coupled value however this may generate measurement errors If this happens the error message Meas Uncal will appear in the upper right corner of the display When the Average detector is selected and the amplitude scale is linear the fastest sweet time is 8 milliseconds In zero span The minimum sweep time is determined by the maximum sample rate of the ADC and the number of sweep points With Option B7D the fastest sweep time is 2 5 microseconds with 101 sweep points As the number of points increases the sweep time increases With Option AYX the fastest sweep time is 5 microseconds with 101 sweep points With neither option installed the fastest sweep time is 1 millisecond with 101 sweep points and 4 milliseconds with 401 sweep points
431. ting previously selected even through a power cycle Serial Port Transmit Pace Setup SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 TRANsmit PACE XON NONE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 TRANsmit PACE Set the transmit pace to on or none for an instrument with the RS 232 interface installed Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument If no optional serial port number is specified port 1 is assumed Factory Preset no RST The factory default is none This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Hardware Configuration Query SYSTem CONFigure HARDware Returns string of information about the current hardware in the instrument Front Panel Access System Show Hardware Display the Hardware Configuration SYSTem CONFigure HARDware STATe OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem CONFigure HARDware STATe Chapter 5 363 z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S c c D 7 oO au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference SYSTem Subsystem Shows the current hardware configuration of the instrument on the display Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access System Show Hdwr Query License Key Information SYSTem CONFigure LKEY Returns a comma separated list of options with their respective license keys Factory Preset and RST Off Example SYST CONF LKEY The above query
432. tion where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The Questionable Status Frequency Event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters Event registers are destructive read only Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register To query the event register send the command STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt See Questionable Status Event Enable Register on page 212 for an explanation of how to set the summary bit using the event enable register In this case use the command STATus QUEStionable FREQ ENABle num Chapter 4 217 K e ES E 2 Si ys CH K Lg wn Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions STATus QUEStionable CALibration Register Figure 4 13 Questionable Status Calibration Register Diagram Reserved Reserved TG Align Failure RF Align Failure IF Align Failure LO Align Failure ADC AlignFailure FM Demod Align Failure Misc Sys Align Failure Unused Tracking Peak Needed Align RF Skipped Align RF Now Needed Reserved Align Needed Always Zero 0 ra E KI 2 2 On EI G Ka zl E Ki E Ke QUEStionable Status CALibration Condition Register 15 14 13 12 11 109 87 65 4 3 2 1 QUEStionable Status EE CALibration Positive 15 14 13 12 11109 87 654 32 10 Transition Filter coe Status MRRUMERII
433. tion is only available when in Zero Span It is grayed out when in swept span If this key is pressed in swept spans the error message Trigger Offset unavailable in swept spans is displayed in the status line The value and state of Trigger Offset is remembered if Zero Span is exited and restored when Zero Span is reselected This function is only available with Resolution Bandwidths of 1 kHz or greater If this key is pressed when the Resolution Bandwidths is less than 1 kHz the error message Trigger Offset unavailable in bandwidths 1 kHzis displayed in the status line While Trigger Offset is on it is not possible for the instrument to be set to a Resolution Bandwidth less than 1 kHz Any attempt to do so will cause the error message Bandwidths 1 kHz unavailable with Trigger Offset onto be displayed in the status line Option B7B TV Trigger and Picture on Screen only Accesses the setup functions for TV Trigger Key Access Trig Field Allows you to determine how the fields of the TV picture signal will be affected by the trigger system One complete TV image consists of one frame of 525 or 625 horizontal lines depending on the TV standard being used Each frame is composed of two fields of interlacing lines each consisting of 262 1 2 lines or 312 1 2 lines The fields are called Field One and Field Two Field One is viewed as having 263 lines or 313 lines and Field Two is viewed as having 262 lines or 312 lines For the
434. tion is performed and can be heard throughout the sweep With non zero spans in AM the Video BW is set to 3 KHz and the Resolution BW is set to 10 kHz In FM the Video BW is set to 30 kHz and the Resolution BW is set to 100 kHz When AM or FM demod is enabled the instrument will tune to the marker frequency and wait for the Demod to take place Demod Time is not available unless AM or FM demod is selected and span is gt 0 Hz For long demodulation times pressing Preset when Preset Type is set to Factory will abort the Demod function The default value is 500 ms Key Access Det Demod Demod It is normal to hear clicking sounds when the Auto Alignment function is On During retrace a small portion of the analyzer circuitry is realigned Some of the switching of the analyzer circuitry is done using relays It is the rapid switching of these relays during retrace that causes the clicking sounds To eliminate the clicking sounds turn the auto alignment off by pressing System Alignments Auto Align Off When this is done the Align Now All function should be performed periodically Refer to the Specifications Guide for your instrument to learn more information on how often to perform Align Now All when the auto alignment is off Squelch 70 Allows you to adjust the squelch level The squelch level mutes weak signals and passes strong signals Only the audio level is affected If the internal speaker is On audio signals are not
435. to enable Preset sets all bits in this enable register to 0 To have any Operation Events reported to the Status Byte Register 1 or more bits must be set to 1 Factory Preset z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 S g D 7 and RST 0 Range Integer 0 to 32767 Operation Event Query STATus OPERation EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Operation Event register The register requires that the equivalent PIR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the data is cleared Chapter 5 349 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference STATus Subsystem Operation Negative Transition STATus OPERation NTRansition lt integer gt STATus OPERation NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Operation Event register when that bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable lt integer gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 0 Range Integer 0 to 32767 Operation Positive Transition STATus OPERation PTRansition lt integer gt STATus OPERation PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set th
436. to ranging to set the optimum signal gain for digital processing This technique produces the greatest measurement range without overloading the digital system To increase the measurement speed this IF Gain auto ranging may be set to fixed mode When in fixed mode make sure the signal is not set above the reference level and the reference is set so that the signal is within the display range When in fixed mode the measurement has approximately 70 dB of display range Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale IF Gain Auto Fixed front panel access is available with firmware revision A 06 00 and later Normalized Reference Level DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe NRLevel rel ampl Si ge S et oO a S S 5 ge Iz a Si amp bi Ki e oO DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe NRLevel Sets the normalized reference level See command CALCulate NTData STATe OFF ON 0 1 Factory Preset and RST 0 dB Range 327 6 to 327 6 dB Default Unit Current active units Front Panel Access View Trace Normalize Norm Ref Lvl Chapter 5 273 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE NOTE Remote Command Reference DISPlay Subsystem Normalized Reference Level Position DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe NRPosition integer DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe NRPosition Selects the position of the normalized reference level The top and bottom graticule lines
437. triggering Key Access Sweep Gate Slope Pos Neg Sets the polarity for edge triggering of the gate When Slope Pos is pressed a positive going edge will trigger the opening of the gate after the delay set with the Gate Delay key When Slope Neg is pressed a negative going edge will trigger the opening of the gate after the set delay Key Access Sweep Gate Edge Gate Gate Delay Controls the length of time from the trigger until the gate is turned on Key Access Sweep Gate Edge Gate Gate Length Controls the length of time that the gate is on when using edge triggering to control the gate Key Access Sweep Gate Edge Gate Level Gate High Low Sets up level polarity that will open the gate Requires Option 1D6 Level Gate High Selects a high TTL level to open the gate Level Gate Low selects a low TTL level to open the gate Key Access Sweep Gate Allows you to set the number of points per sweep from 101 to 8192 in non zero span and 2 to 8192 in zero span firmware revision A 05 00 and greater Use the knob step keys or numeric keypad to set this value When the sweep time is limited by the Analog to Digital Converter ADC sample rate the sweep time 144 Chapter2 NOTE Segmented NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Sweep changes with the number of points selected The greater the number of points the longer the sweep time becomes If Preset is pressed and Preset Type is set to Factor
438. tting the span to 0 Hz puts the analyzer into zero span Factory Preset and RST ESA E4401 B E4411B 1 5 GHz ESA E4402B E4403B 3 0 GHz ESA E4404B 6 7 GHz ESA E4405B 13 2 GHz ESA E4407B E4408B 26 5 GHz Range ESA E4401B E4411B 0 Hz 100 Hz to 1 58 GHz ESA E4402B E4403B 0 Hz 100 Hz to 3 10 GHz ESA E4404B 0 Hz 100 Hz to 6 78 GHz 322 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference SENSe FREQuency Subsection ESA E4405B 0 Hz 100 Hz to 13 3 GHz ESA E4407B E4408B 0 Hz 100 Hz to 27 0 GHz Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access SPAN X Scale Span SPAN X Scale Zero Span Full Frequency Span SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL Set the frequency span to full scale Factory Preset and RST ESA E4401B E4411B 1 5 GHz ESA E4402B E4403B 3 0 GHz ESA E4404B 6 7 GHz ESA E4405B 13 2 GHz ESA E4407B E4408B 26 5 GHz Front Panel Access SPAN X Scale Full Span Last Frequency Span SENSe FREQuency SPAN PREVious Set the frequency span to the previous span setting z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 07 Front Panel Access SPAN X Scale Last Span Start Frequency SENSe FREQuency STARt freq SENSe FREQuency STARt Set the start frequency NOTE In log sweep mode the minimum start frequency is 10 Hz Factory Preset Chapter 5 323 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei Remote Command Reference SENSe FREQuency S
439. u SPAN X Scale Span Full Span Last Span On Off Scale Div Ref Value Ref Position a Appears only when Power Stat CCDF is selected in the MEASURE menu b Appears only when Spectrum Emission Mask is selected in the MEASURE menu c Available only when the upper window is active An active function which allows data entry pl714a Ka Ki E E E EI 410 Chapter 6 Menu Maps Sweep Menu Sweep Menu mU Sweep Gate Edge Gate Sweep Time Gate Slope On Off Pos Gate Control Single Cont Edge Level Auto Swee Coupling Edge Gate 67 ilz el o ol 3 oO e Gate Delay Gate Length Ka Level Gate c High Low Gate p Gata WE Points Segmented a o Segmented Edit Segmented Segment Sweep Time o 3 IS Modify Center Freq Span Res BW Segment Video BW a Agilent ESA E Series only E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B and E4407B b Grayed out unless Edge is selected as Gate Control c Grayed out unless Level is selected as Gate Control d Agilent ESA E Series only with Option 1D6 Time Gated Spectrum Analysis E4401B E4402B E4404B E4405B and E4407B Anactive function which allows data entry pl769b sde Dua Chapter 6 411 Menu Maps System Menu System Menu System System Time Date Power On Preset Preset Type Show Errors Time Date Power On Show Errors Off Last Preset e User Prev Pag
440. ubsection and RST 0 Hz Range ESA E4401B E4411B 80 MHz to 1 58 GHz ESA E4402B E4403B 80 MHz to 3 10 GHz ESA E4404B 80 MHz to 6 78 GHz ESA E4405B 80 MHz to 13 3 GHz ESA E4407B E4408B 80 MHz to 27 0 GHz Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Channel Start Freq Stop Frequency SENSe FREQuency STOP freq SENSe FREQuency STOP Set the stop frequency Factory Preset and RST ESA E4401 B E4411B 1 5 GHz ESA E4402B E4403B 3 0 GHz ESA E4404B 6 7 GHz ESA E4405B 13 2 GHz ESA E4407B E4408B 26 5 GHz Range ESA E4401B E4411B 80 MHz to 1 58 GHz ESA E4402B E4403B 80 MHZ to 3 10 GHz ESA E4404B 80 MHZ to 6 78 GHz ESA E4405B 80 MHz to 13 3 GHz ESA E4407B E4408B 80 MHZ to 27 0 GHz Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Channel Stop Freq 1 10 Hz minimum in log sweep mode 2 10 Hz minimum in log sweep mode 324 Chapter5 Remote Command Reference SENSe FREQuency Subsection Frequency Synthesis Mode SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis 1 2 3 SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis This command switches between two phase noise optimization modes Mode 2 optimizes the analyzer for close in phase noise Mode 3 optimizes the analyzer for tuning speed Mode 1 is not recommended for new designs This command is available for the following models only E4402B E4403B E4404B E4405B E4407B E4408B Factory Preset and RST 3 History Added with firmware
441. uded in the RMS average for each trace interval depends on the sweep time the resolution bandwidth and whether or not option B7D is installed With option B7D installed more samples are available as appropriate for wider resolution bandwidths and faster sweep times Slower sweep times also increase the number of samples averaged for each trace interval When Average is selected Avg appears on the left side of the display When the Average detector is selected in linear amplitude scale mode the fastest sweet time is 8 milliseconds Peak Sample Negative Peak 56 Key Access Auto Couple Detector Auto Man Peak detection is used primarily when measuring sinusoidal spectral components Peak detection obtains the maximum video signal value between the last display point and the present display point and stores this value in memory When Preset Type is set to Factory peak detection is selected at power on and by pressing Preset When Peak detection is selected Peak appears in the upper left corner of the display Key Access Auto Couple Detector Auto Man Sample detection is used primarily to display noise or noise like signals This detection should not be used to make the most accurate amplitude measurement of non noise like signals In sample mode the instantaneous signal value at the present display point is placed in memory When Sample detection is selected Samp appears in the upper left corner of the display Key A
442. ue Trace averaging is on with average type of video e Both max and min hold trace modes are on Resolution bandwidth is less than 1 KHz and noise marker band power markers or trace averaging is on e Quasi peak detection Option AYQ EMI Average detection Option AYQ The detector type is negative peak if any trace is in min hold and no traces are in max hold The detector type is peak if the above conditions are off Manually changing the detector function turns Auto off Refer to Figure 2 1 on page 55 which shows a decision tree of how detection type is determined Factory Preset and RST On History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Modified with A 14 00 Front Panel Access Det Demod Detector Type of Detection SENSe DETector FUNCtion NEGative POSitive SAMPle AVERage RMS SENSe DETector FUNCtion Specifies the detection mode For each trace interval bucket average detection 316 Chapter5 NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe DETector Subsection displays the average of all the samples within the interval The averaging can be done using two methods the power method RMS the video method Y Axis Units The method is controlled by the BW Avg Avg Type key The combination of the average detector and the power average type is equivalent to what is sometimes referred to as RMS detection Negative peak detection displays the lowest sample taken du
443. ue 50 sec during the adjustment so that the gate signal is valid most of the time When the adjustment is done you can set the analyzer back to the desired sweep time or set it back to Auto Couple Key Access Sweep Gate Trig Delay On and Gate On cannot be active at the same time If Trig Delay On has been previously selected it will be reset to Trig Delay Off when Gate On is selected Conversely if Gate On has been previously selected it will be reset to S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Chapter 2 143 E 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E D Ba 5 x e NOTE Points Front Panel Key Reference Sweep Gate Off when Trig Delay On is selected If Gate On is selected without an external trigger signal present operating other functions such as tracking frequency count or preselector centering may cause the analyzer to stop functioning until it is powered on again Gate Control Edge Level Allows you to select between Edge and Level triggering of the gate Gate Control Edge opens the gate in response to an edge trigger on the trigger input after a delay set in Gate Delay The gate stays open for the selected Gate Length When Gate Control Level is selected the gate is open as long as the trigger input is true as defined under the Level Gate key Key Access Sweep Gate Edge Gate Accesses menu keys that allow you to set up edge
444. urther To prevent the marker from identifying noise as signals reduce the noise floor variance to a value less than the peak excursion value by reducing the video bandwidth or by using video averaging Key access Peak Search More Search Criteria Peak Threshold Sets the minimum amplitude of signals that the marker can identify as a peak For example if a value of 90 dBm is selected the marker moves only to peaks that rise and fall more than the peak excursion value above 90 dBm Pressing Preset Chapter 2 117 m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be 5 be bi Front Panel Key Reference Peak Search or turning the Power on resets the excursion to 6 dB and the threshold to 90 dBm The value of the threshold appears in the active function block and on the lower left side of the display The threshold level does not influence the trace memory or marker position The value of the peak threshold level can be changed using the step keys the knob or the numeric keypad Pressing any digit 0 through 9 on the numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu Key access Peak Search More Search Criteria Peak Search Type Allows you to select the peak search mode Key access Peak Search More Search Criteria Max Value When Peak Search Type is set to Max Value a peak search places a marker on the highest peak excluding the LO feedthrough peak Key Access Peak Search More Search Criteria Peak S
445. us eme edd ese EERSTEN RACE IE RR Oe 203 Standard Event Status Event Enable Register AE ases rrr RR Rp REA 205 STATUSOPER Aion Register vic SecveekeveekexwebedsusPesuesbsceh PX rA e ird eT ERE d 205 STATus OPERation Condition and Event Enable Registers 207 Contents E z oO s Q S oO SIAlusQUEShRonable Registets oc 6 cag ee bees oe SEES Rao SEE LOE SEVERE NEAR TIERRA Tr 208 n STATS QUES tonable PO Wer Register obs RT VOS E ERE E ERAS CE C bbs ed 21 Questionable Status Event Enable Register 2 tuer REENERT ECES 212 Questionable Status Power Condition and Event Registers 00000000000 214 STATus QUESaonable PREQue cy Reglstet cesssckessek kr Rye RE RR RR EN 215 Questionable Status Frequency Condition and Event Enable Registers 217 STATus QUEStionable CALibration Register EE EEN REENEN mme 218 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated Register 221 Questionable Status Calibration Condition and Event Enable Registers uuu 222 Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition and Event Enable Registers 223 SIATus QUESRmonable IN Tegrity Reglstet i2iuossxes AER EELER DERERG ERR3G RR 224 Questionable Status Integrity Event Condition and Enable Registers 226 5 Remote Command Reference SCPI SEChOns and EE 229 TE EE e discos deeds cox i En E boo weed RAGE cR E cep eee Dye ee 231 Calbianon QUE PC
446. ution BW 307 ratio auto manual 307 values 306 bandwidth ratio video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth 61 baud rate RS 232 bus 190 serial bus receive 362 binary data order 278 Blank 164 blanking the trace 377 Bluetooth FM Demodulation 38 69 book using 36 brightness display angle 269 burst trigger level 380 RF 381 RF absolute 380 RF burst relative 381 RF narrow pulse discriminator 382 bus configuration 361 BW Avg 60 BW Avg front panel key 111 BW Avg menu map 395 byte order of data 278 C Cable Correction On Off key 42 Edit key 43 cable amplitude Delete Correction key 45 cable amplitude correction Frequency key 43 cable amplitude corrections Amplitude key 45 Delete Point key 45 Index 415 Index Point key 43 Cable key amplitude corrections 42 CALCulate subsystem commands 237 calibration align all assemblies 261 align now 231 automatic 262 automatic mode 261 command introduction 261 corrections on off 263 defaults 262 frequency reference adjustment 263 frequency reference query 263 IEEE command 231 reference on off 264 RF 264 tracking generator 265 catalog memory disk 293 Center Freq 96 center frequency 96 setting 321 step size 321 322 CF Step Auto Man 96 CF step size 110 Change Title 78 Clear Error Queue 151 156 clear status IEEE command 231 Clear Title 77 78 Clear Write 163 clock setup 153 CLS command description 197 Co
447. vailable in SA mode see Mode key Other measurements are available in other modes if an optional personality is installed use the appropriate user s guide for information about those modes Displays the setup menu for the currently selected measurement The Meas Setup menu choices depend on the currently selected Mode and Measurement This menu is empty if no measurement is active No measurement is active if Meas Off is selected in the Measure menu m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q Chapter 2 111 au 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E E D Ba 5 x e Restart Measure Single Cont Pause Front Panel Key Reference Meas Control Meas Control If a measurement is active then this key accesses a menu to pause resume or restart one of the measurements available in the MEASURE key menu Meas Control also allows you to select between continuous and single sweeps measurements Press MEASURE and then select one of the available measurements Once the desired measurement is selected press Meas Control Meas Control accesses the following keys Performs the same functions as the Restart front panel key It repeats your measurement from the beginning Pressing Restart while a measurement is being made will halt the current measurement at the first possible stopping point and repeat the measurement Key Access Meas Control Measure Single takes one measurement sweep and disp
448. values The fastest mode is UINTeger 16 UINTeger 16 Binary 16 bit unsigned integer uncorrected ADC values ina definite length block Integer 32 Binary 32 bit unsigned integer uncorrected ADC values in a definite length block A definite length block of data starts with an ASCII header that begins with and indicates how many additional trace points are following in the block Suppose the header is 512320 The first digit in the header 5 tells you how many additional digits bytes there are in the header The 12320 means that 12 320 data bytes follow the header Divide this number of bytes by your selected data format bytes point either 8 fo Real 64 4 for Real 320r Int 32 0r2 for UINT 16 In this example if you are using Real 64 then there are 1540 trace points in the block z S et Q E E 5 Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 07 Corrected Trace Data Types TRACe DATA trace name Data Type Result ASCII Amplitude Units INT 32 fastest Internal Units REAL 32 Amplitude Units REAL 64 Amplitude Units Chapter 5 279 Remote Command Reference FORMat Subsystem Uncorrected Trace Data Types TRACe DATA RAWTRACE Data Type Result INT 32 Uncorrected ADC Values UINT 16 fastest Uncorrected ADC Values Factory Preset and RST ASCII 2 9 E D E E E EI ki E Q 2 E EI 280 Chapter 5 Remo
449. ve Transition A eucckiaeku oes pede EE ERR 352 Ouestionable C onge EE EELER 486404 RR ERA DEL ROE EREE RON EK EE A 352 esana te Enable i2zosce suck aere Ra upper ER ERES ue E iE SC EE eC FIR 353 Cuespod able Event COP ooa esq opa do ope dc dic UH Bor arid bee D ou EE 353 Questionable Frequency CondllioD 2 05 esce eee x SEN ERREUR PR eo 453 Questionable Prequency Enable 2sscireseRrsescbeseetEkesweeqeskesekkrsexkkseribbees 354 Questionable Frequency EE EE EE 354 Questionable Frequency Negative Transition 92 sera s erkes EPEE SERES EEREE NE 354 Questionable Prequency Positive Transition EEN EEN rh REPRE RR ERRARE ERA 355 Questionable Intesrity Condon EE EEN 3353 Questionable Internity Enable 4 SES awed Weed TE EE AER EE RE EEN 335 Questionable Internity Event QUEI E bR REDE RE Ari 435 Questionable Integrity Negative Transition EE RR RR RR 356 Questionable Integrity Posi ve T nten AER EE eh E 356 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable 502i cse or RR m RR Re 356 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Ouer 357 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition 0 0 00 eee ee eee 357 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition llle eee 397 Questionable Negative TENSION un dE ibas Eb pda dagen eebe re des dep desea ENT 358 Questionable Power Condition iscscRie 4 REROXCRERI E RERREREdAwRER DROAAWRESA REESE 358 Cueshe lower BOSE ou aoa s veut np rnt Rd ege die ced nda 358 Questionable Power Event QUOI s
450. ve the display line Key Access Search More Peak Table Peak Readout Display Line Shows only peaks below the display line Key Access Search More Peak Table Peak Readout S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e D Si c g E 3 Q 119 au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E NOTE NOTE Front Panel Key Reference Preset Preset Provides a known convenient starting point of the instrument state for making measurements You can select whether a user preset mode preset or factory preset is performed When you press Preset the default is Mode preset which will set the analyzer to the default state for the current mode The user preset is user defined using the Save User Preset function in the System menu Press System Power On Preset Save User Preset The Preset Type selection User Mode or Factory can be set by pressing System Power On Preset Preset Type The Preset menu keys are only available when the Preset Type key in the System menu is set to User Press System Power On Preset Preset Type User If Preset Type is set to Factory in the System menu Pressing the Preset front panel key performs a factory preset which performs the following e Resets the analyzer to Spectrum Analyzer SA mode Brings up the Freq Channel menu Sets certain conditions to their default values e Performs a processor test but does not affect alignment data e Cle
451. verview of GPIB COpiron AGED ius sudare bore E RERO RR RU EELER katas RR cob RR Rn 188 GPUS Instyuent INomenclabuie ier pts RRREYE EE E EE ee 188 Cry C oinand SISIEHIBIDES iu e bd Fe FOR bog ve rep ebd ep ebeqdeba diee qu eta p 188 Overview of B3 232 Option LX 6 ince eset stc ee ye RR RR OUR Ue HEAR dd 190 Settings Jor the Serial Interface A 4 AE A 20404 RIS R3 qu be DE Red RE nid sho Rr dd Ra ERS 190 Handshake and Baud Rate 4 deb peek yer bee eda ur eee ee eek Mae ER ER gd 190 Chsrdcter Port Paramstel peee ea an er PEE UC PCPER ERE goes gap ERR PESE 190 Miodem Line Haudshalmnp EE 191 Lee Pris oses esr bekkro AST PRRepPRES ERR RN ES El ERN Rb ec bie eisieees 191 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Condons 194 NWhabdsp Tao Bid INS RESIS Lose dle Epp E ES WD ERES br bie ie be ied bed e babe 194 How Do You Access the Status RestsTeta eh SERENA EP 197 Using the Service Request SRO Method Ji seesca esee EELER KEEN RR IR EE ease wean 199 Generating a Service Request ic 0h seeds vede Rea Ohio Gener shee shinee EE 199 Settiap and Querying the Status Register cscs ATERT ok od EE EAS ERE TR E RR RE RE RE EY 200 Details of Bits m All Begist is cs oseezusccrestt Rx SURE RE GUERRE ED RACER CR UR AUR Rd 201 Status Byte ROSET 14d rxbedentpetthVERERGUERASSMEORERESUEDER PME EI UP Ib eq 201 Service Request Enable Register 42 999 49 19 0 9 QUU Y e Hee eee P bg dedii 202 Standard Event Stat
452. will set Zone On if it is off Zone Center 138 Allows you to change the frequency of the zone markers without changing the zone span The zone markers are vertical lines marking the zone in the upper window They determine the frequency range displayed in the lower window As the zone markers in the upper window are moved the center frequency of the lower window is changed but the lower window will not be updated to reflect the change unless it is selected as the active window See Zone On Off The center frequency for the lower window is not limited by the Chapter2 Zone Span Front Panel Key Reference SPAN X Scale selected start and stop frequencies in the upper window However if the frequency span of the lower window is outside of the span for the upper window the vertical span markers will be displayed at the edge of the graticule When the lower window is active the FREQUENCY Channel key will allow you to change Zone Center Any change to the lower window while it is active will change the center frequency Key Access SPAN X Scale Zone Allows the span of the zone markers to be changed without changing the center frequency The zone markers are vertical lines marking the zone in the upper window They determine the frequency range displayed in the lower window As the zone markers are moved the span of the lower window is changed but the lower window will not be updated to reflect the change unless it is s
453. without an external controller to a previously specified graphics printer Refer to Printer Setup and Operation in your Getting Started or Programmer s Guide for detailed information about printing Press the Print key to immediately print the screen to the currently defined printer The screen remains frozen no further sweeps are taken until the data transfer to the printer is complete Refer to the Print Setup key description in this chapter for more information about the structure and definitions of the printer keys If you need to abort a print in progress use the ESC escape key NOTE Printing requires an I O interface The Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzers Programmer s Guide included with the optional interfaces provides interface details Refer to Printer Setup and Operation in the Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzers Getting Started Guide for more information about printing m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be 5 be bi Chapter 2 125 au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Printer Type Define Custom Front Panel Key Reference Print Setup Print Setup Option A4H GPIB and Parallel or AX RS 232 and Parallel only Accesses the menu keys which allow you to define a printer and select printer options Accesses the Printer Type menu keys When you connect your printer and press the Print key the analyzer will attempt to identify your printer If ident
454. y or the analyzer power is cycled the number of points per sweep will default to 401 The current value of points is displayed next to the sweep time When FREQUENCY Scale Type Log is selected the desired number of sweep points may not be possible Refer to Scale Type Log Lin on page 98 for more information Changing the number of points has several effects on the analyzer Since markers are read at the point location the marker reading may change Press Peak Search again for greater accuracy in the marker reading All trace data for the current window is cleared If in continuous sweep mode Sweep Sweep Cont a new sweep begins immediately If average is on BW Avg Average On the averaging starts over with a count of 0 With firmware revisions prior to A 08 00 if Limit Lines are on Display Limits Modify Limit 1 or 2 On they are turned off Key Access Sweep By selecting a number of sweep points greater than 401 you are optimizing frequency resolution and accuracy while accepting a reduced measurement speed In addition to sweep points the span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth average detection and center frequency will also affect measurement speed This function is not available when signal identification is on Input Output Input Mixer Signal Ident On When zone span is on Span Zone Zone On each window has its own value for points This feature is not available in the ESA L Series The nu
455. y STATe This command activates an algorithm which either removes or aids with the identification of multiple responses These responses are generated from a single input signal using non preselected external mixers Factory Preset and RST Off History Added with firmware revision A 03 00 Remarks Signal identification relies on the acquisition of data from two successive sweeps Therefore if the analyzer is in single sweep mode two sweep triggers are needed to generate the sweep pair In image suppress mode synchronization is ensured by first turning off signal identification initiating a single sweep then turning on signal identification followed by two single sweeps 332 Chapter 5 NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe SIDentify Subsection To synchronize in image shift mode turn off signal identification initiate a single sweep and turn on signal identification The results of the first sweep after signal identification is turned on must be ignored The data from the second sweep is available in Trace 1 and the data from the third shifted sweep is available in Trace 2 Signal identification is not available with signal track resolution bandwidths lt 300 Hz demod or averaging Signal identification will be turned off when input mixer is set to internal Front Panel Access Input Output or Input Input Mixer Signal Ident On Off Si ge S et oO a S S E E Ki a Si amp bi Ki
456. y adjusted from 0 to 60 dB in 10 dB steps All other Agilent ESA analyzers can be manually adjusted from 0 to 56 dB in 8 dB steps When auto coupled the attenuation function automatically adjusts the attenuator to yield the source amplitude level specified by the Amplitude On Off softkey function For the Agilent E4401B and E4411B press Attenuation Man for power sweeps greater than 10 dB Key Access Source Allows you to set the step size of the power level range of the tracking generator The default setting is one vertical scale division when in a logarithmic amplitude scale Key Access Source Offsets the displayed power of the tracking generator Using the amplitude offset Chapter 2 133 m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be 5 be bi E 9 E D E E Ei m Si ei E D Ba 5 x e Front Panel Key Reference Source capability of the tracking generator allows you to take system losses or gains into account thereby displaying the actual power delivered to the device under test Key Access Source Normalize Key Access Source Store Ref 1 3 Normalize On Off Copies trace 1 into trace 3 Store Ref 1 3 must be pressed before pressing Normalize On If Normalize On is pressed before Store Ref 1 3 the error message Store reference trace before turning on Normalize is displayed in the status line however Normalize has been activated Key Access
457. y Reference File and yellow traces to green so they can be printed visibly and with less use of black ink Screen images cannot be loaded back into the analyzer Key Access File Save When Type is set to Trace Source allows you to save trace 1 2 or 3 along with state Saving trace All saves all traces in a single tre file along with the state When Type is set to Corrections Source accesses the Antenna Cable Other and User menu keys which allow you to select the type of correction to be saved When Type is set to Limits Source accesses the Limit 1 and Limit 2 menu keys Limit 1 and Limit 2 provide data sets to determine whether a trace has exceeded preset specifications Limit sets can hold up to 200 points and can only be saved individually Key Access File Save Accesses the Alpha Editor and allows you to enter a filename The external keyboard can also be used to enter a filename while the alpha editor is accessed Key Access File Save Only capital letters A Z and digits 0 9 may appear in file names 8 characters maximum Additionally file names include a 3 character extension which is automatically set by the instrument Chapter 2 85 m S 5 T an Di 5 amp G i e WI Si c g E 3 Q au 9 E D E E Ei m ei 3 D Ba 5 x E Load Front Panel Key Reference File Dir Up Dir Select Allows you to move up one directory level If at the top
458. y available with Option 1DS installed Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Int Preamp On Off Input Port Maximum Mixer Power SENSe POWer RF MIXer RANGe UPPer ampl SENSe POWer RF MIXer RANGe UPPer Specifies the maximum power at the input mixer Factory Preset and RST 10 dBm Range 100 dBm to 10 dBm Default Unit dBm Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Max Mixer Lvl Optimize Preselector Frequency SENSe POWer RF PADJust freq SENSe POWer RF PADJust This command allows user defined adjustment of the preselector frequency to 330 Chapter 5 NOTE Remote Command Reference SENSe POWer Subsection optimize its response on the signal of interest Factory Preset and RST 0 Hz Range 250 MEz to 250 MHz Default Unit None Use the MHz terminator in order for this command to work Remarks This command is available only on Agilent ESA models E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B Use this command for signals close to the noise level multiple signals close together or for other conditions when the preselector is not tuned to the frequency of interest Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Presel Adjust Preselector Center SENSe POWer RF PCENter In internal mixing this command centers the preselector filter at the signal of interest In external mixing the external preselector filter is adjusted to the peak of the filter response to
459. y be changed depending on the preamplifier gain entered A preamplifier gain offset is used for measurements that require an external preamplifier or long cables The offset is subtracted from the amplitude readout so that the displayed signal level represents the signal level at the input of the preamplifier The preamplifier gain offset is displayed at the top of the screen and is removed by entering zero The preamplifier gain offset can only be entered using the numeric keypad The preamplifier gain value is not affected by an instrument preset or a power cycle Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More Allows you to change the maximum input mixer level from 10 dBm to 100 dBm in 10 dB steps using the step keys and 1 dB steps using the knob In addition you may use the keypad to specify a value The mixer level is equal to the reference 50 Chapter2 IF Gain Auto Fixed Front Panel Key Reference AMPLITUDE Y Scale level minus the attenuator setting As the reference level changes the input attenuator setting is changed to keep the power levels of on screen signals less than the selected level at the input mixer When Preset Type is set to Factory pressing Preset resets the maximum input mixer level to 10 dBm Key Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale More When using digital resolution bandwidths RBW lt 1 kHz the analyzer uses IF Gain autoranging to set the optimum signal gain for digital processing This technique produces the maximum measurem
460. y emptying the error queue and clearing all bits S in all of the event registers The status byte registers summarize the states of the other registers It is also responsible for generating service requests Remarks See STB Standard Event Status Enable ESE number ESE Sets the bits in the standard event status enable register This register monitors I O errors and synchronization conditions such as operation complete request control query error device dependent error execution error command error and power on A summary bit is generated on execution of the command Chapter 5 231 au 9 E D G o e Ei g e Q 2 E D Ei NOTE Remote Command Reference IEEE Common Commands Query returns the state of the standard event status enable register Range Integer 0 to 255 Standard Event Status Register Query ESR Queries and clears the standard event status event register This is a destructive read Range Integer 0 to 255 Identification Query IDN Returns an instrument identification information string The string will contain the model number serial number and firmware revision The response is organized into four fields separated by commas The field definitions are as follows Manufacturer Model Serial number Firmware version Example Hewlett Packard E4401B US39120213 A 06 00 As shown in the example the analyzer returns Hewlett Packard as the manu
461. y performs the alignment and returns a zero if the alignment is successful This command is only applicable on Agilent ESA models E4402B E4403B E4404B E4405B E4407B and E4408B Before executing this command connect a cable between front panel connector RF OUT and the INPUT connector The alignment will fail using command CAL TG if the cable is not connected Front Panel Access System Alignments Align Now TG z S et Q S E S Hi Iz E 5 t c c D 7 Chapter 5 265 Remote Command Reference CONFigure Subsystem CONFigure Subsystem Configure the Basic Spectrum Analyzer State CONFigure SANalyzer This command causes the present measurement to exit the same functionally as pressing MEASURE Meas Off and places the analyzer in base instrument spectrum analyzer state CONFigure subsystem commands used for measurements in the MEASURE and Meas Setup menus are located in Volume 2 One Button Power Measurements ai 9 E D E E E EI ki E Q 2 E EI 266 Chapter 5 Remote Command Reference COUPIle Subsystem COUPIe Subsystem Some measurement settings are automatically coupled together to optimize speed and accuracy These commands control that coupling COUPIe the Function to Other Settings COUPle ALL NONE COUPle The instrument can automatically couple instrument settings together for accurate measurements and optimum dynamic range This
462. you are on the first page or only one page exists Key Access System More More Personalities Next Page Allows you to view the next page of installed personalities It is grayed out if you are on the last page or only one page exists Key Access System More More Personalities Install Allows you to install personalities in the analyzer For more information on this key see the documentation that accompanies the personalities software Key Access System More More Personalities Uninstall Allows you to uninstall a personality Highlight the appropriate personality and press Uninstall Uninstall Now You will be prompted with the displayed message If you are sure you want to uninstall press Uninstall Now again Some personalities may not be deleted If the attempt is made to do so the message Can t uninstall this program will appear on the display Key Access System More More Personalities Accesses the Service menu keys You must have a password to access this menu 160 Chapter2 Front Panel Key Reference System Local For information refer to the troubleshooting chapter in the your Service Guide Key Access System More More m o e 5 T Wi Di 5 Ki lt Ka Icy be e 5 be bi Chapter 2 161 Front Panel Key Reference Tab Keys Tab Keys The Tab keys are located below the display and are used to move between fields in the tables and forms ai 9 E D E E E EI Pa Em
463. ystem Alignments Align All Now Wait to Continue WAI This command causes the instrument to wait until all pending commands are completed before executing any additional commands There is no query form to the command Chapter 5 235 2 9 E D E E E EI ki Q 2 E EI Remote Command Reference ABORt Subsystem ABORt Subsystem Abort ABORt Restarts any sweep or measurement in progress and resets the sweep or trigger system A measurement refers to any of the measurements found in the MEASURE menu SCPI commands associated with these measurements are located in Volume 2 One Button Power Measurements If INITiate CONTinuous is off single measure then SINITiate IMMediate will start a new single measurement If INITiate CONTinuous is on continuous measure a new continuous measurement begins immediately The INITiate and TRIGger subsystems contain additional related commands Front Panel Access Restart for continuous measurement mode 236 Chapter 5 NOTE Remote Command Reference CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate Subsystem This subsystem is used to perform post acquisition data processing In effect the collection of new data triggers the CALCulate subsystem In this instrument the primary functions in this subsystem are markers and limits CALCulate subsystem commands used for measurements in the MEASURE and Meas Setup menus are located in Volume 2 One Button

User`s/Programmer`s Reference Volume 1, Core

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents